Desamark

Desarrollo web y Marketing digital en Bilbao

Inicio » Certificaciones

Google Analytics Individuelle Qualifikation Prüfung Antworten

Por

 

Google Analytics Individuelle Qualifikation Prüfung Antworten

Google Analytics Individuelle Qualifikation Prüfung Antworten

Google Analytics Individual Qualification Assessment Exam Answers - Academy for ads - 2018

https://www.certificationanswers.com/de/category/google-analytics-individuelle-qualifikation-pruefung-antworten/

 

 

Welche Funktion ist nötig, um die Suchbegriffe zu erfassen, die Nutzer auf einer Website eingeben?

  • Site Search
  • Suchfilter
  • Datenimport
  • Erweiterte E-Commerce-Berichte

 

In welchem Bericht finden Sie eine grafische Darstellung der Nutzerinteraktionen auf einer Website?

  • Strukturkarten
  • Verhaltensfluss
  • Zielseiten
  • Aufschlüsselung nach Content

 

Für welche Art von Zugriffen werden mit der automatischen Tag-Kennzeichnung Daten erhoben?

  • Zugriffe über soziale Netzwerke
  • Verweiszugriffe über Websites
  • Zugriffe über Google Ads-Kampagnen

 

Welchem Channel würde in den Berichten zu Multi-Channel-Trichtern keine Conversion zugeschrieben?

  • Bezahlte und organische Suche
  • Websiteverweise
  • Soziale Netzwerke
  • Fernsehwerbespots

 

In welchem benutzerdefinierten Bericht werden die Daten in einer statischen, sortierbaren Tabelle zeilenweise dargestellt?

  • Pivot-Tabelle
  • Tabellenliste
  • Explorer
  • Karten-Overlay

 

In welchem Bericht sehen Sie, wo Nutzer in den Conversion-Trichter einsteigen bzw. ihn verlassen?

  • Kohortenanalyse
  • Zielvorhabenfluss
  • Strukturkarten
  • Nutzertimings

 

Welches Modell verdeutlicht die hierarchische Struktur eines Google Analytics-Kontos von oben nach unten am besten?

  • Datenansicht > Konto > Property
  • Konto > Datenansicht > Property
  • Konto > Property > Datenansicht
  • Property > Konto > Datenansicht

 

Welche Treffer werden in Google Analytics erfasst?

  • Seitenaufruf
  • Ereignis
  • Transaktion
  • Alle oben genannten Optionen

 

Wenn ein benutzerdefinierter Bericht freigegeben wird, gilt das auch für die Konfiguration und die Daten des Berichts.

  • RICHTIG
  • FALSCH

 

Welche Funktion würden Sie verwenden, um zu erfassen, wie häufig Nutzer einen Produktkatalog herunterladen?

  • Berechnete Messwerte
  • Ereignis-Tracking
  • Benutzerdefinierte Dimension
  • Benutzerdefinierter Bericht

 

Für welchen Umfang gelten benutzerdefinierte Messwerte?

  • Treffer
  • Kunde
  • Nutzer
  • Sitzung

 

Datenansichten können Websitedaten enthalten, die vor dem Erstellen der Datenansicht erfasst wurden.

  • FALSCH
  • RICHTIG

 

Was können Sie tun, damit Berichte in Google Analytics schneller kompiliert werden?

  • „Kürzere Antwortzeit“ im Drop-down-Menü für die Stichprobenerhebung auswählen
  • „Höhere Genauigkeit“ im Drop-down-Menü für die Stichprobenerhebung auswählen
  • Einen erweiterten Filter auf den Bericht anwenden
  • Alle Filter der Datenansicht entfernen

 

Was ist ein ‚Messwert‘ in Google Analytics?

  • Die Daten in einem Zeitraum
  • Ein Datensegment, das in einem Bericht zu Vergleichszwecken separat angezeigt wird
  • Eine Dimension, mit der die Websiteleistung analysiert werden kann
  • Die Zahlen in einem Datensatz, die oft mit Dimensionen kombiniert sind

 

https://www.certificationanswers.com/de/category/google-analytics-individuelle-qualifikation-pruefung-antworten/

 

Yandex Metrica Certification Answers

Por

Yandex Metrica Certification Answers

Yandex Metrica Certification Answers

 

The Yandex metrica certification check your knowledge of web analytics. It’s for specialists skilled in analyzing the marketing performance of a website.

 

 

The exam has much more possible questions than you get during the certification. However, The our PDF study guide contains all possible questions with correct answers.

The Yandex.Metrica certification is available on Yandex Certification Center.

Take the exam it’s FREE .

 

Are statistics saved after a counter is transferred to another username?

  • No, they are not saved.
  • Yes, they are saved in full.
  • They are saved if goals were configured for the counter.

 

Which username of which access level can grant guest access to a counter?

  • Only a counter owner
  • Usernames with one of the following access levels: representative, owner or username with «access to edit» guest access.
  • Only a username with «access to edit» guest access.
  • Only a representative.

 

Is it possible to grant access to all counters that are set for one username?

  • Yes, through the representatives system.
  • No, you can only grant separate access to each counter.
  • No, to do this you need to contact the support service.

 

Please choose the correct next step. After making changes to the counter code via Yandex.Metrica’s settings:

  • you must reinstall the counter code on the main page of your site.
  • you must reinstall the counter code on all pages of your website.
  • your counter code will automatically be updated on the site.

 

In what ways can I receive notifications about the availability of my website?

  • Email and SMS notifications. This option is only available for Yandex.Direct advertisers.
  • Email and SMS notifications.
  • Email only.

 

Can I configure support for a desired file extension for the «File downloads» report?

  • Yes, you can use the yaCounterXXXXXX.addFileExtension() method in the counter code.
  • Yes, it’s enough to enter the required file formats on the Yandex.Metrica counter editing page.
  • No, you cannot if these formats are not in the list of supported file formats.

 

On a site there are pages with the addresses http://site.com/?order=by_size, http://site.com/?sort=by_price. How can you combine these pages into one single URL (http://site.com) by using actions?

  • Add 4 actions: «Remove parameter – Page URL – «order», «sort», «by_size» and «by_price».
  • Add 2 actions: «Remove parameter – Page URL – «by_size» and «by_price».
  • Add action: «Remove anchor».
  • Add 2 actions: «Remove parameter – Page URL – «order» and «sort».

 

Which blocks of counter code are enough to install on a site so that Yandex.Metrica can correctly collect and display information on site traffic in the informer?

  • Only the — Yandex.Metrica counter — block.
  • Any of the two blocks of code.
  • Only the — Yandex.Metrica informer — block.
  • Both blocks of code.

 

This screenshot shows a goal with several conditions. In what case will there be a conversion?

  • User clicks through to any of the specified pages.
  • User clicks through to all of the specified pages in any order.
  • User clicks through to all of the specified pages in a strict order.

 

What does the .reachGoal() method do?

  • Sets a goal conversion as a type of JavaScript-event.
  • Activates the «Link map» report.
  • Sends information about page views.
  • Specifies the goal name.

 

What’s the maximum number of steps you can set for a multi-step goal?

  • 7
  • Unlimited.
  • 5

 

In Yandex.Metrica, what can you set for goals of the type «Page view»?

  • Clicks on links.
  • Page views.
  • File downloads.
  • User’s session duration.

 

What type of goal must you use to track clicks on site buttons?

  • JavaScript event.
  • Multi-step goal.
  • Number of page views.

 

What do you need to specify in the «Goal ID» field when creating a JavaScript event type goal?

  • ID which will be placed in the reachGoal method on the site.
  • Button ID on which a goal conversion is configured.
  • URL of the page where there will be a goal conversion.

 

Owners of which sites can set up an «E-commerce» report?

  • This report is only available for owners of online stores.
  • This report is only available for owners of online stores that are registered on Yandex.Market.
  • This report is available for all Yandex.Metrica users.

 

What are «new users» in Yandex.Metrica?

  • Unique users who come to a site for the first time since the start of data collection.
  • Users coming to a site for the first time this year
  • Unique users that come to a site in the reporting period.

 

For which traffic source must you always use tags so that information appears in the «Sources – Summary» report?

  • Social network traffic.
  • Search engine traffic.
  • Mailing traffic.
  • Link traffic.

 

Does Yandex.Metrica collect information about files downloaded by users and their click-throughs to external sites?

  • Only information on click-throughs to external sites.
  • Yes, it does.
  • It does not collect this information.
  • Only information on downloaded files.

 

A user views a site page and then leaves their computer for 40 minutes. The user does not close their browser window in this time. Upon returning, the user continues browsing. The Yandex.Metrica counter records two sessions for this user. What will be the traffic source for the second session?

  • Direct traffic.
  • Internal traffic.
  • Cached page traffic.

 

What information about goals must you send in the goal_id parameter in the «Purchase» action when configuring E-commerce, so that information about the purchase sum is transferred to Yandex.Direct?

  • Goal ID.
  • Value of the «Goal ID» field.
  • Goal name.

 

What is the correct way to add the tag «from=yandex» to the link http://mysite.com?

  • http://mysite.com/&from=yandex
  • http://mysite.com/?from=yandex
  • http://mysite.com/from=yandex

 

What is «Internal traffic»?

  • A setting in counter settings.
  • A traffic source.
  • Click-throughs between pages of a site.

 

A user comes to your site from a browser bookmark that contains the tag utm_source=google. Which traffic source will this click-through be attributed to?

  • Click-throughs by ad.
  • Internal traffic.
  • Direct traffic.

 

What information on orders is collected in the report «E-commerce – Content of orders»?

  • Only information on orders from Yandex.Market. This requires setting up on the site the transfer of information about the content of an order.
  • Information on all orders from any traffic source. Information on the content of an order is collected without any additional settings.
  • Information on all orders from any traffic source. This requires setting up on the site the transfer of information about the content of an order.
  • Only information on orders from Yandex.Market. Information on the content of an order is collected without any additional settings.

 

A user comes to a site via Yandex’s search engine, then immediately closes the page. After that the user types the address of the site into their browser and goes directly to that site. What is the traffic source of this session?

  • Direct traffic.
  • Search engine.
  • Session will be recorded in both traffic source reports

 

Please look at the «Link map» report in the screenshot. Which link has had the least clicks for the selected period?

  • «Yandex.Direct».
  • «About the service».
  • «Getting started».

 

Which information does Webvisor record by default?

  • Records only user actions on a site; the page content is not recorded.
  • Records user actions and the HTML code of the pages viewed by the user.
  • Records a video containing all information.

 

Does Webvisor record passwords entered by a site user?

  • Yes, it records all information which a user enters on a site.
  • Webvisor does not record information entered into special password fields.
  • If a page contains special password fields, Webvisor does not record any user actions in them.

 

What is the name of the report where site owners can view a record of user actions?

  • Webvisor.
  • Conversion rate.
  • Informer.

 

A site counter has recorded 1500 sessions per day. How many sessions will be available to view in Webvisor?

  • All of the 1500 sessions that it was able to record.
  • All sessions of a length longer than 1 second.
  • No more than 1000 sessions.

 

In which of the following reports can you see information about keywords that attracted users from Yandex.Direct?

  • Yandex.Direct – sites.
  • Yandex.Direct – summary
  • Keywords.
  • Ad systems.

 

In which standard report can you see information only for valid click-throughs from Yandex.Direct?

  • Webvisor.
  • Yandex.Direct – summary.
  • Ad systems.

 

In which standard Yandex.Metrica report can you see data on cost per click from Yandex.Direct?

  • Yandex.Direct – sites.
  • Yandex.Direct – summary.
  • Yandex.Direct – costs.
  • Ad systems.
  • Yandex.Direct – income.

 

Which reports can any Yandex user see if public access to statistics has been given to a counter?

  • All reports apart from Webvisor, Keywords, Yandex.Direct and Target Call reports.
  • All reports.
  • All reports apart from Webvisor and form analysis reports.
  • All reports apart from Target Call and goal reports.

 

Can I transfer a counter from one Yandex username to another Yandex username?

  • Yes, this option is available to the owner of the counter.
  • No, never.
  • No, to do this you need to contact the support service.

 

Which username can remove Yandex.Metrica counters?

  • Usernames with «access to edit» guest access.
  • Usernames that are representatives and counter owner usernames.
  • Any username if «Public access to statistics» is enabled the access settings.
  • Only the counter owner’s username.
  • Usernames with «view only» guest access.

 

For what period of time will the informer display information about a site?

  • For the current day.
  • For one month from today’s date.
  • The informer displays all information from the moment of installation.

 

When will information begin to be collected after installing a counter on a site?

  • Immediately.
  • After one hour.
  • Information will be collected after the counter has been verified by a Yandex.Metrica robot.

 

Will data be collected if a counter has been installed on a site, but deleted in the Yandex.Metrica interface?

  • Data will not be collected.
  • Data will be collected, but getting access to it is only possible after restoring the counter in the Yandex.Metrica interface.
  • Data will still be collected in the usual manner.

 

What can you do by adding a Yandex.Metrica informer?

  • View user actions on your site.
  • Add a block to your site that displays information about site traffic.
  • Get notifications about any problems concerning site availability.

 

What type of goal from this list can be used to track traffic from external links?

  • Number of page views.
  • Page view.
  • Multi-step goal.

 

In Yandex.Metrica there is a multi-step goal consisting of three steps. The multi-step goal will result in a conversion for which conditions?

  • Full sequence of steps but with visits to other site pages.
  • The first step, and then immediately the third step.
  • Full sequence of steps in reverse order.
  • Second and third step, bypassing the first.

 

What type of goal must you use to find out the number of users for a specific page depth?

  • Multi-step goal.
  • Page view.
  • Number of page views.
  • JavaScript event.

 

In what instance will a multi-step goal not function correctly?

  • User completes all steps of a goal in sequence.
  • User completes all steps of a goal, but not in order.
  • User completes all steps of a goal in sequence, but visited other site pages as well.

 

A user finds a site through Yandex’s search engine using one keyword. In 10 minutes, the user returns to the site through Yandex’s search engine, but finds it with another keyword. Which keyword will Yandex.Metrica take into account for the user’s session?

  • Only the first.
  • Both keywords.
  • Only the last.

 

What information must you transfer in the «Purchase» action when configuring E-commerce, so that information about the purchase sum is transferred to Yandex.Direct?

  • Goal conversion.
  • Ad campaign number.
  • Ad number.

 

What is a «user» in Yandex.Metrica?

  • People who, in the reporting period, visit a site for the first time since the start of data collection.
  • A user is one that completes at least one session on a site in the reporting period.
  • A Yandex user that goes to a site in the reporting period.

 

Is it possible to know in Yandex.Metrica which phone model is used to go to sites?

  • No, you can only find out the usage percentages for mobile and standard devices.
  • Yes, you can see telephone models in the «Technology – Devices» report.
  • No, in reports you can only see information on device manufacturers.

 

A goal has been set for going to the «Contacts» on a site. At 12:00 a user comes to the site, goes to the contacts pages, adds it to their bookmarks, and then closes the site. At 12:05, the user opens the site via their bookmarks. How will Yandex.Metrica record this goal information?

  • 1 converted session, 2 conversions.
  • 2 converted sessions, with one conversion in each.
  • 1 converted session, 1 conversion.

 

Is it possible to transfer additional information about user sessions to Yandex.Metrica?

  • Yes, it’s possible, but only for online stores with the help of e-commerce settings.
  • Yes, it’s possible with the «Session parameters» option.
  • Yes, though you can only transfer information about whether a user was signed in on a site.
  • Yes, it’s possible. The IDs of additional parameters must be determined earlier in the counter settings.
  • No, never.

 

Which report can give you full information about a user’s IP address?

  • In the «Webvisor» report.
  • Information about the full IP addresses of users is available in most reports.
  • It is not possible to obtain a user’s full IP address.
  • In the «Traffic» report.

 

Different Yandex.Metrica counters are installed on the website site.com and third-level domain shop.site.com. A user ends up on site.com from a search engine, then clicks a link to shop.site.com. Which traffic source for the session will be in the shop.site.com counter?

  • Internal traffic.
  • Search engine traffic.
  • Referral from site.com.

 

In which standard report can you see information about robots that have come to your site?

  • Monitoring – Monitoring results.
  • Monitoring – Robots.
  • Monitoring – Load on site.

 

How do you display all clicks on the Click map for the «http://www.site.com/cat/» group of pages?

  • http://www.site.com/cat/*
  • http://www.site.com/cat/
  • http://www.site.com/~cat
  • http://www.site.com/cat/~

 

What needs to be done so that Webvisor does not record keystrokes in specific data entry fields?

  • On such pages you must install the counter code without the «Webvisor» function enabled.
  • You should mark the input field in the HTML code of the pages with the special CSS-class -metrika-nokeys.
  • You should configure the counter settings so that Webvisor does not record any information.

 

In the standard report «Yandex.Direct – summary», you will see the term «External campaigns». What needs to be done to view detailed statistics for these campaigns?

  • Enable the «External internet statistics» feature in the Yandex.Direct campaign settings.
  • Enter the Yandex.Metrica counter number in the Yandex.Direct campaign settings.
  • Enable the «Tagging links for Metrica» feature in the Yandex.Direct campaign settings.

 

Which username cannot edit counter settings?

  • Usernames with «access to edit» guest access.
  • Usernames with «view only» guest access.
  • Counter owner’s username.
  • Representative username.

 

How can you make a counter that will not send a hit upon initialization?

  • With the «accurateTrackBounce» property.
  • With the «defer» property.
  • With the «trackHash» property.

 

What do you need to do after registering a new Yandex.Metrica counter so that site data will be collected?

  • You must install its code on the main page of a site.
  • You must install its code on all pages of a site.
  • Data on site traffic will be collected immediately – no other actions are required.

 

Can I exclude from Yandex.Metrica reports traffic from a specific range of IP addresses?

  • No, but you can add up to 25 IP addresses to the blocked list.
  • Yes, in the «Filters» section in the counter settings.
  • No, you can only exclude your own traffic.

 

What condition can you not apply to a «Page view» goal in Yandex.Metrica?

  • Contains.
  • Regular expression.
  • Does not contain.
  • Begins with…
  • Matches

 

What are the traffic sources for sessions from bookmarks, and sessions for users who manually type in the address into their browser?

  • The bookmark session is considered «Internal traffic», while the other session is «Direct traffic».
  • Both sessions are considered «Direct traffic».
  • The bookmark session is considered «Cached page traffic», while the other session is «Direct traffic».

 

Which attribution model is used in Yandex.Metrica by default?

  • First visit.
  • Last significant click-through.
  • Last visit.

 

User #1 comes to your site once a day for 7 days. User #2 comes to your site twice a day for seven days. How many users will appear in the weekly report?

  • 14
  • 21
  • 2

 

Which pages does a Yandex.Metrica site monitoring robot check for availability?

  • All pages of a site.
  • Several select pages of a site.
  • Only the main page of a site

 

What does «cached page traffic» mean?

  • Traffic made to a website link that is stored locally on a computer.
  • User goes to a site by entering its address into the browser’s address bar.
  • User goes to a site from a browser bookmark.

 

In one day your website recorded 100 sessions, 30 users, 15 converted sessions and 20 goal completions What will the conversion rate be in Yandex.Metrica reports?

  • 20%
  • 0.5
  • 15%

 

Where does information for the «Page titles» report come from?

  • From the tag.
  • From the <title> tag.
  • From the tag.

 

Does data usage increase for site users when Webvisor is enabled?

  • Data usage increases slightly depending on the page size and the duration of the session.
  • No, data usage does not increase.
  • Data usage increases significantly because a video is being recorded.

 

In which standard report can you evaluate the keyword effectiveness in a Yandex.Direct ad campaign?

  • Keywords.
  • Yandex.Direct – summary.
  • Sources – Summary.

 

What can you configure with the «Visit timeout» setting?

  • The duration of a session, after which the session will be considered complete.
  • Sources, which clicking through on will begin a new session, while the old session ends.
  • The number of pages viewed, after which the session is considered complete.
  • The idling time of a user on a site, after which Yandex.Metrica considers the session complete.

 

Which method can be used to send information that a user session is not a bounce?

  • notBounce().
  • hit().
  • trackLinks().

 

In which case would goal statistics become unavailable?

  • When a goal is deleted.
  • When changing the name of a goal.
  • When one of the goal conditions or steps in a multi-step goal is deleted.
  • When changing conditions in a goal.

 

What type of goal must you use to track the sequence of events on a site?

  • JavaScript event.
  • Multi-step goal.
  • Number of page views.

 

Traffic from a VKontakte ad network has ended up in the report «Traffic source – sites». What needs to be done so that ad traffic ends up in the «Ad systems» report?

  • You must specify the Yandex.Metrica counter code number in the VKontakte ad campaign settings.
  • You must add UTM or OpenStat tags to the ad URL.
  • You must change the counter code and reinstall the counter on the site.

 

A goal has been configured for viewing the Contacts page. A user comes to the site’s main page, then goes to the Contacts page, after which they refresh the Contacts page, and complete their session. How will this inofrmation appear in Yandex.Metrica reports?

  • 1 converted session, 1 conversion.
  • 1 converted session, 2 conversions.
  • 2 converted sessions, 2 conversions.

 

A user comes to the main page of a website at 17:00. At 17:15 the user goes to a product page and, without closing the browser, leaves their computer. Returning at 17:40, the user opens the main page and at 17:45 closes the site. What will be recorded in Yandex.Metrica?

  • 1 session.
  • 3 sessions.
  • 2 sessions.

 

What is meant by «Number» in the «Content – ‘Share’ button» report?

  • The number of clicks on «Share» buttons.
  • The number of sessions, during which users clicked on «Share» buttons.
  • The number of users which clicked on «Share» buttons.

 

A counter is installed on all pages of a site except the main page. If a user finds your site via a search engine, ends up on the main page, and then goes to the Contacts page of your site, how will Yandex.Metrica record the traffic source for this session?

  • Direct traffic.
  • Search engine traffic.
  • Internal traffic.

 

Which information does Webvisor record when the «record page contents» for all pages setting is configured?

  • Records only user actions on a site; the page content is not recorded
  • Records a video containing all information.
  • Records user actions and the HTML code of the pages viewed by the user.

 

Scroll map functions on the basis of which data?

  • Maps data.
  • Goal conversion data.
  • Webvisor data.

 

Which information about ad click-throughs from Yandex.Direct cannot be seen in Yandex.Metrica?

  • Number of click-throughs on a vCard.
  • Key query.
  • Number and name of ad campaign.
  • Title and ad number.

 

How will information be taken into account after installing one counter on multiple domains?

  • The statistics will take into account only sessions for the domains that you listed in the «Website address» field when registering a counter. Sessions for other domains will not be taken into account if they are not listed as additional domain addresses.
  • The statistics will take into account sessions for all domains.
  • The statistics will take into account only sessions for the domains that you listed in the «Website address» field when registering a counter.

 

Is it possible to change a Yandex.Metrica counter number?

  • Yes, you can change it at any moment.
  • Yes, by sending a request to the support service.
  • Never.

 

Which option do you need to select in the counter code settings to correctly record click-throughs on pages like site.com/photo#1, site.com/photo#2?

  • For XML sites.
  • Hash tracking in the browser address bar.
  • Asynchronous code.

 

Which information about site users cannot be viewed in Yandex.Metrica?

  • URLs of pages viewed
  • Geographic location.
  • Adblock presence.
  • User’s full IP address.

 

How long does a counter keep information for?

  • For last year.
  • For the whole time the site has been functioning, provided that it was advertised on Yandex.
  • Webvisor data is kept for 15 days; other information is stored indefinitely.
  • There are no restrictions on how long information is kept.

 

What is meant by «Share of click-throughs: 8.1%» in this screenshot?

  • Share of traffic relative to other links on the site.
  • Share of traffic on this link relative to the same links on other pages.
  • Share of traffic relative to other links on the page.

 

Form analysis functions on the basis of which data?

  • Webvisor data.
  • Maps data.
  • Goal conversion data

 

Which option is not available in the informer settings?

  • Informer type.
  • Background color.
  • Domains on which the informer should be displayed.
  • Text color.

 

Can I make a site’s traffic statistics public?

  • Yes, you must go into the counter code’s access settings and enable «Public access to statistics».
  • No, it is not possible to provide public access to a counter’s statistics.
  • Yes, you must go into the informer settings and enable «Public access to statistics».

 

On the site http://bestcartoons.com the basket is located on the page http://bestcartoons.com/cart. How would you correctly configure a Page view goal for the basket page?

  • matches «cart»
  • contains «cart»
  • contains «/cart»

 

Is it possible to know which version of a browser site users are using?

  • Yes, in the «Technology – Browsers» report.
  • In the «Technology – Browsers» report there is information on browser versions, except for browsers for mobile devices.
  • No, in the «Technology – Browsers» report there is only information about browsers and not their version.

 

Is it possible to combine data collected from two different Yandex.Metrica counters into one report?

  • Yes, it’s possible. Contact the support service.
  • Yes, by using counter tags.
  • No, never.
  • Yes, Yandex.Metrica automatically combines data for several counters if they have the same domain in their settings.

 

Inside which tag is it recommended to install a Yandex.Metrica counter?

  • Tags do not matter. You must install the counter as close as possible to the top of the page.
  • <BODY></BODY>.
  • <HEAD></HEAD>.

 

What type of filtering should be used to get rid of all robot traffic?

  • Use strict filter and behavior.
  • Include all robot sessions.
  • Use strict filter only.

 

One Yandex.Metrica counter is installed on the website site.com, on third-level domain shop.site.com and on forum.site.com. A user ends up on site.com from a search engine, and in a minute clicks through to shop.site.com and a minute later clicks through to forum.site.com. What data will Yandex.Metrica show?

  • 3 sessions, all with the same traffic source – search engine traffic.
  • 3 sessions, each with their own traffic source.
  • 1 session, traffic source – search engine traffic.
  • 1 session, traffic source – internal traffic.

 

How accurately will information on users be collected if only the informer code is installed on the page of a site?

  • Yandex.Metrica will collect only general information, but not information on conversions.
  • Information will collected correctly.
  • The counter will not collect information.

 

Can I see information on traffic from social networks in a standard report?

  • No, never
  • Yes, in the «Sources – Social networks» report. Information will be collected only in the presence of appropriate tags.
  • Yes, in the «Sources – Social networks» report.

 

Can you install several counter codes on one page of a site?

  • Yes, but all counters must be under one username.
  • Yes, you can.
  • No, data will be collected incorrectly.

 

Which option has an incorrect IP interval specified in the counter filters?

  • 192.168.*
  • 192.168.0.0-192.168.255.255
  • 192.168.0.0/24
  • 192.168.0.0;192.168.255.255

 

In a counter code the following information is entered: try { var yaCounter1111111 = new Ya.Metrika({id:1111111, accurateTrackBounce:5000)}. How will this counter count bounces?

  • A session will be considered a bounce when a users goes to one site page and views it for less than five seconds.
  • A session will be considered a bounce when a users goes to one site page and views it for less than fifteen seconds.
  • A session will be considered a bounce when a users goes to one site page and views it for less than 5000 seconds.

 

Which traffic source had the lowest bounce rate for the whole month? https://metrika.yandex.ru/stat/traffic?period=2016-07-01%3A2016-07-31&id=29761725

  • Search engine traffic
  • Internal traffic.
  • Link traffic
  • Direct traffic.

 

After what amount of idle time can a visit be considered complete?

  • It is always exactly 30 minutes.
  • It is exactly 30 minutes if a user did not come to the site via an ad system. Idle time for users that come to a site by an ad system is 60 minutes.
  • By default it is exactly 30 minutes. This can be changed in the counter setings under «Visit timeout in minutes».

 

Clicking through from which traffic souce always starts a new session in Yandex.Metrica?

  • Only click-throughs from Yandex.Direct.
  • All ad systems.
  • Search engines.
  • Clicking through from sites.

 


 

 

Yandex Direct Certification Answers

Por

 

Yandex Direct Certification Exam Answers

Yandex Direct Certification Answers , take the test to get Yandex.Direct certified. Upon successful completion of the test, you will receive a personalized certificate. It covers basic and intermediate concepts and best practices for managing and optimizing Yandex PPC campaigns .

Yandex Direct Certification Exam Answers 2019 100% correct

Please note that the test for Yandex.Direct is intended for users already familiar with the service. The test checks both theoretical knowledge and practical experience of the service.

Whether you are new to Yandex.Direct or would like to refresh your knowledge, we encourage you to check out the training courses with test questions at the end of each lesson.

 

 

Yandex.direct is one of the certification programs available on Yandex Certification Center.

Take the exam is FREE .

The Yandex.Direct certification has much more possible questions than you get during the certification. Our PDF file contains all possible questions with answers .

 

What can advertisers use the Yandex Advertising Network for?

To target customers with specific offers based on the advertiser’s product feed.

To display ads related to users’ interests, online behavior and the content of the current site.

Set up a Yandex.Direct campaign targeting the entire city.

To use search banners to raise brand awareness.

 

What does the ‘Coverage’ field in the Yandex.Audience platform refer to?

The number of impressions for the segment.

The exact number of users found.

Cookies on different devices over the past 30 days.

 

Select the correct statement about Image ads.

The minimum bid for Image ads is 0.01 USD/EUR/CHF.

Image ads appear on sites in the Yandex Advertising Network.

Image ads can appear on all Premium placement positions on Yandex Search and in the Yandex Advertising Network.

Image ads can only appear in the Yandex Advertising Network and Dynamic ads.

 

John wants to use a geo-based segment that Jane created in her Yandex.Audience account. Can John use Jane’s segment?

Yes, if Jane grants John access to her account in Yandex.Audience.

Yes, he can. Geo-based segments are available to all advertisers.

Yes, if Jane grants John access to the specific segment in Yandex.Audience.

No, one segment cannot be used in multiple accounts.

 

Does the CTR of ads in ad networks affect CPC on Yandex Search?

Yes, the CTR of ads in ad networks does affect CPC on Yandex Search.

It’s impossible to determine without testing.

No, the CTR of ads in ad networks does not affect CPC on Yandex Search.

 

An advertiser wants to create a segment based on his own CRM data, but decided to hash his data out of concern for its security. How can he do this?

Load previously hashed data into Yandex.Audience and tick the box next to “Hashed data” in the interface.

Data is automatically hashed when loaded into Yandex.Audience.

Tick the box next to “Hashed data” in the Yandex.Audience interface, and the data will be hashed.

 

An online store wants to offer a discount to previous customers. How can they target this audience?

Add positive bid adjustments for your customer database (a Yandex.Audience segment based on your own data) in your search campaign.

Load their own customer data (email addresses and phone numbers) into Yandex.Audience and create a segment based on this data.

Set retargeting for users who added items to their cart.

 

Choose the correct ending for the statement: Yandex only considers an impression valid if…

the banner ad appears in the active browser window for at least 1 second.

at least 50% of the banner ad appears in the active browser window for at least 2 seconds.

at least 10% of the banner ad appears in the active browser window.

 

What is an extended ad title? Select the fullest answer.

The first sentence from the ad text which is automatically added to the title of the ad. The ad title size cannot exceed 65 characters.

The first sentence from the ad text or the URL of the advertised site which is automatically added to the title of the ad, the ad title cannot exceed 56 characters in length. It cannot be disabled, contact the Yandex.Direct support team.

The first sentence from the ad text or the URL of the advertised site, which is automatically added to the ad title. The ad title cannot exceed 56 characters in length.

 

At what level in Yandex.Direct can you set geotargeting?

At the campaign and ad group level.

Only at the campaign level.

Only at the ad group level.

 

An advertiser wants to increase the CTR of her ad without raising her bids.
What would you recommend that she do?

Write in all capital letters to highlight information about discounts and promotions.

Change her bidding strategy.

Add all ad extensions: Sitelinks with descriptions, callouts, vCard, display links, second ad titles.

 

Which ad extensions can appear on Yandex Search? Select the fullest answer.

Sitelinks, callouts, display link, vCard, second ad title, Yandex.Market rating, app.

Sitelinks with descriptions, сallouts, display links, vCards, prices, apps.

Sitelinks with descriptions, callouts, display links, vCards, second ad titles, Yandex.Market rating

 

Which types of data can advertisers use to create a Yandex.Audience segment? Select the fullest answer.

Mobile device IDs and phone numbers.

Phone numbers, email and IP addresses.

Phone numbers, email addresses and mobile device IDs.

Email and IP addresses.

 

Where can you add text using templates?

In the first and second ad titles, ad text, URL, display link.

In the first and second ad titles, ad text, URL, display link, sitelinks and callouts.

In the first and second ad titles, ad text, URL, display link, sitelinks.

 

What can ad templates help advertisers do?

Increase ads’ CTR — the more keywords that can be inserted into the ad, the more noticeable it will be on Search.

Pass moderation faster than with regular ad copy.

Get their ads to appear in all possible SERP layouts.

 

At what level in Yandex.Direct can you set time targeting?

Only at the campaign level.

At the level of the campaign and individual ad.

For each keyword in the campaign.

Only for an individual ad.

 

Keyword: Buy a fast car. Which search queries will trigger the ad? Select two correct answers.

Buy a sports car

Buy a fast car in Moscow

Buy fast cars

Buy a car quickly

 

Keyword: “Moscow Oslo tickets» (including quotation marks). Which search query will trigger this ad?

buy tickets Moscow Oslo

tickets Moscow Oslo find

tickets Oslo Moscow

Moscow Oslo

 

An online sports nutrition shop wants to find new loyal clients with the same purchasing power as their current clients. How can they do this?

Set up hyperlocal targeting for gyms in Moscow.

Create a Look-alike segment of similar current clients.

Buy a DMP segment of users interested in sport and fitness.

Launch retargeting for users who visited the website over the past 30 days.

 

While viewing an ad, a user clicked on a sitelink and visited the advertiser’s site, returned to the tab with the search results and clicked once more, this time on the main link. How many clicks will the advertiser pay for?

The advertiser will be charged for two clicks: on the sitelink and the ad title.

The advertiser will only be charged for one click.

The advertiser will be charged full price for the ad title, and 50% of the main bid for the click on the sitelink.

 

An ad has three sitelinks. A user clicks on the main link and a couple sitelinks. How many clicks will the advertiser pay for, and how will their prices vary?

The user will pay for one click only regardless of how many sitelinks the user clicked on.

The advertiser will pay for each click separately. Click price for sitelinks is 0.30 EUR lower than for regular links.

The advertiser will pay for each click separately. Click price for sitelinks is 0.30 EUR higher than for regular links.

The advertiser will pay for each click separately. The click price is the same for all links.

 

An ad group has only mobile ads in it. Which ads will appear on desktop devices?

Mobile ads will appear on desktop devices.

The advertiser’s ad will not participate in the auction, since they don’t have ads for desktop devices.

Yandex.Direct will automatically generate desktop ads based on the mobile ad’s title and text.

 

When does an ad appear with callouts?

When the ad appears on desktops and tablets in first Premium placement.

All ads appear with callouts regardless of position.

In any ad block on the first page of search results.

 

An advertiser created a mobile ad and a desktop ad in one ad group. The CTR of the desktop ad is higher than the mobile ad. Which ad will be chosen for impressions on smartphones?

The user will see the mobile ad, since Yandex.Direct gives priority to mobile ads for impressions on smartphones.

The user will see the ad that is more relevant to their search query.

The user will see the desktop ad since its high CTR gives it priority over the mobile ad.

 

Keyword: concert tickets. Which search query will NOT trigger this ad?

Select two correct answers.

Concert tickets price

Buy tickets for concert

Concerts in Moscow

Buy tickets Moscow

 

Keyword: discount coupon. Negative keyword (including quotation marks): «coupons for discount.» Which search query will NOT trigger this ad?

Discount coupon

Coupons for discount

Discount restaurant coupon

Coupons for discount Moscow

 

A user is looking for bus tickets from Moscow to Riga. Which keyword correctly takes the direction of the trip into account?

bus +from Moscow +to Riga

bus [Moscow Riga]

bus !from Moscow !to Riga

«bus Moscow Riga»

 

Keyword: buy an apartment +in Moscow. The plus operator is applied. Which search queries will trigger this ad? Select three correct answers.

Moscow buy apartment +in credit

Buy two-room apartment in Moscow

Buy apartment in Moscow

Moscow buy apartment

 

Keyword: Sell a house. Which of these search queries will trigger this ad? Select two correct answers.

House for sale

Sell a house in Moscow

Sell a house without an agent

Buy a house

 

Keyword: !sell a smartphone. The exclamation mark operator is applied. Which search queries will trigger this ad? Select two correct answers.

Want to sell smartphone in Moscow

Sale smartphone

Where to sell a smartphone in Moscow

Selling smartphone Moscow

 

How can you exclude impressions for specific keywords in a campaign with Dynamic ads?

Add a negative keyword list at the campaign or ad group level.

Delete irrelevant keywords from the product description.

You cannot exclude impressions for specific keywords.

 

What can be used as a data source for Dynamic ads? Choose the most complete answer.

Only the product feed.

The entire site, specific pages from the site, the product feed.

Only the entire site.

The entire site, specific pages from the site.

 

Which actions can you carry out in Direct Commander?

Create and make changes to Smart banner campaigns.

Edit campaigns and send them for moderation.

Delete an ad or campaign if they had impressions.

 

How can you prevent Session Replay from recording user actions in specific fields where users enter data?

Install the code tag without the «Session Replay» function.

You should mark the input fields in the page’s HTML code with a CSS class.

You should mark the pages that should not be recorded in the settings of the page’s tag.

 

How can you upload multiple ad groups into Yandex.Direct? Select the most complete answer.

Using the Yandex.Direct interface.

Using an Excel template.

Using the Yandex.Direct interface and CSV format.

Using an Excel template in the interface or an Excel / CSV template in Direct Commander.

 

Which file formats can be imported into Direct Commander?

Only CSV.

Both CSV and XLSX/XLS.

Only XLSX / XLS.

 

Which File Formats Can Be Exported From Direct Commander?

Only CSV.

Both CSV and XLSX/XLS.

Only XLSX / XLS.

 

Choose the best ending for this sentence: If you delete a goal in Yandex.Metrica, the statistics gathered for that goal…

are saved no matter what.

are deleted automatically.

are saved, but only for 28 days.

can be saved or deleted — it’s your choice.

 

How does a goal differ from a segment?

The only difference between segments and goals is that they are created in different sections of Yandex.Metrica.

Data for goals becomes available only after the goal has collected it. For segments, historical data is available starting from the day Yandex.Metrica was installed on a site.

Segments can be used in Yandex. Direct, the goals can only be used to analyze user behavior on the website.

 

Does Session Replay record passwords entered by site visitors?

No, Session Replay does not record data entered in password fields.

Yes, it records all data the user enters on the site.

If a page has password fields, Session Replay does not record any user actions on that page.

 

Session Replay is disabled in the tag settings. The owner of the tag enables Session Replay to begin collecting data for the whole site. Does he need to reinstall the tag on his site?

No, the tag code on the site will automatically be updated.

He only needs to reinstall the tag code on the main page. Data will be collected on all pages.

Yes, he should reinstall the tag code on all pages of his site.

 

Look at the Click map in the screenshot. Which link got the most clicks in the period selected?

About the service.

Yandex.Metrica.

Quick start.

 

Look at the Click map in the screenshot. Which link got the fewest clicks in the period selected?

About the service.

Yandex.Metrica.

Quick start.

 

Which option in Yandex.Direct becomes available once Yandex.Metrica is connected?

Retargeting in Yandex network, CPA, ROI, Weekly budget strategy: maximum conversions.

Automatic pausing of the campaign when the site is down.

Bid adjustments by gender and age.

All of the above.

 

Choose the best ending for this sentence: When changing or deleting a goal, the Yandex.Metrica tag …

must be updated on all the site’s pages, as the code has changed.

does not need to be updated, since the tag’s code did not change.

must be updated on the page where goal is/was fulfilled.

 

How are retargeting lists used in Yandex.Direct?

For targeting and bid adjustments.

For bid adjustments only.

For targeting only.

 

What happens if there is overlap between different retargeting criteria?

The criteria with the highest traffic volume will be applied.

Only the criteria with the highest CPC will be applied.

The criteria with the highest combined CPC and CTR will be applied.

 

Why are there more visits from Yandex.Direct in the «Ad systems» report than in reports in Yandex.Direct?

Yandex.Direct group reports only show visits that led to conversions, so there are far fewer of them than in the «Ad systems» report.

This is impossible. There must be a bug. You should contact the support service.

The «Ad systems» report shows the number of visits for all clicks, both valid and invalid.

 

What happens if an ad has both keyword and retargeting criteria? Select the most complete answer.

The highest combined CTR and CPC will trigger impressions.

The criteria with the highest CPC and traffic volume will trigger impressions.

The criteria with the highest CTR will trigger impressions.

 

Which retargeting types are available for Text & Image ads? Select the most complete answer.

Based on Yandex.Audience goals.

Based on Yandex.Metrica goals.

Based on Yandex.Metrica goal and segments .

Based on Yandex.Audience segments and on Yandex.Metrica goals and segments.

 

For which of these business types are there limitations for retargeting or targeting by interests?

Products or services that require licensing, e.g. financial services.

Job search and employment services.

Medicine and health services.

 

What advice would you give to the owner of a website whose visitors add items to their cart but do not place orders?

Start a search campaign with ad texts mentioning the store’s competitive advantages and discounts for users who visit the website.

Create a retargeting list for the condition «Added products to the cart, but did not make the payment» and start a campaign for this audience in the Yandex Advertising Network.

Start a media campaign for users who have visited the website.

 

What do you need to do to use retargeting in Yandex.Direct? Select the most complete answer.

Install Yandex.Metrica to your site (with active goals or segments), and enable impressions in ad networks.

Install Yandex.Metrica to your site (with active goals or segments).

Install Yandex.Metrica, activate ad networks.

 

Your client, SuperAirPlus, is a flight metasearch site. Can your client use competitors’ brand names in their keywords and ad texts?

Yes, сompetitors’ brands can be used in keywords as well as in ad texts if the landing page shows the brands in the same context as the ad.

Yes, Yandex advertising requirements allow this.

Competitors’ brands can be used in keywords, but not in ad texts.

 

How are ads sorted on the «All ads» page?

From highest to lowest combined CTR, bid and the quality coefficient.

Randomly.

From highest to lowest CPC.

From highest to lowest quality coefficient.

 

A large online store selling household appliances plans to sell heaters. The managers want to maintain a certain ROI. Which of the automatic strategies is best in this case?

Average CPA.

Average ROI.

Weekly budget.

Average CPC.

 

You have a client base that is interested in your services and makes up most of your revenue. You have increased your production and want to use Yandex.Direct to attract new customers. What is the best way to target this audience?

Create a DMP segment based on third-party providers’ data.

Create a Yandex.Audience segment based on your clients data.

Create a segment based on a Yandex.Metrica goal (visited the Contacts page).

Create a look-alike segment in Yandex.Audience based on your clients’ data.

 

Let’s say you own a restaurant in a business centre. Your goal is to attract as many employees of this business centre as possible. What can you do to reach this goal?

Launch a campaign with a Look-alike segment for current visitors.

Launch a search campaign with the keywords: “where to eat in the business center” and “business lunch.”

Use polygons in Yandex.Audience with the option “Audience: works.”

 

Which ad extensions are only available in the Yandex Advertising Network (not on Yandex Search)?

Images and Video extensions.

Callouts.

Display link.

Sitelinks with descriptions.

 

Does the CTR for Relevant Keywords affect the CTR of the original keywords?

No, the CTR of impressions for Relevant Keywords does not affect the CTR of the original keywords.

Yes, the CTR for impressions for Relevant Keywords does affect the CTR of the original keywords.

It’s impossible to determine without testing.

 

If an ad’s CPC is lower than the minimum search CPC, can the ad appear anywhere else? Choose the most complete answer.

Yes, on the “All ads” page.

Yes, the ad can appear on the “All ads” page and on sites in the Yandex Advertising Network.

No, the ad will not appear anywhere.

 

Can you know in advance if a Yandex.Audience segment will work well as a Look-alike segment?

No, there’s no concrete way to know in advance. Look-alike segments should be made using groups of people linked in some way and similar in behavior.

No, you can’t know this ahead of time. You can only experiment and track the impressions statistics for the Look-alike segment.

Yes, you can. Segments should consist of users whose similarity is visibile in their statistics. The more similar they are, the better the segment will work as a Look-alike segment.

 

Which of these recommendations will raise the ad’s CTR?

Select all the answers that apply.

Add the legal name of your organisation.

Enable geotargeting and add the name of the city or region where you offer your products or services.

Add information about discounts, promotions, gifts, etc. to your ad text.

Include keywords in the ad text.

 

A user is looking for bus tickets from Moscow to Riga. Which keyword has the correct operators in order to take into account the direction of the bus trip?

Bus !from Moscow !to Riga

Bus [Moscow-Riga]

“Bus Moscow-Riga”

Bus +from Moscow +to Riga

 

What steps are necessary to start tracking sales values in Yandex.Metrica?

Enable the option «Dispatch ecommerce data to Metrica» and update the Yandex.Metrica tag on all pages of the site.

The «Dispatch ecommerce data to Metrica» option is enabled by default, so no additional steps are necessary.

Enable the option «Dispatch ecommerce data to Metrica» and update the Yandex.Metrica tag on the page where transactions take place.

 

Choose the best ending for this sentence: A Yandex.Metrica tag must be installed on…

on the site’s home page as well as the page where conversions take place.

all the site’s pages.

the site’s home page.

the page where conversions will take place.

 

Which Yandex.Metrica report can help you assess keywords’ performance in your ad campaigns?

Yandex.Direct, summary.

Sources, summary.

Search queries.

 

Which Yandex.Metrica report can show you data for search queries that brought users from Yandex.Direct?

Yandex.Direct, sites.

Yandex.Direct, summary.

Search queries.

Ad systems.

 

What can be used to create retargeting lists?

Only Yandex.Audience segments.

Goals and segments from Yandex.Metrica, as well as Yandex.Audience segments.

Only Yandex.Metrica goals and segments.

 

Which types of retargeting are available in Yandex.Direct?

Using a Yandex.Audience Pixel for Search campaigns.

Based on Yandex.Audience segments based on your CRM data.

Dynamic retargeting using DSA.

 

Choose the best example of an ideal user for retargeting.

Someone is ready to make another regular purchase online.

Someone viewed a few pages on your site but did not start the purchasing process.

Someone bought a bag on your website and you would like to launch DSA for other products to show him.

 

Ad text in English: «Buy red sofas online.» Geotargeting: Russia. Which changes need to be made in order to pass moderation?

None apart from checking that the ad text fits in within the character limits.

None, but the advertiser must provide documents confirming their right to do business in Russia.

A translation into Russian must be added and the ad text has to fit in within the character limit.

 

Ad text: «Looking for natural oils for your hair? Order Olive Hair Oil directly from Greece for 15 EUR.» Geotargeting: Moscow and Saint Petersburg. Will this ad pass moderation?

Yes, the text meets the requirements for ad materials.

No, quality certification for this product is required.

No, either the equivalent price in Russian rubles also must be shown or the foreign currency must be changed to Russian rubles.

 

An advertiser’s main goal is to maintain or increase profit from his investment in online advertising. Which strategy would you recommend?

«Weekly budget: Maximum conversion rate» — the more conversions (orders), the higher the profitability.

A manual bid management strategy, setting click price at a level high enough for First Premium placement. The more traffic, the higher the profitability.

Average ROI.

If he has statistics to refer to, then the «Weekly click package» is best. He should just increase the number of clicks in the strategy settings a bit.

 

Where do ads in Yandex.Direct appear by default?

On desktops and tablets. Statistics show that these are the best impressions.

Only on desktops. Mobile impressions should be set up separately.

On all device types where Yandex has an audience.

 

Ad text: «The lowest prices for Moscow-Paris flights. Only buy from us!» Which changes need to be made in order to pass moderation?

Send documents proving this superiority.

Delete the superlative adjective or add information proving that «the lowest prices» are a fact to the landing page.

None. The text meets the requirements for ad materials.

 

Which factors do bid forecasts depend on?

Competitors’ bids for the keyword and the ad’s CTR.

Competitors’ bids for the keyword, the ad’s CTR and quality coefficient.

Competitors’ bids for the keyword, the ad’s CTR and quality coefficient, and the user’s predicted value.

 

In which order do ads appear in the Premium Placement block?

From highest to lowest combined CPC and CTR.

Randomly.

From highest to lowest CTR.

From highest to lowest combined bid, quality coefficient, and CTR.

 

Which strategy allows advertisers to set a daily budget limit?

Manual bid management.

Weekly budget.

Average CPA.

Average ROI

 

Positive bid adjustments are set for users from Moscow (geo), for men aged 25-34 (demographic), and for smartphones (device type). A 26 year old man from Saint Petersburg visits the search results page from his smartphone. Which bid adjustments apply?

Only the device type and demographic adjustments apply. Regional bid adjustments do not work with other types of bid adjustments.

All bid adjustments apply.

Positive bid adjustments for age and gender (demographic) and device type apply.

 

An advertiser’s goal is to receive orders through the site and pay for them no more than a certain amount. Which strategy would be best for this advertiser?

Average CPC.

Average ROI.

Average CPA.

Manual bid management.

 

Which of these advertisers can benefit most from using Smart banners?

A bank with a large assortment of credit products.

A large clothing and shoe store.

A pharmacy with a large assortment of dietary supplements and vitamins.

 

How can you create an ad group with Search banners?

Add a new Search banner ad group to any Text & Image campaign.

Create a separate Search banner campaign.

Contact the Yandex support service.

 

Where can Search banners appear?

Only on Yandex Search.

On Yandex Search and some search partner sites in the Yandex Advertising Network.

In Russia on Yandex Search and several search partners in the Yandex Advertising Network.

 

An advertiser wants to increase the reach of his ad campaign without exceeding his monthly budget. Which strategy will best help him reach this goal?

A CPA strategy with a weekly budget limitation.

A manual bid management strategy.

Weekly budget: maximum clicks.

 

On which sites can Smart banners appear?

On Yandex Search.

On Yandex Search, the Yandex Advertising Network and external ad networks.

In the Yandex Advertising Network and external ad networks.

 

At the campaign level, a negative bid adjustment is set for women 45+ in age, but a positive bid adjustment is set for them at the ad group level. Which bid adjustment will apply?

It is impossible to set up such adjustments.

The positive bid adjustment will apply, since bid adjustments at the ad group level have priority over those at the campaign level.

The negative bid adjustment will apply, since campaign level bid adjustments have priority over those at the ad group level.

 

Over what period will Yandex.Direct try to spend the amount specified in the Weekly Budget strategy?

Over seven working days.

Over one week, from Monday to Sunday.

Over the past seven days.

 

On which sites can Text & Image ads appear?

On search results pages for Yandex Search, on the sites of Yandex search partners, on content sites in the Yandex Advertising Network.

On search results pages for Yandex Search, on the sites of Yandex search partners, on content sites in the Yandex Advertising Network, on sites in the Yandex Video Network.

On search results pages for Yandex Search, on Yandex search partners, on content sites in the Yandex Advertising Network, on the Yandex Home page.

 

Smart banners can be generated:

From sites and product feeds.

Only from product feeds.

Only from sites.

 

What will happen if an advertiser uses the same keyword list in a regular search campaign and a Search banner campaign?

Both ad types can appear simultaneously, since Search banners and regular ads participate in different auctions and do not compete with each other.

The ad with the highest combined CTR, bid and quality coefficient will appear.

The regular ad will appear, because they have priority over all other ad types.

 

Which targeting types are available for Search banner campaigns?

For users who completed certain actions on your site.

By user interests.

By keywords.

 

How do impressions for Search banners take place?

Based on user interests with CPM payment.

For search queries that contain an entire keyword. Impressions can take place simultaneously with Text & Image ads.

For search queries that contain an entire keyword with CPM payment.

 

Can geotargeting settings affect the CPC for an ad?

No, CPC accounts for all the competitors for the specific keyword.

Yes, the number of competitors varies for each region, so CPC will also vary.

No, CPC is only affected by the time of the impression and the number of comptetitors at that moment.

 

An advertiser’s ad group has desktop ads but no mobile ads. What will appear on mobile devices?

Yandex.Direct will automatically generate mobile ads based on the desktop ad’s title and text.

Nothing. The ad group has no mobile ads.

A regular desktop ad will appear.

 

What does behavioral targeting in the Yandex Advertising Network take into account?

User interests.

User interests, age, and gender.

Demographic characteristics.

 

How can Yandex.Audience be used in campaigns for ad networks?

To target users by their IP addresses.

To target users by geolocation.

To create a segment of those users who saw indoor/outdoor ads.

 

Which of the following can be used for retargeting?

Bid adjustments.

Yandex.Audience goals.

Autotargeting.

Yandex.Metrica segments and goals and Yandex.Audience segments.

 

Can you use your company’s logo within a Text & Image ad?

No, it is against the rules to use company logos in Text & Image ads.

Yes, you can and there are no restrictions.

Yes, but only if the logo takes up no more than 20% of the whole image.

 

Keyword: stay +at lake Baikal. The plus sign operator is applied. Which one of these search queries will NOT trigger this ad?

family stay at lake Baikal

cheap Baikal holiday

stay at lake Baikal cheaply

stay at lake Baikal 2017

 

Keyword: buy a stroller. Which search query will NOT trigger this ad?

Buy a stroller via internet

Stroller sales

Where to buy a stroller

Stroller buy on internet

 

Which ad extensions can you add to Dynamic ads? Select the most complete answer.

Sitelinks with description, callouts, vCard.

Sitelinks, callouts, vCard, display link, Image, video extension.

Sitelinks with description, callouts, vCard, display link, 2nd ad title.

 

Can a Dynamic ad campaign and a regular ad campaign work at the same time?

Yes, Dynamic ads complement campaigns with regular ads.

Yes, but the campaigns should be separated for different types of host sites, e.g. one campaign for search, and the other for the Yandex Advertising Network.

No, the campaigns will compete with each other.

 

Which tasks do Dynamic ads simplify for advertisers?

They save time creating a large number of identical ads.

They quickly pass moderation.

They create Text & Image ads for ad networks in bulk.

 

On which sites can Dynamic ads appear?

Only Yandex Search.

Search and content sites.

Yandex Search and search networks.

Yandex Search, search networks, mobile ads.

 

Which Yandex.Metrica report can show data for clicks remaining after antifraud checks in Yandex.Direct?

Yandex.Direct, summary.

Ad systems.

Session Replay.

 

Look at the screenshot below. What does it mean if a lightning bolt appears next to your campaign?

The campaign was sent to the server.

The campaign was sent for moderation.

There are edits ready to be sent to the server.

 

Look at the screenshot below. What does it mean if a star appears next to a campaign?

The campaign’s strategy was changed and the edited campaign was sent to the server.

The advertiser marked the campaign as important to find it more easily later on.

The campaign was successfully loaded from the server, so the advertiser can begin making changes to it.

The campaign was sent for moderation.

 

Look at the screenshot below. What does it mean if an error sign appears next to your campaign?

The campaign was deleted, no information is available.

The campaign did not pass moderation.

The campaign was not loaded from the server.

There are problems that will stop the data from being uploaded.

 

Which ad elements are generated automatically in Dynamic ad campaigns? Choose the most complete answer.

Ad title, landing page URL.

Ad title, landing page URL, display link, sitelinks.

Ad title, landing page URL, display link.

 

In what order do ads appear in blocks on the search results page?

From highest to lowest bids.

From highest to lowest combined bid, CTR, and quality coefficient.

From highest to lowest combined bid, quality coefficient, and domain karma.

 

An advertiser has two search campaigns: regular and Dynamic ads. The regular campaign has the keyword «buy flowers,» and the same keyword was selected for the Dynamic campaign. Their combined CTR, bids and quality coefficients match. Which campaign’s ad will appear in search results?

Regular keywords always have priority over Dynamic keywords, so the regular search ad will appear.

This situation is impossible. Dynamic ad campaigns always generate unique keywords that don’t overlap with regular keywords.

The Dynamic ad will appear because it responds to the user’s query better by showing the keyword in the ad title.

 

How do impressions and clicks for Relevant Keywords affect the CTR of the original keywords and CPC?

They are used in CTR calculations just like impressions and clicks for the original keyword, but do not affect CPC.

They are not used in CTR or CPC calculations for the original keyword.

They are not included in CTR calculations, but affect CPC just like clicks and impressions for the original keywords.

 

Can you add a Dynamic ad to a regular campaign?

Yes, a regular campaign can contain groups with regular ads and groups with Dynamics ads
No, Dynamic ads are a separate campaign type, created separately in the Yandex Direct interface.
Yes, but only if the Separate bid management strategy is selected.

 


 

 

 

Hubspot Content Marketing Exam Answers

Por

Hubspot Content Marketing Exam Answers will teach you how to build scalable, repeatable processes for creating and promoting content that converts into leads and new customers.

Hubspot Content Marketing Exam Answers

If you’re creating content or managing content creators – this course will give you expert tactics for efficiently building your content library, and extracting more value from every content asset you create.

 

Hubspot Content Marketing Exam Answer

 

Which is true about content and its relationship with the Inbound Methodology?

  • Content is needed to attract people to your site.
  • Content is needed to attract visitors and convert them into leads
  • Content is needed to close leads into customers and turn customers into promoters.
  • All of the above

 

What are the four stages of the Inbound Methodology?

  • Identify, Connect, Explore, and Advise
  • Find, Engage, Convert, and Nurture
  • Awareness, Consideration, Decision, and Delight
  • Attract, Convert, Close, and Delight

 

True or false? Content marketing is a relatively new practice that became popular in the 1950’s with the boom of advertising firms.

  • True
  • False

 

All of the following are content marketing practices EXCEPT:

  • Social media posts
  • Blogging
  • Technical SEO
  • Email copy

 

Which best describes the content marketing and inbound marketing relationship?

  • Both are valuable and take a lot of time and work. It’s best to focus your time on one or the other.
  • If you do both then you’ll be competing with yourself.
  • A great content marketer doesn’t need to do inbound marketing.
  • Success relies on both as each serves a different function.

 

What’s the best way to have your business’ story remembered and shared?

  • Explain the value of your products and services and how you’re the best at what you do.
  • Explain your history in detail.
  • Show the ROI you can bring your customers.
  • Create emotional alignment between your business and your prospects and customers.

 

Every story has these three storytelling elements. What are they?

  • Characters, conflict, and resolution
    Conflict, idea, and resolution
    Conflict, spark, and conclusion
    Characters, conflict, and interest

 

True or false? If prospects can get the answers to their questions and see themselves as characters in your story, they’ll be more likely to purchase from you.

  • True
    False

 

Fill in the blank: The conflict in your content’s story should focus on the ____________.

  • prospects’ needs
    prospects’ stage of the buyer’s journey
    prospects’ problems
    All of the above

 

Which of the following is NOT a storytelling best practice?

  • Your story should be clear and concise
    Create emotional appeal through your content
    Use the third-person point of view
    Be consistent and authentic

 

True or false? The conflict in this blog article is preventing team burnout.

  • True
  • False

 

Fill in the blank: This blog post is written from a _____________.

  • First-person point of view
  • Second-person point of view
  • Third-person point of view
  • None of the above

 

True or false? After you digest material it’s best to try and put ideas together immediately.

  • True, because the best ideas come in the first 30 seconds of consuming content.
  • True, because the material is fresh in your mind.
  • False, you want to give your mind a break to process the information.
  • False, you first need to write concepts down to organize everything.

 

Fill in the blank: __________ is when you think of an idea out of nowhere.

  • Aha moment
    Spontaneous ideation
    The eureka moment
    Thought spawning

 

Joan owns a dog walking business and read a blog post that explained search engines are a great place to generate ideas on what people are searching for. Joan starts off her research by typing in ‘dog walking tip’ to see what insight she can find. Fill in the blank: Joan notices that when she types in ‘dog walking tip’ the search engine offers some helpful suggestions on popular searches, like ‘dog walking tips and tricks.’ This is known as _________.

  • related searches
  • autocomplete
  • suggestion finder
  • Google search queries

 

True or false? The goal of a braindump is to have everyone structure ideas they’ve put together.

  • True
  • False

 

All of the following are examples of a SMART goal EXCEPT:

  • Increase year over year traffic by 30%.
    Significantly reduce the amount of time the team spends on creating content.
    Add five new content formats to the website by end of year.
    All of the above are SMART goals.

 

You just landed your dream job as a content creator at a local startup. It’s your first week and your boss asks you to perform a content audit to get acquainted with the company’s collateral as well as organize it. Where might you start looking for content that already exists?

  • Talk with the sales team
  • Check with more tenured employees
  • Look through the company’s CRM and CMS
  • All of the above

 

When it comes to a long-term content strategy, what is an important buyer persona trait?

  • Demographics
  • Challenges
  • Identifiers
  • All of the above

 

Fill in the blank: When identifying buyer’s journey content for a long-term content strategy, it’s important to focus on content for the ___________ stage(s).

  • Awareness
  • Consideration
  • Decision
  • All of the above

 

True or false? A buyer’s journey is ever-evolving. You should make updates as you learn more about your buyer persona.

  • True
  • False

 

All of the following are attributes of a content creation workflow EXCEPT:

  • How much money it will cost to complete initiative
  • Identifies outside influencers who will be contributing
  • Identifies and organizes who is in charge of specific tasks
  • Breaks down all of the work needed to complete a specific initiative

 

How many rounds of edits should content undergo before being finished?

  • 1
  • 2-4
  • Post your content once it’s finished and edit as you receive feedback.
  • As many times as you possibly can

 

Fill in the blank: The above graphic uses a ___________ to help organize hosted files.

  • linear word formula
    acronym-based system
    nomenclature system
    Word association connector

 

True or false? Your content creation framework should stay consistent over time.

  • True, the best way to remain efficient is to stick with a process.
  • True, the investment to update a process can be very expensive and time intensive.
  • False, as business goals and content change, so should your process to support them.
  • False, your process should be updated every time a new team member joins.

 

True or false? If you want to produce great content, then you need to hire an in-house content creator.

  • True
  • False

 

What can you do to make a headline more compelling?

  • Broaden the topic
    Make a promise to the reader
    Over five words
    Use special characters to help it stand out

 

The following question pertains to the blog post shown below: The above blog post is an example of which type of headline format?

  • List format
  • How-to format
  • Secret of format
  • Negative angle format

 

True or false? Effective writers start by filling in the main points of their content and save writing the introduction and conclusion for after they’ve written their piece.

  • True, it can be overwhelming to write an introduction first without knowing where the content is headed.
  • True, the introduction is always the easiest part to write.
  • False, writing an introduction first will help align the rest of the article.
  • False, you should write your conclusion before your introduction.

 

True or false? When possible, you should try and use extensive vocabulary in your writing.

  • True, extensive vocabulary makes you appear more credible and confident.
  • True, people make purchasing decisions based on if you look smarter than your competitors.
  • False, extensive vocabulary makes you appear less credible and confident.
  • False, extensive vocabulary takes up too much space on a page.

 

Fill in the blank: The following sentence is an example of ____________ voice? “The grocery shopping was done by your father.”

  • Active
  • Passive
  • Reactive
  • Subtle

 

How could this sentence be corrected to cut our fluffy words? “I really just want to go to the store to buy groceries in order to be be prepared for the week.”

  • “I really want to go to the store to buy groceries in order to be prepared.”
  • “I just want to go to the store to buy groceries in order to be prepared for the week.”
  • «I want to go buy groceries at the store to be prepared for the week.”
  • “I really want to go to the store to buy groceries in order to be prepared for the week.”

 

True or false? Never use acronyms in your writing.

  • True, this helps avoid confusion.
  • True, deleting acronyms makes your content more welcoming.
  • False, use acronyms sparingly.
  • False, your audience will know what the acronyms mean.

 

Which of the following do you need to include in a republished piece of content to maintain SEO authority and attribute value to the appropriate website or author?

  • Inbound link
  • Canonical tag
  • Anchor text
  • A and B

 

How can a third-party website avoid duplicate content issues with republishing your content?

  • Add a tracking URL
  • Update the content to make it different
  • Have the third-party publish it at the same time as the original piece
  • Add a NoIndex tag

 

How long should you wait before republishing a piece of content to a new website?

  • It depends, wait until you have at least 5 inbound links.
  • You shouldn’t wait. Republish it immediately.
  • Two weeks
  • One week

 

You have a top-performing blog post that you want to republish. Which platforms should you republish it to?

  • Only websites that you have partnerships with as you won’t have to pay for it.
  • As many websites as possible; the more sites the more impressions the content will receive.
  • Only sites that are relevant to your business and industry.
  • You shouldn’t republish content because you’ll have duplicate content issues.

 

You are trying to turn an ebook into a checklist, which method should you keep in mind when repurposing content?

  • DART
  • BASE
  • ACE
  • ARC

 

You can use weekly content activities to grow into which type of long-form content offer?

  • Case study
  • Ebook
  • Webinar
  • All of the above

 

True or false? A benefit of organic content promotion is that it allows you to show your content to a highly specific audience.

  • True
  • False

 

When is the most effective time to boost content on social media?

  • When it’s performing well
  • When it has a call-to-action that links to your website
  • When it showcases one of your products or services
  • If budget is permitting, then you should boost every social media post

 

True or false? You should post the same message across all of your social channels.

  • True, redundant messages ensure that your audience will see it and you get the highest reach.
  • True, posting the same message will help you save time that you can use on more important initiatives.
  • False, you should customize the message based on the platform.
  • False, post the same message to Twitter and Facebook, but update LinkedIn as it’s more of a B2B social platform.

 

Fill in the blank: ______________ is used to achieve the best possible content promotion outcome.

  • Optimization
  • Saturation
  • Experimentation
  • Consistency

 

True or false? You should initially spend less time promoting your content than you did creating it, so you can increase your content output.

  • True
  • False

 

You can measure brand awareness by all of the following, except?

  • How high you rank in search engine results.
  • How many press releases exist on your website.
  • Level of engagement on your social channels.
  • Inbound links coming to your website.

 

True or false? It’s best to determine a few key metrics and stick to them.

  • True
  • False

 

Fill in the blank: All of the following are engagement signals that help you understand your content’s effectiveness, except for _______________.

  • likes and shares on a Facebook post
  • sharing the thank you page to an offer someone just downloaded
  • comments on a recent blog post
  • email send rate

 

Your boss asks you to report on how your content campaign has contributed to his lead generation goals. What metric do you report on to demonstrate its contribution?

  • Social engagements
  • Returning blog subscribers generated from your campaign
  • Total leads generated from your campaign
  • Increase of brand awareness

 

Fill in the blank: You had a successful team meeting where you were able to prove the ROI of your content marketing efforts. However, your boss wants more details on the content path that helped closed leads into customers. You could do this by creating a(n) ______________.

  • attribution report
  • referrals report
  • sales report
  • None of the above

 

One month into a three-month lead generation campaign, it becomes clear your current plan to reach your goal of ten marketing qualified leads (MQLs) goal does not look feasible. What option will you present during next week’s meeting with your CEO?

You present an updated campaign content plan to reach your set SMART goals, based off of the first month’s data.

You present updated SMART goals better aligned with your projected MQLs for the campaign’s remaining two months, based off the first month’s data.

You hold back on reporting the progress on that particular SMART goal for the campaign, in hopes of things picking up.

You propose staying the course on the current SMART goals and planned content marketing activities, noting that one month of data is not enough to justify changing your SMART goal.

 

Once you’re able to quantify your metrics, what is the next step in developing a growth mindset?

  • Create a facebook audience
  • Select a marketing channel to focus on
  • Start looking for weaknesses in your funnel
  • Start looking for strengths in your funnel

 

What does the center ring of the bullseye framework represent?

  • Your possibility channels
  • Your long-shot channels
  • The channels you haven’t tested yet
  • Your top-performing channels

 

Fill in the blank: When conducting a test, it should work to uncover _______________.

  • the cost to attain a customer through this channel
  • the amount of customers available through this channel
  • whether or not you should be acquiring these customers
  • All of the above

 

You’re the Marketing Director for a global financial company. The holidays are approaching and your boss wants to improve the company’s bottom line by 7%. You host a team meeting where the goal is to identify opportunities to test, then assign tasks to team members to start implementing right away. Is this approach correct?

  • Yes, the entire team is present and participating.
  • Yes, but make sure to assign the test to the appropriate team members.
  • No, ideation and implementation should be done in separate meetings.
  • No, you need approval from your boss before running a series of tests.

 

True or false? If your marketing tests have over a 50% failure rate, then you’ve done something wrong.

  • True, the majority of your tests should be successful.
  • True, you should never have over a 50% failure rate with your tests.
  • False, the purpose of a test is to prove or disprove your hypothesis.
  • False, you need to perform enough tests that more than 50% fail.

 

Fill in the blank: The goal of a marketing test is to _____________.

  • continuously optimize your channels
  • find a system that works and stick with it
  • show your competitors that you know what you’re doing
  • All of the above

 

True or false? When instilling a growth mindset within your organization, it’s more important to receive buy-in from the customer support team than the products and services team.

  • True
  • False

 

Fill in the blank: A shortcut to improving your SEO is to ____________.

  • continuously optimize your pages based on updated keyword research
  • get referenced on sites that already rank well
  • add more keywords to a page you want to rank for
  • use more images than text

 

Fill in the blank: __________ is when you help guide your prospects through purchasing your products or services.

  • Value-add guidance
  • Concierge on-boarding
  • Success channeling
  • Premier showcasing

 

Your boss has tasked you with writing a company story that will help make them stand out from their competitors. Keeping this in mind, what’s the most effective question you should start with?

  • What are you offering?
  • How will this help your audience?
  • Why are you doing what you are doing?
  • None of the above

 

True or false? You need conflict to tell an impactful story.

  • True, people care more about the conflict than the resolution.
  • False, conflict only reduces the connection of what you’re trying to communicate.
  • False, your story is strong enough to explain the value of your products and services.
  • True, conflict helps build developmental and emotional connections.

 

Fill in the blank: When you tell a story and the character is your audience, you should tell the story with a ___________.

  • first-person point of view
  • second-person point of view
  • third-person point of view
  • All of the above

 

True or false? When identifying raw material for generating ideas, it’s best to stick with a specific area of focus. This way you can become an expert in generating ideas in this field.

  • True
  • False

 

You’re a content creator for an automobile dealership. You’re looking for some inspiration to help generate new content ideas for an upcoming holiday promotion. What source might you find valuable and be inspired by?

  • Motor Trend Magazine
  • Wall Street Journal
  • TIME Magazine
  • All of the above

 

How can you uncover your buyer personas’ reading habits?

  • Include a question on a form
  • Interview some of your best customers
  • Make a list of publications you read
  • A and B
  • All of the above

 

Which of the following is NOT a category you should organize your content audit by?

  • Content title
  • Buyer’s journey stage
  • Content length
  • Marketing funnel stage

 

Fill in the blank: A content compass helps organize monthly initiatives by ____________.

  • SMART goals
  • sales campaigns
  • theme(s)
  • All of the above

 

Fill in the blank: To keep your content calendar agile, it shouldn’t extend more than ___________.

  • two weeks
  • one month
  • three months
  • six months

 

You asked your colleague to provide feedback on a blog post you recently wrote. When they sent you their feedback, they made edits directly in the doc. Is this a best practice for a content editing process?

  • Yes, because having an editor complete your content ensures it will read well to others.
  • Yes, a content editor’s role is to make updates the way they see fit.
  • No, the editor should have tracked changes which would have shown you where they would apply recommended edits.
  • No, they should have set up a meeting to discuss each edit so you could apply them together.

 

Fill in the blank: When creating a headline for your content, you should come up with ___________ different headlines.

  • 1
  • 2-3
  • 5-10
  • At least 10

 

When republishing your content, how can you make sure the republished post stands out in contrast to your original post in search engine result listings?

  • Update the headline
  • Use a new author
  • Add sub-headings to each section
  • All of the above

 

True or false? You should only include a call-to-action on a blog post once the offer is launched.

  • True, if you don’t have a relevant call-to-action, then leave blank.
  • True, once you publish a blog post, it’s not a best practice to update calls-to-action over time.
  • False, always provide a next step, even if it’s to sign up for email updates.
  • False, adding a relevant call-to-action to a blog post will improve your SEO efforts.

 

Fill in the blank: _______________ helps you group an audience together based on specific criteria from a large list of people.

  • Demographics
  • Segmentation
  • Buyer personas
  • Ideal matching

 

True or false? To make sure you’re appropriately communicating the value of your content, you should define as many benefits as possible when promoting it. The more the better.

  • True
  • False

 

You’re analyzing the performance of your social channels and you notice that Facebook consistently outperforms your Twitter and LinkedIn page. What should you do next?

  • Post the same message on all channels as Facebook since it is working well.
  • Analyze Facebook further to see which posts are working for future content ideas.
  • Transition all social ad budget to Facebook in support of boosting each post moving forward.
  • All of the above

 

Optimizing your content helps improve __________.

  • reach
  • engagement
  • conversions
  • All of the above

 

When examining your attribution report, you notice 85% of your leads that have closed into customers have downloaded your introductory ebook, but your sales team is only closing 1% of leads from social sources. How do you support your Sales team to close more leads from social into customers?

  • Ensure all leads from social sources are nurtured with the introductory ebook before speaking to sales.
  • Devote more time to posting blogs on Facebook.
  • Direct further resources for paid advertising on Twitter to spread your influence to additional channels.
  • Connect with your sales team to coach them on their disconnect in closing the leads.

 

What results can you yield by establishing reporting expectations prior to campaign launch?

  • The campaign’s written SMART goals will free stakeholders from being directly involved.
  • The campaign’s planned content will insulate your team from developing unexpected material outside of the written SMART goals.
  • The campaign’s written SMART goals better align your work with the stakeholders’ key metrics.
  • The campaign’s planned content better aligns your work with the CEO’s quarterly expectations.

 

Which departments does growth marketing support?

  • Marketing
  • Sales
  • Customer Service
  • A and B
  • All of the above

 

Which best explains the bullseye framework?

  • A testing sequence geared towards identifying content your audience cares about
  • An organized three-step approach to gaining traction
  • A system that notifies you when your competitors produce a piece of high-performing content
  • All of the above

 

Fill in the blank: The _________ can help you develop a mission statement that connects with your audience.

  • persona creation process
  • Golden Circle
  • Inbound Methodology
  • buyer’s journey

 

Every content brainstorm needs the following EXCEPT:

  • A moderator
  • A clear agenda
  • At least five people
  • Visual aids

 

Fill in the blank: A great way to create a comfortable atmosphere for a company brainstorm is to start off with _________.

  • role call
  • icebreakers
  • team goals
  • breaking into groups

 

You’re in a brainstorming session with your co-workers. You come up with five topics for your ebook, your colleague says that’s all you need. How should you respond?

  • “Yes, there’s no reason to keep going if we have enough topics for our ebook.”
  • “Yes, we can always identify more later if we need them.”
  • “No, we should have at least ten supporting topics for every ebook we want to create.”
  • “No, we should make a list of as many supporting topics as we can.”

 

To help increase awareness for an upcoming product launch, your manager increases paid promotion funds by 300%. Which channels could you disperse these funds to?

  • Twitter
  • LinkedIn
  • Google
  • A and B
  • All of the above

 

True or false? SnapChat and Pinterest are examples of platforms that a growth marketer might want to test for their business.

  • True
  • False

 

What does an UTM parameter help you identify?

  • Lifecycle stage
  • Lead attribution
  • Company name
  • Content medium

 

Fill in the blank: To effectively tell your business’ story, you need ________________.

  • an interesting history
  • a testimonial from a happy customer
  • a mission with supporting values
  • great products and services

 


 

 

 

 

Fundamentals of Digital Marketing Answers – Google Digital Garage Exam – Digital Skills – Digital Unlocked

Por

Fundamentals of Digital Marketing Answers – Google Digital Garage Exam – Digital Skills – Digital Unlocked

Fundamentals of Digital Marketing Answers - Google Digital Garage Exam - Digital Skills - Digital Unlocked

The questions and answers of Google Digital Garage, Google Digital Skills and Google Digital Unlocked and others are the same.

Google digital garage answers score

 

Please note that this file contains answers to Google Garage Quizzes of all 26 topics.

As you probably know, to access the Final Digital Garage Certification Exam you need to pass all 26 topics. With this file, you can do it very quickly, as all Q&A are listed in the same order.

In contrary to quizzes, during the Final Exam questions are always in random order. More precisely, topics are in the same order, but questions within topics are in random order. Also, there are 117 known questions and during the final exam, you get only 40 questions randomly.

 

 

Check Your Knowledge Answers:

 

Module 1 Lesson 1 Intro To The Digital Garage

 

Doing Business Online Brings Lots Of Fantastic Opportunities – It Can Really Help Your Company In New And Exciting Ways. Once Your Business Is Online, What Opportunities Can You Take Advantage Of?

  • (A) Finding lots of new customers – everyone’s online these days
  • (B) Selling your products or services straight from your website or app
  • (C) Delivering targeted advertising to customers
  • (D) Saving money on your heating bills
  • (E) Learning more about what your customers love
  • (F) Using analytics to power your online sales

 

Module 1 Lesson 2 Your Digital Opportunity

 

Karl, A 50-Year-Old Mechanic, Runs The Local Garage In A Small Town And Is Considering Taking His Business Online. How Could Going Digital Benefit His Business?

  • (A) He’d be more visible to customers
  • (B) He can target ads at local customers
  • (C) It’s easier to communicate with customers
  • (D) Less need for customer conversations
  • (E) More insights into customers’ online behaviour
  • (F) He can modernise his company logo

 

Module 2 Lesson 1 Your Online Goals

 

Q.1 

Hamish Is A Successful Hairdresser. He’s Decided To Grow His Business By Opening Another Salon. Hamish Doesn’t Have An Online Presence Yet, But Thinks This Might Help. Which Of His Business Goals Could Being Online Help Him Achieve?

  • (A) Attract new customers
  • (B) Gather customer feedback
  • (C) Source new hair colouring products
  • (D) Advertise extended opening hours

 

Module 2 Lesson 2 Building Your Online Presence

 

Hamish Has Created A Website With An Online Booking System For His Salon Appointments. He Wants To Engage More With His Customers And Came Up A List Of Goals. Help Hamish To Match Each Task With The Online Tool You Think He Should Use To Achieve His Goal.

Q.1 – Gather Customer Feedback

  • (A) An Online Gallery
  • (B) Email Survey
  • (C) A map
  • (D) Social Media Page

Q.2 – Tell customers about the extended opening hours

  • (A) An Online Gallery
  • (B) Email Survey
  • (C) A map
  • (D) Social Media Page

Q.3 – Show customers Hamish’s latest hair looks

  • (A) An Online Gallery
  • (B) Email Survey
  • (C) A map
  • (D) Social Media Page

Q.4 – Help local customers find the new salon

  • (A) An Online Gallery
  • (B) Email Survey
  • (C) A map
  • (D) Social Media Page

 

Module 2 Lesson 3 Marketing Your Online Presence

 

Hamish’s Website Isn’t Getting As Many Visitors As He’d Like. He’s Heard That Search Engine Marketing (SEM) Can Help, But Isn’t Sure How It Works. Can You Explain What SEM Enables You To Do?

  • (A) Buy ad space on a search results page
  • (B) Bid for keywords to display your content in search engines
  • (C) Tag keywords within your website content
  • (D) Optimise your website’s design

 

Module 2 Lesson 4 Analyse And Adapt

 

Despite His Digital Presence, The Number Of Hits On Hamish’s Website Is Still Low. He’d Like To Use Analytics To Find Out More About How Customers Are Interacting With His Site. What Can He Learn From Analytics? Select The Ways You Think Analytics Can Help Business Owners.

(1) Show which pages of a website are popular.

  • (A) Yes
  • (B) No

(2) Log which items of the website are clicked on.

  • (A) Yes
  • (B) No

(3) List which parts of the website a user doesn’t like.

  • (A) Yes
  • (B) No

(4) Identify where in the world visitors are logging on from.

  • (A) Yes
  • (B) No

 

Module 3 Lesson 1 Choosing Your Online Presence

 

Addie Runs A Local Bakery. After Getting The Business Up And Running Over The Last Six Months, She’s Now Ready To Create A Digital Presence. What Do You Think Addie Should Set Up First: A Social Media Profile Or A Mobile App?

  • (1) Social Media Profile
  • (2) Mobile App

 

Module 3 Lesson 2 How Websites Work

 

Addie Is Investigating How To Create Business Websites For Her Local Bakery Business. She’s Trying To Get Her Head Around How Websites Work. How Good Is Your Tech Knowledge? Can You Check The Facts For Addie?

Q.1 – An IP address is made up of a string of numbers that can be located by any device connected to the internet.

  • (A) True
  • (B) False

Q.2 – A browser figures out where online content is hosted and displays it to the user.

  • (A) True
  • (B) False

Q.3 – Every website is hosted on a server.

  • (A) True
  • (B) False

Q.4 – When users navigate to a website it is known as ‘hosting’.

  • (A) True
  • (B) False

 

Module 3 Lesson 3 Key Website Ingredients

 

Addie Owns The Knead To Know Bakery And Has Decided To Open A Website. But First She Needs To Choose A Domain Name. Take A Look At Her Ideas And Select The Best Domain Name By Crossing Off The Rest.

  • (A) www.knead2know.com
  • (B) www.kneadtoknowbakery.com
  • (C) www.Addies.com
  • (D) www.i-knead-it.org
  • (E) www.mybakery.com

 

Module 3 Lesson 4 Websites And Your Business Goals

 

Addie Is Drafting A Description For The About Us Page Of Her Bakery Website. Which Do You Think Works Best?

  • (A) Our business is driven by your vision and objective – to commit to sustainable, local produce that engages with and builds community spirit.
  • (B) Love cake? So do we. Here at Knead to Know Bakery we have a passion and reputation for creating the most delicious cookies, cakes and bread.
  • (C) We are the best bakers in town. Just like that!

 

Module 3 Lesson 5 Make Your Website Easy To Use

 

Addie Wants To Make Her Website Easy To Navigate. Which Of The Following Features Should Addie Include On Every Page Of Her Website?

  • (A) Side Menu
  • (B) About Us information
  • (C) Bakery logo leading to homepage
  • (D) Search field

 

Module 3 Lesson 6 Website Design Do’s And Don’ts

 

To Make The Homepage Of Her Local Bakery Website Interesting, Addie Wants To Add Some Media Elements To It. Different Elements Will Cause The Page To Take Longer To Load, So She Needs To Get The Right Mix For The Site. Can You Put The Following Elements In Order From The Ones With The Longest Load Time To The Shortest?

The Correct Order is:

  • (1) 2 minute HD advertising video for the bakery
  • (2) Large high res, full screen background image
  • (3) 20 second explainer animation
  • (4) Low res compressed thumbnail image
  • (5) Twitter button that links out to Twitter page.
  • (6) Text descriptions.

 

Module 4 Lesson 1 The Benefits Of An Online Strategy

 

Sam Has Recently Decided To Launch An Online Fitness Coaching Service. He Has Registered A Domain Name And Set Up A Website, But Is Unsure Of How To Launch His Business Online In A Way That Will Help Him Grow Sustainably. Help Sam Create His Own Online Business Strategy, By Selecting The Correct Steps He Should Take.

Q.1 – What should his first step be?

  • (A) Define business goals
  • (B) Create an email template
  • (C) Find an investor
  • (D) Ask the bank for advice

Q.2 – What should his second step be?

  • (A) Launch a blog
  • (B) Hire an assistant
  • (C) Design a logo
  • (D) Write a mission statement

Q.3 – What should his third step be?

  • (A) Launch an advertising campaign
  • (B) Identify his USP
  • (C) Launch a newsletter
  • (D) Hire an accountant

 

Module 4 Lesson 2 Taking A Business Online

 

Omar Owns A Stall Selling Handmade Cosmetics, And Wants To Launch An E-Commerce Site. He Has Lots Of Experience Selling His Products In Person At Markets, But Is Now Hoping To Reach More Customers Online. Can You Advise Omar On How To Make Both His Online And Offline Business Successful?

Q.1 – He should focus on duplicating his successful offline marketing efforts to an online audience

  • (A) True
  • (B) False

Q.2 – He should sell at a cheaper price on the website to attract more customers

  • (A) True
  • (B) False

Q.3 – He should identify his various online and offline audiences, and how best to engage them

  • (A) True
  • (B) False

Q.4 – He should consider paid online advertising as the sole means of promoting his business online

  • (A) True
  • (B) False

 

Module 4 Lesson 3 Understanding Customer Behaviour

 

Holly Owns A Dance Studio. To Improve Sales Of Dance Classes, She Is Reviewing How Her Marketing Team Could Update The Company’s Online Presence. As Part Of The Rebrand, The Team Listened To Customer Feedback And Mapped Customer Journeys. They Identified Two Things Online Customers Generally Struggled With: Navigating The Website And Finding The Business’s Contact Information. Which Of The Brand’s Touchpoints Should Holly Modify To Help Address Her Customer’s Feedback?

  • (A) Website layout
  • (B) Instagram account
  • (C) Instructor’s blog
  • (D) Email marketing

 

Module 4 Lesson 4 How To Stand Out From The Competition

 

Bobbi Owns A Protein Shake Company, Which Has Been Trading For 3 Years. Her Products Are Stocked In A Number Of Gyms, But The Company Has Not Seen Much Growth In Recent Months. Bobbi Would Now Like To Break Into The Online Market To Boost Product Sales. Which Of The Following Actions Should Bobbi Take To Identify Opportunities For Online Business Growth?

  • (A) Hire a Financial Planner
  • (B) Identify a USP
  • (C) Ship to new countries
  • (D) Build a SWOT analysis
  • (E) Distribute feedback forms to suppliers
  • (F) Review competitor websites

 

Module 4 Lesson 5 Using Goals To Improve Business Performance

 

Ryan Has Written Some KPIs To Help His Fitness Centres Achieve The Business Goal Of “Improving Overall Client Satisfaction”. Review These Four KPIs. Which Do You Think Fit The Criteria Of Being Specific, Measurable, Attainable, Relevant And Time-Bound?

  • (A) Ensure 80% of clients use the gym’s online system to book personal training appointments
  • (B) Increase how much money customers spend in the gym’s juice bar
  • (C) A score of 85% or more in the annual survey for the question ‘Would you recommend this gym to a friend?’
  • (D) Ensure 90% of new gym members book an induction session within the first two weeks of joining

 

Module 5 Lesson 1 Search Engine Basics

 

Seth Is Opening A Coffee Shop And Is Looking To Attract New Customers. Take A Look At The List Of Benefits Seth Sees In Using Search Engines. One Statement Is Not True. Can You Cross It Out?

  • (A) Customers can locate Seth’s products and services when they search for them online
  • (B) Search engines can help to get the word out locally about Seth’s new business
  • (C) Search engines can help Seth to target customers who are already looking for his business
  • (D) Customers will see advertisements for Seth’s business whenever they use a search engine

 

Module 5 Lesson 2 How Search Engines Work

 

Seth’s Coffee Shop Is Unique – It Has An Outside Roof Terrace And A Library Area So Customers Can Read While They Sip. He Also Sells Rare Coffee Beans Imported From Peru. What Are A Few Techniques He Could Use To Make His Website More Relevant To Its Desired Users?

  • (A) Point out unique aspects of his business
  • (B) Write a blog to sing the praises of his Peruvian beans
  • (C) Make sure his shop appears on Google maps
  • (D) Paste in a product description of his Peruvian beans that he found on another website
  • (E) Try to get other coffee-enthusiasts to review his business/website

 

Module 5 Lesson 3 How Search Engines See The Web

 

Seth Would Like To Make Sure As Many Interested Customers As Possible Are Seeing His Business’s Website Displayed In Their Search Results. What Are A Few Things He Could Pay Attention To In Order To Achieve This?

  • (A) Image file names
  • (B) Page titles
  • (C) Keywords in the content
  • (D) Keyword meta tags

 

Module 5 Lesson 4 Organic Search Explained

 

Organic Search Results Appear When Someone Makes A Search Using A Search Engine. They Aren’t Paid For By Businesses And They Aren’t Adverts. Which Of The Images Shows The Organic Search Results From This Particular Search?

  • (A) Image 1
  • (B) Image 2
  • (C) Image 3

 

Module 5 Lesson 5 Paid Search Explained

 

Seth Is Considering Advertising His Business Using Paid Search Results. What Do You Think Makes Paid Search Advertising So Effective As A Marketing Method? Look At The Following Statements And Decide Whether They Are True Or False.

Q.1 – Seth’s adverts are shown to people who are already interested in his type of business.

  • (A) True
  • (B) False

Q.2 – Seth will only be charged for advertising when his ad appears in the search results.

  • (A) True
  • (B) False

Q.3 – The paid search results are given a more prominent position on the search results page.

  • (A) True
  • (B) False

Q.4 – Seth will be charged for advertising only when someone clicks on his ad.

  • (A) True
  • (B) False

 

Module 5 Lesson 6 Google Search Console

 

Seth’s Website Has Been Up And Running For A While, But He Isn’t Sure How Effective It’s Been At Drawing In New Customers. How Can Google Search Console Help Seth With This?

  • (A) It can help show whether he’s using proper keywords in his content
  • (B) It can recommend better page titles for Seth to use
  • (C) It can recommend content that will drive more traffic to his site

 

Module 6 Lesson 1 Intro To Search Engine Optimisation(SEO)

 

Eric Is Expanding His Business By Selling Fruit And Veg Online. His Website Has Been Up And Running For A While But He’s Not Getting Many Views Or Orders Online. Eric Knows He Can Improve His Search Engine Results With Either Paid Search Or SEO.Take a look at the following search results screens. Where will his website appear in the search results if he purely uses SEO to improve his results?

  • (A) Image 1
  • (B) Image 2
  • (C) Image 3

 

Module 6 Lesson 2 The Importance Of An SEO Plan

 

Eric Is Keen To Improve His Search Engine Results And He Wants To Use SEO To Do It. He’s Written The Step-By-Step Process For His SEO Plan, But It’s Currently In The Wrong Order. Can You Reorder It?

The correct order is

  • (1) Do Keyword research
  • (2) See where I appear in search results for specific keywords
  • (3) Look for gaps in my SEO performance
  • (4) Review results and adjust plan.

 

Module 6 Lesson 3 The SEO Process

 

Eric Sells Fruit And Veg Online And Is Using SEO To Improve Where He Ranks In Search Engine Results. He’s Researched What People Search For To Get To His Website, And He’s Created Content To Match It. Eric’s SEO Work Doesn’t Stop There Though. He’s Been Talking To Some Friends And They’ve All Offered Him Advice About How He Should Keep Up With SEO Over Time. What advice should he not take?

  • (A) Contract an agency offering top organic search positions
  • (B) Don’t change your keywords as it confuses search engines
  • (C) Stay up to date with search engine changes
  • (D) Read about the trends in your industry and use them to create content for your page
  • (E) Get opinions from your customers on what might be missing from your site

 

Module 6 Lesson 4 How To Choose Keywords

 

Eric Is Optimising His Fruit And Veg Website For SEO And Would Like To Improve His ‘Long Tail’ Keywords. Which Of These Sets Of Words Contains An Example Of Long Tail Keywords?

  • (A) Maris piper potatoes
  • (B) Potato, potatoes, farm potatoes, organic potatoes
  • (C) Buy organic potatoes from a family farm

 

Module 6 Lesson 5 Setting Realistic SEO Goals

 

Eric Has Been Selling Fruit And Veg Online For A While. He’s Chosen The Keywords That He Feels Will Drive The Right People To His Website; Now He Needs To Track The Progress Of These Keywords With Analytics Tools. What Information Will Analytics Give Him?

  • (A) Where website visitors are located
  • (B) Which website visitors turn into paying customers
  • (C) What content visitors interact with
  • (D) Whether customers enjoy the fruit and veg they buy

 

Module 7 Lesson 1 Making Your Web Pages Search Friendly

 

Eric Blake Sells The Produce From His Farm Online. He Wants To Optimise The Page That Sells Fruit And Vegetables, So He’s Looking Into Titles And Meta Tags, Headings, And Improving His Copy. Can You Help Eric Choose A Suitable Title And Meta Description?

Q.1 – Click to Select Title

  • (A) Blake’s Produce: Fresh Fruit and Vegetables
  • (B) Blake’s Produce
  • (C) Blake’s Produce: Local to you

Q.2 – Click to select meta description

  • (A) Produce grown locally and delivered to you
  • (B) Fresh fruit and vegetables grown locally and delivered straight to your door
  • (C) Farm fresh produce grown by local farmer Eric and delivered straight to your door

 

Module 7 Lesson 2 How Other Websites Can Work For You

 

Eric Is Working On His Website, Which Sells Produce From His Farm. He’s Thinking Of Different Ways To Improve His Website So That It Appears On More Search Engine Results And Gets More Traffic. Which Of These Ideas Will Help Improve His Search Visibility?

  • (A) Write recipes that use vegetables that he sells
  • (B) Get lots of likes or followers on social media
  • (C) Encourage others to write about his website
  • (D) Add lots of links to the website

 

Module 7 Lesson 3 Cross Borders With SEO

 

Eric’s Farm Produce Business Started Locally In The UK, But He’s Started Getting Orders From Overseas As Well. Not Wanting To Miss This Opportunity, Eric Decides To Optimise His Website To An International Audience. What Should He Avoid Doing? Select The Things Eric Should Avoid Then Select Submit To Remove Them.

  • (A) Separating out each language into different pages
  • (B) Having different languages on the same page
  • (C) Adding language annotations to his webpage
  • (D) Using automated services to translate content

 

Module 8 Lesson 1 Introduction To Search Engine Marketing(SEM)

 

Michelle Is A Wedding Photographer In Cardiff. She Wants To Use Search Engine Marketing To Bring Customers To Her Website. Where Will Her Website Appear If She Uses Search Engine Marketing?

  • (A) Image 1
  • (B) Image 2
  • (C) Image 3

 

Module 8 Lesson 2 The SEM Auction

 

Michelle Has Created Some Adverts To Promote Her Wedding Photography Business In Cardiff. She Wants Her Adverts To Align With The Keywords ‘Wedding Photographer Cardiff Discount’, As She’s Offering 25% Off At The Moment. Can You Order The Following Advert Headings From Best To Worst In Terms Of How Well They Align With The Keywords?

The correct order is

  • (1) Cardiff wedding photographer – 25% discount
  • (2) Cardiff wedding photographer
  • (3) Discount wedding
  • (4) Wedding

 

Module 8 Lesson 3 What Makes A Good Keyword

 

To Increase Her Quality Score, Michelle Is Thinking About The Best Keywords And Phrases To Use. Cross Off The Keywords Which She Shouldn’t Use.

  • (A) Wedding photography Cardiff
  • (B) Cardiff weddings
  • (C) Wedding photography business based in Cardiff

 

Module 8 Lesson 4 Make Your Ads Stand Out

 

Michelle Is Writing Her Search Ad For Her Wedding Photography Business. She Wants To Make Sure It Stands Out. Which Of These Text Statements Would Work Best As An Ad?

  • (A) Wedding Photographer. Cardiff based photographer specialises in outdoor weddings and scenic locations. Book Now!
  • (B) Cardiff Wedding Photography. Get 25% off your first order. Make your reservation now.
  • (C) Welsh wedding pics. Want great wedding pics? Cardiff based photographer, Michelle, available for hire.

 

Module 9 Lesson 1 Achieve Relevance With Good Structure

 

Anna Is A Commercial Photographer. She’s Setting Up SEM Campaigns To Draw More Traffic To Her Site. She Needs To Make Sure Her Ads Are Relevant, And She’s Doing This By Creating Ad Groups For Each Type Of Product. Take a look at the ad below:

Wedding photography

Capture your special day with beautiful photographs

Call to book your date now!

Question – Can you help Anna by eliminating the keywords that wouldn’t be relevant to her ad?

  • (A) Bridal party photos
  • (B) Candid wedding photos
  • (C) Baby photoshoot
  • (D) Newborn baby photography
  • (E) Professional website photos

 

Module 9 Lesson 2 Get The Most From Your Keywords

 

Anna Specialises In Portrait Photography. She Uses Her Website To Reach Potential Customers And Has Recently Set Up An SEM Campaign To Draw More Traffic To Her Site. She Wants To Use Negative Keywords To Make Sure Her Ads Don’t Appear For People Who Aren’t Potential Customers. Which Of The Following Keywords Are The Negative Keywords?

  • (A) Photographer
  • (B) Portrait
  • (C) Landscape
  • (D) Family photo
  • (E) Watercolour

 

Module 9 Lesson 3 Fine-Tune With Keyword Match Types

 

Anna Has A Themed Portrait Photography Studio. She Offers Competitive Prices And Reaches And Engages With Visitors To Her Site Through Her Online Presence. However, Not Many Of Them Become Paying Customers. Anna Has A Range Of Keywords And Wants To Fine-Tune Them To Best Target Potentially Paying Customers. Put the keywords in order of the broadest to the most restrictive.

The correct order is

  • (1) Photography, portraits
  • (2) Portrait photography studio
  • (3) Movie themed portrait photography
  • (4) Film themed portrait photography, low cost

 

Module 9 Lesson 4 How To Know What’s Working And What Isn’t

 

Anna Is A Photographer. She’s Previously Focused On Wedding Photography, But She Now Takes Requests To Photograph Other Events As Well. Customers Can Contact Her Through The Site’s Enquiry Page To Make Requests. They Can Also Look At Her Gallery And Sign Up To An Email Newsletter. Anna wants to track how many people request photography for events that aren’t weddings. Where should she place the conversion tracking code?

  • (A) Homepage
  • (B) Enquiry page
  • (C) Enquiry confirmation page
  • (D) Newsletter sign-up page

 

Module 10 Lesson 1 Marketing To The Locals

 

Jim Is Running A Bike Shop In A Popular Tourist City And He’s Started A Bike Hire Service. What Would Be The Better Way For Jim To Attract More Tourists – A Map Feature Or A Social Media Page?

  • (1) A Map feature
  • (B) A Social Media page

 

Module 10 Lesson 2 The Power Of Local Directories

 

Jim Owns A Local Bike Shop And Wants To Be Noticed More By The People In His Town. He Decides To Use The Internet To Connect With Customers Online By Creating A Listing For His Business In A Local Directory Like Google My Business. Help Jim Create His Listing By Choosing The Minimum Information He Should Add.

  • (A) Jim’s Bikes
  • (B) 10 Bird Way, Cowseld, West Sussex, RH11 5XN
  • (C) Phone number 01269 559632
  • (D) Open 9–5 Mon–Sat
  • (E) Image of a bike

 

Module 11 Lesson 1 Using Digital To Advertise Locally

 

Esmeralda Runs A Local Bike Shop. If She Advertises Her Shop Using The Internet, Esmeralda Could Reach People In Many Different Countries. But She Doesn’t Want To Do That. She Wants To Target Her Online Ads To Local Customers. How Can She Do This Effectively?

  • (A) Show ads to people within 10 miles of her shop
  • (B) Display the ad during the shop’s opening hours
  • (C) Tailor her ads for people who live locally
  • (D) Hand out flyers and business cards to local shops

 

Module 11 Lesson 2 Reaching Locals On Their Mobiles

 

Esmeralda Runs A Local Bike Shop. She Knows A Lot Of Her Customers Use Smartphones With GPS, So She Invested In A Mobile App That Can Utilise This Technology. She Has A Couple Of Ideas How To Use The App To Engage Her Customers. Can You Remove The Ideas That Do Not Need GPS?

  • (A) Send sales alerts when customers are near the shop
  • (B) Notify people of promotional events like a free tune-up
  • (C) Direct customers to Esmeralda’s shop
  • (D) Send personalised coupons to repeat customers
  • (E) Let customers schedule appointments for repairs

 

Module 11 Lesson 3 SEO For Local Businesses

 

Esmeralda Owns A Bike Shop And Wants To Make Her Website Interesting For Local Customers. She’s Currently Planning Blog Content That Will Help Her Show Up On Searches For Local Shops. She’s Had An Idea For A Post About Famous Cyclists And One About Popular Bike Trails In The Area. Which One Do You Think Esmeralda Should Start With?

  • (1) Post about famous cyclists
  • (2) Post about popular bike trails in the area

 

Module 12 Lesson 1 Social Media Basics

 

Lily Runs A Vintage Clothing Company. She’s Set Up An Instagram And A Facebook Page, And Has Gained Some Followers By Putting A Sign Up In Her Shop. What Can Lily Do To Keep These Followers And Encourage Others?

  • (A) Start a conversation with your followers
  • (B) Comment on all of your followers’ personal posts
  • (C) Delete all negative comments
  • (D) Post regularly
  • (E) Name and shame competitors

 

Module 12 Lesson 2 The Right Social Media Sites For You

 

Lily Has Drafted A Number Of Different Posts For Her Social Media Accounts. Can You Match The Post To The Best Social Network For Each Of The Following Scenarios?

Q.1 – Vintage Lily is looking for a carpenter to create a bespoke counter top for our vintage clothing shop; contact me for details

  • (A) Instagram
  • (B) LinkedIn
  • (C) Facebook

Q.2 – Loving these recent photos of the new range by my fantastic photographer friend Rae

  • (A) Instagram
  • (B) LinkedIn
  • (C) Facebook

Q.3 – So excited about our first ever after-hours vintage fashion show on Thursday at 7 p.m. – join us?

  • (A) Instagram
  • (B) LinkedIn
  • (C) Facebook

 

Module 12 Lesson 3 Setting Your Goals For Social Media

 

Lily Has Had Fun Experimenting With The Various Social Media Networks But It’s Time To Get A Little More Serious. Which Of Lily’s Business Goals Can She Achieve With Social Media?

  • (A) Raise the profile of the business
  • (B) Keep expenditure within the stated budgets
  • (C) Attract new customers and grow the customer base
  • (D) Control the flow of stock
  • (E) Discuss new products with customers

 

Module 12 Lesson 4 Getting On Social Media

 

Lily Is Setting Up A Twitter Profile For Her Business. She’s Put Together A List Of The Key Things She’ll Need To Get Her Profile Up And Running. Can You Check Her List And Cross Off Any Items She Doesn’t Need To Include In Her Twitter Business Profile?

  • (A) A business email account
  • (B) Annual membership fee
  • (C) A company logo or photo
  • (D) Business description and contact details
  • (E) Number of employees in the business

 

Module 13 Lesson 1 Your Long-Term Social Media Plan

 

Lily Runs A Vintage Clothing Shop And Wants To Engage More With Her Customers Online. She Currently Posts To Two Social Media Networks But Wants To Develop A Full Social Media Strategy. Review The Possible Options. Can You Place Them Into The Right Order, Starting With What Lily Should Do First?

The correct order is

  • (1) Create a Social Media Plan
  • (2) Set up accounts on appropriate social media sites
  • (3) Sign up to a Social media management tool
  • (4) Create a list of posts to be automatically posted in the coming weeks

 

Module 13 Lesson 2 Advertising On Social Media

 

Lily Has Decided To Use Some Of Her Social Media Budget For Targeted Facebook Adverts. She’s Keen To Take Her Vintage Clothing Business Global And Wants To Reach A Wider Audience, So Which Groups Should Her Advertisements Be Targeted At?

  • (A) Users who have posted about buying vintage clothes
  • (B) Users who have ‘liked’ vintage clothing
  • (C) Users who live within 20 miles of Lily’s shop
  • (D) Users who live in countries that she’d be happy to mail her products to

 

Module 13 Lesson 3 Measuring Success In Social Media

 

Lily Is Keen To Use Analytics To Evaluate The Results Of Her Social Media Campaigns. Analytics Can Help With This Question. Can You Help Her By Crossing Off The Things That Analytics Won’t Be Able To Help Her With?

  • (A) Tell Lily how many visitors interact with her website
  • (B) Show Lily how visitors found the site
  • (C) Schedule content to be posted automatically at specified times
  • (D) Send custom posts to specific visitors

 

Module 13 Lesson 4 Avoiding Social Media Pitfalls

 

Lily Sees A Negative Post On Twitter About Her Vintage Clothing Business: “Received My #VintageLily Dress Today Only To Find The Zip Was Broken! #Lousyservice #Vintagewoes” How Do You Think She Should Respond?

  • (A) “@sophie112 – We’ve never had our zips break before. Did you pull it too quickly?”
  • (B) “So sorry to hear that @sophie112 DM me so that we can get that dress fixed up as soon as possible.
  • (C) “@sophie112 That’s a shame, sometimes the zips just break.”

 

Module 14 Lesson 1 The Evolution Of Mobile Devices

 

Phil Runs A Local Plumbing Business. He Has A Website But It Isn’t Mobile-Optimised. He’s Deciding Whether To Make His Site Responsive Or Create A Customised App. Help Him To Decide Which Route To Take First.

  • (1) Create a customised App
  • (2) Make his website responsive

 

Module 14 Lesson 2 Understanding Mobile Web And Mobile Apps

 

Now That Phil Has Decided On A Responsive Website, He Needs To Select A Great Design. Have A Look At These Website Layouts. Which Do You Think Is Best Suited For Mobile?

  • (A) Website A
  • (B) Website B
  • (C) Website C

 

Module 14 Lesson 3 Understanding Mobile Apps

 

Phil Has Limited Technical Knowledge But He Wants To Create An App To Simplify The Booking Process For His Customers. It’s Important To Select The Right Approach When Making An App. Which Of The Following Routes Would You Not Recommend To Phil?

  • (A) A professional app developer
  • (B) An online self-service tool
  • (C) Repurpose an existing app
  • (D) Make the app himself

 

Module 15 Lesson 1 Introduction For Advertising On Mobile

 

Mo Is A Plumber In Glasgow. He Has A Mobile-Friendly Website, And Wants To Make Sure His Site Becomes More Visible On The Results Page During A Search. Which Keywords Do You Think Would Work Well For His Mobile SEO?

  • (A) Leaky Tap
  • (B) Blocked Sink
  • (C) How to fix a burst pipe in your bathroom
  • (D) Local plumber
  • (E) Pressure has failed in boiler, how can I fix it myself?
  • (F) Ubend fix
  • (G) Why is my dishwasher making a gurgling sound?

 

Module 15 Lesson 2 Search Campaigns For Mobile

 

Mo’s A Plumber With A Responsive Website. He Wants To Make Sure He’s Using The Right Keywords For His Mobile SEO. Which Online Tool Could Help Him Identify Which Keywords Would Be Most Effective?

  • (A) Google Keyword Planner
  • (B) Google Analytics
  • (C) Hootsuite

 

Module 15 Lesson 3 Display Campaigns For Mobile

 

Mo Is Keen To Advertise His Plumbing Business. He Needs To Find The Display Advert Design That Will Display Optimally On A Large Smartphone Device, As That’s What Most Of His Customers Use. Which Of The Designs Would Work Best On Smartphones?

  • (A) Design 1
  • (B) Design 2

 

Module 15 Lesson 4 Social Media Campaigns For Mobile

 

After A Lull In Sales, Mo Wants To Use A Social Media Campaign To Launch Some Of His New Plumbing Services. He Wants To Make Sure He’s Targeting The Right Audience. Which Parameters Should He Use To Decide Who To Target?

  • (A) Internet speed, age, interests, hair colour, location, job title
  • (B) Age, interests, location
  • (C) Marital status, gender, interests, age

 

Module 15 Lesson 5 Video For Mobile

 

Mo Has A Plumbing Business. He’s Noticed That Other Service Companies Publish Short Videos To Show Off Their Expertise, Products, And How They Do Things. This Engages Their Customers And Drives Interest In Their Services. To Help Customers With Common Plumbing Problems, He Wants To Create A Do-It-Yourself Video On His Website. How Long Should He Make His Video?

  • (A) 30 seconds
  • (B) 60 seocnds
  • (C) 90 seconds
  • (D) 120 seconds
  • (E) 150 seconds
  • (F) 180 seconds

 

Module 16 Lesson 1 Intro To Content Marketing

 

Angela Opened Her Own Beauty Salon Two Years Ago, And Is Now Looking At How Content Marketing Can Help Her Boost The Business’s Profile Online. How Could Content Marketing Help Her?

Q.1 – Could it help her find cheaper suppliers?

  • (A) True
  • (B) False

Q.2 – Could it help her develop a stronger brand identity?

  • (A) True
  • (B) False

Q.3 – Could it help her understand her customers’ shopping preferences?

  • (A) True
  • (B) False

Q.4 – Could it help her connect with the right audience?

  • (A) True
  • (B) False

 

Module 16 Lesson 2 Get To Know Your Online Customers

 

Alex Is A Mechanic Who Owns A Small Garage. He’s Also A Keen Blogger, And Writes Great Posts About His Passion: Cars! He Thought His Blog Would Attract More Car Lovers To His Garage, But So Far His Blog Posts Are Not Very Popular And Are Rarely Shared On Social Media. He Has Researched How To Improve The Blog And Now Has A Number Of Actions He Can Take, But Is Unsure Which Should Come First. Can You Help Him By Arranging The Following Actions Into The Correct Order?

The correct order is:

  • (1) Find out who his audience is
  • (2) Segment his audience into groups
  • (3) Create specific content targeted to these audience profiles
  • (4) Publish the content and promote it to his audience

 

Module 16 Lesson 3 Choosing The Right Format For Your Content

 

Jamie Is Part Of The Content Marketing Team For Fitstuff, A Sports Shop. The Content He’s Producing Needs To Appeal To New Customers, As Well As Provide Extra Value To Existing Customers. Which Of The Following Content Would Appeal Best To Both Audiences?

  • (A) List of the top 10 sports equipment outlets/shops
  • (B) A competition inviting customers to submit photos of themselves wearing Fitstuff gear, with store gift vouchers up for grabs as prizes
  • (C) 10% discount vouchers for all new customers
  • (D) A blog about the store’s recycling scheme for old trainers

 

Module 16 Lesson 4 Writing For Online Audiences

 

Josh, An Interior Designer, Has Decided To Create Blog Posts And Share Them On Social Media To Promote His New Business. He’s Made A List Of All Of The Things He Should Remember When Writing – However, Not All Points On His List Are Correct. Can You Help Him Identify The Points That Are Correct On This List?

  • (A) Focus on your target audience
  • (B) Only write about the products or services you offer
  • (C) Be consistent in your writing style and tone of voice
  • (D) Add the hook to the end of your blog post
  • (E) The longer the post, the better

 

Module 16 Lesson 5 Help Your Content Be Seen

 

Lydia Is A Business Student Working For A Hotel’s Marketing Department For The Summer. She’s Responsible For Creating And Promoting Content Across The Hotel’s Online Channels. What Should She Do, And In Which Order?

She should do things in the following order:

  • (1) Consider all the channels available
  • (2) Decide what content to create, and when, based on the target audience
  • (3) Create content
  • (4) Publish content
  • (5) Promote content

 

Module 16 Lesson 6 Measuring Your Success In Content Marketing

 

Maria Has A Pet Shop In Bristol, And Is Writing Fun Blog Posts About Pets On Her Website, Which Are Also Being Promoted On Her Social Media Accounts. Her Goal Is To Try And Increase Product Sales Through Content Marketing Efforts. Which Metric Is The Most Relevant In Assessing Which Blog Posts Are Contributing To Increased Product Sales?

  • (A) How long users spend on each blog post
  • (B) Which websites are referring traffic to her blog
  • (C) The number of new subscribers to her email marketing list
  • (D) How many people click the “Buy Now” CTA at the end of each blog post

 

Module 17 Lesson 1 Email Marketing Basics

 

Steph Runs An Online Pet Supplies Shop, And She Has Some Ideas About How Email Marketing Can Help Her Business. Two Of Her Ideas Are Correct And Two Are Not. Can You Weed Out The Wrong Ones?

(A) It’s a good way of keeping customers informed about products

(B) It helps customers talk to each other via email

(C) It will let me send info about dog-related products to customers who have dogs

(D) It lets customers email me if they have problems or questions

 

Module 17 Lesson 2 Your Email Marketing Options

 

Steph Is Thinking About Using An Email Marketing Service To Help Her Send Out Marketing Emails For Her Pet Supplies Store. What Benefits Are There To Using An Email Marketing Service?

  • (A) They make it easier for customers to sign up to receive marketing emails
  • (B) They can help you create a customer database
  • (C) They write marketing emails for you
  • (D) They make it straightforward to send out personalised emails

 

Module 17 Lesson 3 Crafting Great Marketing Emails

 

Steph Is Writing A Marketing Email To Send Out To Customers Who Have Bought Puppy Food And Toys From Her Online Shop. Which Of The Following Options Should She Select To Use In The Subject Line Of The Email?

  • (A) Save ££££s on PUPPY FOOD!!!!
  • (B) MEGASALE on food for PUPZ!
  • (C) Hi John, do you have a new puppy?

 

Module 17 Lesson 4 Managing Successful Email Campaigns

 

Steph Is Curious To Learn How Her Customers React To Email Marketing Campaigns. What Kind Of Analytics Data Might She Expect To Get From Her Recent Email Marketing Action?

  • (A) Open rates
  • (B) Clickthrough rates
  • (C) Weekly sales
  • (D) Trash rates

 

Module 17 Lesson 5 Managing Measuring Success In Email Marketing

 

Amelia Is A Marketing Assistant At A Big Clothing Brand, And Has Just Sent Out Her First Email Marketing Campaign. She Takes A Look At The Click Through Rate, To Understand How Many People Clicked On A Link In The Email In Order To Land On Her Website. What Is The Drawback Of This Metric?

  • (A) The reason for the rate being higher or lower is unknown
  • (B) The less people that open the email, the lower the rate
  • (C) It doesn’t track the number of bounces

 

Module 18 Lesson 1 What Is Display Advertising?

 

Colin Has Been Running A Film Review Website For His Podcasts For The Past Two Years. He’d Like To Start Advertising His Site To Increase The Number Of Subscribers. To Do That He Wants To Contact Some Media Owners. Who Do You Think Colin Should Contact?

  • (A) A forum for movie fans
  • (B) Film production agency
  • (C) An offline business directory
  • (D) A network that matches businesses with ad space to sell

 

Module 18 Lesson 2 Search Advertising Vs. Display Advertising

 

To Maximise The Hits On His Website, Colin Wants To Target Two Different Audiences Using Both Display Ads And Search Advertising. His Two Target Audiences Include Cinema-Goers And Home Movie Watchers. Which Type Of Approach Would Work For Each Audience?

(1) Home Movie watchers

  • (A) Place a display ad for the local cinema on Colin’s own website
  • (B) Place a display ad on a cinema listings site
  • (C) Create a search ad with keywords based on Colin’s film reviews
  • (D) Distribute flyers at the local cinema

(2) Cinema-goers

  • (A) Place a display ad for the local cinema on Colin’s own website
  • (B) Place a display ad on a cinema listings site
  • (C) Create a search ad with keywords based on Colin’s film reviews
  • (D) Distribute flyers at the local cinema

 

Module 18 Lesson 3 The Ins And Outs Of Display Advertising

 

Colin’s Favourite Director Has Launched A New Film. Colin Has Written A Review And Wants To Use It To Bring In Visitors With A Digital Campaign. Considering He Has A Limited Budget, Which Of The Website Pages Would Not Be Ideal For His Digital Ads?

  • (A) Filmography page of the director
  • (B) His friend’s culinary blog
  • (C) Cinema listings
  • (D) Local news website

 

Module 19 Lesson 1 Making Display Ads Meet Your Goals

 

Colin Distributes A Popular Movie Review Podcast Called ‘Film Talk’ From His Website. He Wants To Use Display Advertising To Attract New Visitors To His Site. Take A Look At The Three Adverts. Pick The One You Think Will Draw The Most Visitors.

  • (A) Text-based ad
  • (B) Video ad
  • (C) Image and text ad

 

Module 19 Lesson 2 Understanding Ad Networks

 

Colin Has Created His First Video Ad, And Identified Quite A Few Film-Related Websites Where He’d Like To Display It. What One Solution Will Allow Colin To Easily Place His Ad On As Many Relevant Websites As Possible?

  • (A) Tweet the video link to his friends
  • (B) Email website owners to ask if they will feature his video
  • (C) Use an ad network such as Google Display Network
  • (D) Share the video on his Facebook page

 

Module 19 Lesson 3 How Retargeting Works

 

Colin Is Getting A Lot Of Traffic To His Podcast Website, But Not Many Subscribers. He Has Budget To Design Three Display Ads To Encourage People Back To His Website To Subscribe. Colin Came Up With A List Of Target Groups That He’d Like Reach With His Ads. Help Him To Cross Off The Two Least Useful Target Groups From His List.

  • (A) People who visit his site
  • (B) People who search for TV-related podcasts
  • (C) People who have started (but not finished) the subscription process
  • (D) People who download his e-catalogue
  • (E) Commentators on film forums

 

Module 20 Lesson 1 The Rise Of Online Video

 

Justin Is A Passionate Cook. He Runs A Vegetarian Cooking Website Where He Shares Recipes And Sells Speciality Ingredients. How Could Justin Reach His Customers Through Online Video?

  • (A) Upload cooking videos to YouTube
  • (B) Advertise on other videos to promote his recipes
  • (C) Add video to his own website
  • (D) Advertise on online games
  • (E) Buy a TV commercial slot
  • (F) Share video on his social media pages

 

Module 20 Lesson 2 How Video Fits Into Your Online Strategy

 

Justin’s Created The Perfect Vegetarian Lasagne, And He Wants To Share His Recipe With The World. Can You Help Him Plan Where To Put A Promo Video So It Will Most Effectively Reach His Target Audience?

  • (A) In an email to his customers
  • (B) Cookery section of YouTube
  • (C) Websites selling speciality vegetarian ingredients
  • (D) Local directory listings

 

Module 20 Lesson 3 Creating Video Content Within Your Budget

 

Justin Wants To Do Some Video Interviews With Other Local Chefs. He Wants To Add The Videos To His Blog. Can You Help Him Order His To-Do List?

The correct order for his To-Do list is:

  • (1) Plan the video release schedule
  • (2) Storyboard the video content
  • (3) Decide on a location and source props
  • (4) Find a video crew and film the videos
  • (5) Edit then upload the videos

 

Module 20 Lesson 4 Sharing And Promoting Your Videos

 

Justin Is Uploading Some New Videos. What Can He Do To Increase The Chance Of Them Being Promoted And Shared?

  • (A) Post it on his website as well as other sites
  • (B) Use a title and keywords that the target audience will use to search
  • (C) Have a call to action such as a ‘share’ option
  • (D) Add hashtags to your videos for social networking sites

 

Module 20 Lesson 5 Advertising On Video Sharing Sites

 

Justin Wants To Do More Video Advertising. He Knows His Blog Audience Likes Cooking At Home, TV Shows Featuring Famous Chefs And Cooking Demo Videos. Which Keywords Should He Choose For The Google Ads Programme?

  • (A) Home Cooking
  • (B) TV Chefs
  • (C) Instructional Videos
  • (D) Cooking Videos
  • (E) Chefs
  • (F) TV Shows

 

Module 20 Lesson 6 Measuring Video Performance

 

Justin Is Studying His Food Blog’s Analytics. He Notices That Most People Give Up On His Videos After 60 Seconds. He’s Brainstormed A List Of Fixes. Cross Out The Ones That You Think Are Wrong.

  • (A) Change his preview image and video title
  • (B) Update the video description
  • (C) Keep new videos under 60 seconds
  • (D) Review the comments to see what viewers have said

 

Module 21 Lesson 1 What Is Web Analytics?

 

Linda Runs A Guesthouse With A Website Where People Can Book Their Rooms Online. She’s Been Using Web Analytics To Monitor How Customers Interact With Her Website. Linda Uses The Information To Improve The Site And The Visitor’s Experience. Take A Look At The Following Terms – Do You Know What They Mean In The Web Analytics World?

(1) Time spent on site

  • (A) Metric
  • (B) Conversion
  • (C) Dimension

(2) Visitor’s device type

  • (A) Metric
  • (B) Conversion
  • (C) Dimension

(3) Visitor’s location

  • (A) Metric
  • (B) Conversion
  • (C) Dimension

(4) Signing up to the newsletter

  • (A) Metric
  • (B) Conversion
  • (C) Dimension

 

Module 21 Lesson 2 Making Web Analytics Work For You

 

Linda’s Analytics Data Shows People Unsubscribing From Her Newsletter After Two Weeks. These People Also Aren’t Booking Rooms At Her Guesthouse. Linda Gets Some Advice From Her Friends. Whose Advice Should She Take?

  • (A) “Stop sending newsletters as people aren’t reading them”
  • (B) “Review the content of the newsletters to check they’re suitable”
  • (C) “Check you’re not sending too many newsletters”
  • (D) “Send more newsletters reminding customers to book a room”

 

Module 21 Lesson 3 Tracking Specific Goals With Web Analytics

 

Linda Runs A Guesthouse And Has Been Using Analytics To Gather Information About How People Interact With Her Website. She’s Recently Revamped Her Newsletter, And Has Made The Site Responsive To Appeal To Users On Mobile Devices. Which Elements Of The Analytics Should Linda Focus On To Measure The Effectiveness Of Her Changes?

  • (A) Number of visits to the site per month
  • (B) Number of site pages users explore on average
  • (C) Amount of time visitors spend on the site
  • (D) Number of people clicking on the links in her newsletters
  • (E) Percentage of orders made on smartphones and tablets

 

Module 22 Lesson 1 Web Analytics And Organic Search

 

Linda Runs A Guesthouse. She Wants To Use Analytics To Measure Traffic Coming To Her Website From Organic Search Results. What Can She Learn From Analytics Reports?

  • (A) Which search engines visitors use
  • (B) How traffic is trending over time
  • (C) How relevant the content is for keywords
  • (D) How many visitors are using mobile devices

 

Module 22 Lesson 2 Tools To Measure SEM

 

Linda Owns A Guesthouse And Has A Website Where Customers Can Book And Pay For Rooms In Advance. Linda Uses SEM To Create Targeted Ads For Her Rooms. She’s Now Looking At The Analytics Data For The Different Ad Campaigns She Runs. Take A Look At The Analytics Data For The Three Campaigns. Which One Campaign Is Performing Least Well?

(A) Cosy guesthouse in Guildford town centre Get away from it all in a relaxed setting Book a room today!

(478 clicks 6% conversion rate)

(B) Family friendly guesthouse Lots to do nearby Come and see what we have to offer!

(830 clicks 2% conversion rate)

(C) Romantic guesthouse getaway in Guildford Plan a special trip with your loved one Book online now!

(630 clicks 4% conversion rate)

 

Module 22 Lesson 3 Breaking Down Your Data For Insights

 

Linda Runs A Successful Guesthouse In The Centre Of Guildford. She Promotes The Guesthouse Online And Has A Website Where Customers Can Book And Pay For Rooms In Advance. Linda Wants To Use Segmentation To Break Down Her Analytics Data. What Information About The Visitors Can She Gather By Using This?

  • (A) Devices used
  • (B) The visitor’s city
  • (C) The visitor’s country
  • (D) The number of clicks on a page

 

Module 23 Lesson 1 Using Data To Understand Audiences

 

Charles Is Thinking About Taking His Business Online. He Has Many Questions, But First He Wants To Understand What Benefits Data Can Have In Online Marketing. He Needs Some Advice. What Are The Benefits Of Data In Online Marketing?

  • (A) Data can be accessed and analysed in real time
  • (B) Data helps you make informed decisions
  • (C) Data allows you to regard every customer as a number, removing the need for personalisation
  • (D) Digital data reaches more customers

 

Module 23 Lesson 2 Understanding The Data Cycle

 

Jo Is About To Launch A New Online Campaign, And Wants To Know How Data Can Be Used To Make The Campaign As Effective As Possible. Rearrange The Steps Below In The Correct Order To Help Jo Understand What Should Happen First.

The correct order for the steps to follow is:

  • (1) Identify the goals of the campaign and plan the next actions to take
  • (2) Collect the relevant data
  • (3) Check and investigate the findings
  • (4) Take action to test the hypothesis

 

Module 23 Lesson 3 Creating Actionable Insights From Your Data

 

Lee Is Currently Trying To Promote A Free EBook Download On His Website. He Has Spent Time Creating Compelling Emails And Posting Updates On His Social Media Accounts. He Decides To Use Data To Work Out If Actionable Insights Can Improve The Success Of His Non-Paid Promotional Efforts.

Here are the highlights of the data that was gathered:

  • 75% of all eBook downloads came via his social media posts, 15% coming from his email newsletter and 10% via organic search traffic
  • Most eBook downloads occured between 5.00 p.m. and 7.00 p.m.
  • Facebook accounted for 65% of social media eBook downloads, LinkedIn made up another 25%, while other social media platforms delivered a total of 10%.

Using this information, what actionable insights could Lee come up with to improve the success of his promotional efforts going forward?

  • (A) Develop additional email marketing content, ensuring emails are delivered during the off-peak eBook download time.
  • (B) Post content across all social media channels during off peak eBook download time, and send email marketing content during peak eBook download time.
  • (C) Reduce his efforts on the email marketing campaign and expand on social media promotion, specifically on Facebook and LinkedIn.
  • (D) Schedule engaging Facebook posts to be published between 5.00 p.m. and 7.00 p.m.

 

Module 23 Lesson 4 Managing Numbers Using Spreadsheets

 

Cassie Has Been Using Spreadsheets To Keep Track Of How Her Email Campaigns Have Been Performing. She Has Created Three Different Graphs Using All Of The Data At Her Disposal. Which Graph Best Shows That The Open Rate Of Her Emails Has Decreased Over Time?

  • (A) Image 1
  • (B) Image 2
  • (C) Image 3

 

Module 23 Lesson 5 Presenting Data Effectively

 

Anya Is Working On A Presentation For Potential Investors. They Would Like To See How The Demand For Public Parking Has Grown In The Past Three Years. Anya Has Created The Following Four Graphics To Illustrate The Growth Demand. Which Graphic Would Be The Clearest And Make The Most Impact On The Investors?

  • (A) Image of a table of figures
  • (B) Image of bar graph
  • (C) Image of pie chart
  • (D) Image of a heat map

 

Module 24 Lesson 1 Using E-Commerce To Sell

 

Jo Owns A Furniture Shop, And She’s Just Started Using The Internet To Boost Sales. She Has Some Ideas On What To Do To Sell Products On Her Website. Help Jo Decide On One Idea And Cross Off The Rest.

  • (A) Publish her inventory on a third party site
  • (B) A forum to get feedback on her services
  • (C) Use a money transfer provider to take customer payments online

 

Module 24 Lesson 2 Taking Payments And Manage Orders

 

Jo Wants To Create A Fully Functional Online Store. Can You Check Which Of The Following Features Are Available In Most Fully Functional Online Stores?

(1) Order management via a backend system

  • (A) Yes
  • (B) No

(2) Customer reviews pane

  • (A) Yes
  • (B) No

(3) Products browser

  • (A) Yes
  • (B) No

(4) Over-the-phone payments via a web-based calling system

  • (A) Yes
  • (B) No

 

Module 25 Lesson 1 Creating A Smooth E-Commerce Experience

 

Jo Wants To Use Analytics Data And Visitor Surveys To Make Some Improvements To Her E-Commerce Website, But She Only Has Limited Time And Budget. What Actions Could Jo Take For Each Of These Findings?

(1) Customers access the shop a lot on mobile

  • (A) Add customer reviews
  • (B) Create registration for customer accounts
  • (C) Introduce responsive design
  • (D) Add a search feature

(2) Customers want to find a specific product

  • (A) Add customer reviews
  • (B) Create registration for customer accounts
  • (C) Introduce responsive design
  • (D) Add a search feature

(3) There are lots of website visits but no one is buying the products

  • (A) Add customer reviews
  • (B) Create registration for customer accounts
  • (C) Introduce responsive design
  • (D) Add a search feature

(4) Repeat customers add products to their cart but are not checking out

  • (A) Add customer reviews
  • (B) Create registration for customer accounts
  • (C) Introduce responsive design
  • (D) Add a search feature

 

Module 25 Lesson 2 Product Promoting And Merchandising

 

Office Sets Are Steady Sellers For Jo. How Can She Suggest Office Furniture Items To Customers Who Might Not Have Considered Them Yet?

  • (A) Create a ‘Suggested products’ banner
  • (B) Use analytics to understand who is visiting the site
  • (C) Add a video tour of the shop

 

Module 25 Lesson 3 Retargeting For E-Commerce

 

Jo Has Noticed That Some Of Her Customers Leave Her Site Without Making A Purchase. She’s Set Up Some Product Retargeting Ads, And Wants To Measure The Performance Of Her Campaign. What Parameters Should She Look At To See If She’s Attracting Potential Customers?

  • (A) Conversion rates
  • (B) Number of people clicking on each ad type
  • (C) Comments on her social media profile
  • (D) How many pages visitors check before they leave the site

 

Module 26 Lesson 1 Introduction To International Marketing And Export

 

Matt Runs An Online Vintage Record Store In The UK. He Wants To Expand Into New Markets, But Doesn’t Know Where To Begin. What Tools Can Help Him Choose His New Market?

  • (A) Market insight tools
  • (B) Search trends by location
  • (C) Translation services

 

Module 26 Lesson 2 Validating Your New Market

 

Matt Has Found Out There’s A Growing Market For Vintage Records In Portugal. He Now Needs To Identify Insights On His New Audience Using A Variety Of Tools. Can You Help Him Match The Correct Tool With Its Corresponding Insight?

(1) High search traffic on vintage record terms from Portugal

  • (A) Google Keyword Planner
  • (B) Google Analytics
  • (C) Google Market Finder

(2) Low competition on search ads in Portugal

  • (A) Google Keyword Planner
  • (B) Google Analytics
  • (C) Google Market Finder

(3) People in Portugal are looking at his website

  • (A) Google Keyword Planner
  • (B) Google Analytics
  • (C) Google Market Finder

 

Module 26 Lesson 3 Being Understood Abroad

 

Matt Needs To Make Sure His Website Is Suitable For His Portuguese Customers. He’s Made A List Of Translation And Localisation Tasks. Which Items On His List Relate To Localisation?

  • (A) Adjusting colloquialisms so they make sense in Portuguese
  • (B) Adding his UK office’s address to the main site
  • (C) Calculating prices of the products in local currency.
  • (D) Adjusting humourous product descriptions so they make sense in Portuguese

 

Module 26 Lesson 4 Advertise Across Borders

 

Matt’s Chosen His Market, Now It’s Time To Find New Customers. He Has A Few Ideas, But Not All Of Them Will Reach His Portuguese Audience. Can You Help Him Choose His Best Advertising Ideas?

  • (A) Advertise on Portuguese music websites
  • (B) Send English emails to current UK customers
  • (C) Use search ads driven by translated search terms
  • (D) Set up a Portuguese fanpage for his store

 

Module 26 Lesson 5 The Support Systems You Will Need

 

Portugal Seems Like A Good Market For Matt To Move Into. He’s Looked Into The Legal Requirements Of Trading Records In Portugal And Is Pleased To Find There Aren’t Any. But What Other Financial Or Regulatory Requirements Should He Check?

  • (A) Custom duties and tariffs
  • (B) Portuguese taxes
  • (C) Exchange rates
  • (D) National holidays
  • (E) Product safety requirements
  • (F) Insurance cover

 

Module 26 Lesson 6 Helping Customers Abroad Buy Your Products

 

Matt’s Found Out That Portugal Has Fast Internet Speeds, Which Is Great For Accessing His Website. What Things Will Matt Definitely Need To Do Now He Has Customers In A New Market?

  • (A) Use an international payment system
  • (B) Research the Portuguese music scene
  • (C) Visit Portugal frequently
  • (D) Use an automated translation service
  • (E) Learn to speak Portuguese
  • (F) Check his site from an international point of view

 

Module 26 Lesson 7 Delivering To Customers Across The Globe

 

Matt’s Getting Ready To Sell His Vintage Records To Portuguese Customers Online. But There’s One Unhelpful Task On His To-Do List. Can You Cross It Out For Him?

  • (A) Research label requirments for international shipping
  • (B) Set up a few Portuguese social media accounts
  • (C) Choose an international shipping partner
  • (D) Set up customer service for international orders

 

Modules – 26 Topics :

 

Module 1

 

The increased use of the internet presents a lot of potential for which types of businesses?

  • All businesses
  • Small business owners
  • International businesses
  • Local businesses

 

Taking a business online can involve many different steps. When starting out, which activity could be a part of this process?

  • Sending flyers with your web address to customers
  • Creating a business listing in online local directories
  • Increasing print and billboard advertising
  • Building a team of digital advertising experts

 

Which of the following is the easiest way for visitors to learn about a business while visiting a website?

  • Getting a free ‘taster’ of one of your products when they sign up to receive emails
  • Listening to an audio file that auto plays whenever someone visits your site
  • Browsing your product pages and reviewing the Frequently Asked Questions page
  • Reading the terms and conditions for your products on your site

 

What is a key benefit of having an online presence for a business?

  • The ability to sell products directly to customers through social media
  • Being visible when people search for a business like yours
  • Sending users emails to update them on new products
  • Being able to offer new customers promotional discounts

 

 

Module 2

 

Which tool helps you measure the success of your website?

  • Keyword Planner
  • Ad Gallery
  • Ad Preview Tool
  • Analytics

 

Which of the following statements is true when it comes to taking a business online?

  • Stick to what you are doing and don’t make changes
  • The same content works across online and offline platforms
  • Use analytics to make informed decisions
  • Use analytics to track your customers across the Internet

 

Which term best describes the business activity that occurs when website visitors buy products or services from you online?

  • E-commerce
  • Display advertising
  • Search engine marketing
  • Pay per click

 

Which of the following statements is true when marketing your business online?

  • You need a website to show up in search results
  • You’ll reach a similar client base to the one you have in the real world
  • You’ll be seen by the same volume of customers whether you use search advertising or not
  • Social media is a great way to engage your audience

 

 

Module 3

 

Which of the following statements is true when it comes to developing a web presence for a business?

  • Customers can learn about a business by downloading a mobile app, but they can’t place an order using an app
  • Building a new website requires a large budget
  • Mobile apps enable your customers to purchase your products without being on your website
  • All businesses must have a website to sell products

 

What is a web server?

  • The customer service representative you can call when you have questions about your website
  • The answer you get when you search a term on the web
  • A computer connected to the Internet with software that allows it to host all the components of your website
  • The device that determines the speed of your mobile connection

 

Fill in the blank: A __________ is a shortcut to other pages on your site or elsewhere on the web.

  • Hyperlink
  • Return link
  • Menu bar
  • Breadcrumb

 

Which of the following is something you’ll probably want to exclude from your website?

  • Prices
  • A lot of deep scientific information and detailed statistics
  • Special offers
  • Certifications to show you’re qualified to provide a service

 

Which of the following is an example of a ‘call to action’ on a website?

  • A list of phone numbers customers can use to get in contact with you
  • A ‘Get directions to our store’ button which when clicked, redirects to a map displaying directions to the store based on the customer’s current address
  • An icon button that takes the customer to your social media accounts
  • A hotline phone number that helps users complete their purchases

 

What should you consider when developing your website content?

  • What your customers are looking for
  • Your latest promotions and discounts
  • Your brand values
  • Whether the content will go viral or not

 

 

Module 4

 

What is the first step in creating an online business strategy?

Identifying business goals

Understanding what the competition is doing

Knowing the market

Aligning goals to the strategy

 

What is the purpose of the ‘See, Think, Do, Care’ framework?

To help determine a marketing strategy

To help a business understand the customer journey online

To help a business reach a global audience

To give insight into specific customer groups

 

Why is optimising customer touchpoints online beneficial for businesses?

It allows brands to add pop-up ads at every point of the customer journey, ensuring high visibility

It gives businesses the opportunity to save money on online advertising

It provides customers with value every time they come into contact with a brand, helping build trust

It gives businesses an opportunity to collect more data from potential customers

 

Once you’ve worked out your Unique Selling Point (USP), how would you use it in a long-term online strategy?

Incorporate it within marketing materials across all channels to help raise customer awareness

Create an email campaign letting your customers know why you are unique

Film a video explaining your unique selling point and send it to employees

Create a press release and distribute it through your channels

 

What type of information can KPIs provide?

Audience segmentation

Long-term projections

Financial viability

Board decisions

 

Why are search engines a great place for a business to be found?

People pay to use search engines, so there is a wealthy customer base there

People who search are actively looking for information, products or services

Search engines are a big trend these days

Search engines guarantee new customers

 

What technology do search engines use to ‘crawl’ websites?

Androids

Interns

Automatons

Bots

 

Which of the following can help a search engine understand what your page is about?

The date it was published

The number of images used

The total number of words

The title tag

 

Fill in the blank: Spending money on search advertising influences how your website appears in ___________.

Organic search results

The search results page

Business directories

Display advertising networks

 

Which of these is an important factor in the paid search auction system?

How famous your brand name is

How cool your logo is

How long your business has been around

How relevant your ads are

 

Which of these can Google Search Console help you to do?

It helps you increase your social media following

It helps you optimise your Google My Business listing

It helps you understand which keywords people are searching for on Google

It helps you run A/B tests on your home page

 

Which of the following factors should you consider when optimising your website for search engines?

Colour scheme

Recycled content

Inspiring business name

Site popularity

 

What should be the first step of a structured SEO plan?

Identifying your ad budget

Buying an analytics software

Setting up your presence on social media sites

Keyword research

 

When it comes to search ads, which of the following could dictate how an ad will perform against a competitor?

Social media following

Bid value

Domain authority

Average number of visitors to the company’s website

 

Fill in the blank: Short strings of specific keywords with low search volume are called ___________.

Long-hair keywords

Long-tail keywords

High-relevance keywords

Top-tail keywords

 

Which of the following would be an ideal goal for an SEO plan?

Increasing social media likes and follows

Increasing how many relevant people visit your website

Showing your website to as many people as possible

Being in first place in SERP for any keyword

 

Which of the following page titles would be most suitable for a website page describing a store’s return policy?

How to Send Stuff Back

[Company Name’s] Return Policy

Return Policy

Company Policies

 

Which of the following is a good way to get other websites to link to your site?

Keep linking to them until they link to you

Send them emails until they link to you

Building relationships with similar sites

 

When expanding a business internationally, which of the following is most important to provide on your website?

Products and delivery details in the correct currency

Time and dates written in the local format

Exchange rate information

Free giveaways for local customers

 

Search engine marketing can also be called what?

Pay-per-click advertising

Organic advertising

Search box marketing

One-click advertising

 

In an SEM auction, your Quality Score is based on which aspect of your ad?

Bid

Relevance

Wit

Length

 

Fill in the blank: It’s possible to determine how well a/an ___________ will perform without bidding on it.

Auction

Website

Keyword

Advert

 

What should your search ad have in order to promote more clicks?

A call to action

A catchy headline

A close-up photo

A social media link

 

Which of the following is a benefit of using relevant ads and landing pages?

Increased cost for ad placements

Higher ad positions on the search results page

Higher cost per clicks on your ads

Ads that will ensure more purchases

 

When it comes to search ads, which description best describes ‘negative keywords’?

Keywords with no association to your site

Keywords with a poor search volume

Keywords that are excluded from a campaign

Keywords that are typed incorrectly

 

Fill in the blank: If you use __________ keywords when building your search ads, minor variations, like plurals, can still trigger the ad.

Exact Match

Random Match

Direct match

Close match

 

What can conversion tracking in search help you measure?

How many transactions are completed on your site overall

How many people click on your SEM ad and end up browsing your site

How many people visiting your site from a search ad end up completing a purchase

How many customers your ad has converted into brand ambassadors

 

How can you improve a business’s visibility to people located near you geographically?

Translate your website into at least two more languages

Offer free phone support during business hours

Ensure you have good analytics on your website

Make sure your phone number, address and business hours are easy to find

 

Which of the following is an example of a local search?

«bike shop near me»

«bike shop in UK»

«local bicycle shop»

«bike shops»

 

Which of the following is a benefit of registering your business in online local listings?

Discounted pricing on your search advertising campaigns

Increased likelihood of being discovered through search engines

More mentions on social media platforms

Guaranteed sales to local customers

 

Which three pieces of information are essential to include first in your local directory listing?

Business address, website, telephone numbers

Business name, business address, telephone numbers

Website, telephone numbers, email address

Business name, email address, website

 

Which of the following factors help search engines determine if your business is local?

Location details on the website, quality content and how mobile friendly the website is

Location details on the website, list of shops local to you and a contact form

Quality content, list of local suppliers and location details

Location GPS tags on photos, quality content and how mobile friendly the website is

 

When looking to attract a local audience, why it is important to optimise your website and content for mobile users?

Because local users tend to use their mobile devices when they’re out of the house

Because mobiles will replace desktop computers

Because all online users browse on mobile devices these days

Because marketing for mobile is more cost effective

 

Which of the following can help you gain visibility in search engines?

Adding relevant content that highlights the location of your business

Including your address on your Twitter account

Optimising your site for desktop devices only

Adding a list of shops local to you on your website

 

Which of the following can businesses achieve by using social media?

Attract new audiences

Build a good reputation with customers

Meet sales goals

Increase traffic to their website

 

Fill in the blank: Businesses should focus on social media platforms with _______.

The biggest reputation

The most expected engagement

A relevant audience

The most users

 

Which of the following is an example of a social media goal?

Acquire genuine reviews on products

Drive more traffic to your store

Develop one-way communication with customers

Mimic your competition’s approach

 

Which details should you look to include on a business profile page on social media?

Details about the CEO

Link to a local listing site you’re on

Description of the business

Cost of products and services

 

A robust social media plan includes which of the following?

A list of content that mimics competitor content

All of your online business goals

A long-term schedule identifying when to post content

A list of friends who can post on the accounts

 

What is the best way to put your social content in front of people who don’t already follow you?

Increase your email marketing campaigns

Ask people to share your content to their networks

Use paid promotion to reach new audiences

Put links to your social on your website

 

What can social media analytics tools help you measure when assessing campaign results?

Whether the campaign was more successful than your competitors

Whether the visitors liked the social campaigns or not

Whether a visitor called the store after seeing a social post

Whether the visitor clicked on a paid ad or organic listing

 

Which of the following is a pitfall when using social media for business?

2-way conversation with customers

Not being present on every social media platform

Not having the resources to respond to comments and questions in a timely manner

Spending too much time reviewing social media analytics

 

When looking to ensure your website is easily accessible by mobile users, what should you focus on doing first?

Redesign your website colour scheme

Optimise your site

Create a mobile app

Shorten your website content

 

What does responsive design mean?

Your visitors can manually adjust the size of your website

Your website will adapt to suit whichever device it is being viewed on

Your customers can provide feedback on the design of your site

Your website will respond to clicks faster

 

When it comes to optimising your website’s SEO for mobile users, which of the following is a crucial factor to keep in mind?

Short content and fewer images

Performance and usability

Usability and short content

Less video content

 

What can a business use to send messages to users who have already downloaded their app?

Text messages

Pull notifications

Push notifications

Email notifications

 

When considering how mobile users will search for your business, which types of keywords should you focus on?

Long tail keywords

Shorter keywords and phrases

Longer keywords and phrases

Exact match keywords

 

Before running search ads, you should make sure your site is mobile-friendly. Which scenario best describes a mobile-friendly experience for a customer?

The business has a mobile app instead of a website

The site include business phone numbers

The site works on different mobile devices

The site does not include any videos so it loads quickly

 

Which of the following can be used to target an audience when using some social media ads?

People’s names

People’s address

People’s pet names

People’s relationship status

 

When making video content for your display ads, what is most important to ensure?

Videos are entertaining, long and include a CTA

Videos are relevant, short and include a CTA

Videos are relevant, long and include a URL

Videos are short, informative and include a phone number

 

Which of the following is an accurate definition of what a content marketing campaign involves?

Creating and posting content ad-hoc when you have the time

The creation of time-sensitive content that can be published through various channels

Regularly emailing customers with news about a business’s products or services

The creation and promotion of online materials with the goal of increasing interest in a product or service

 

What does the following definition describe? ‘The division of an audience into groups of who they are and what they like, with a goal of identifying a group most interested in your product/service.’

Marketing channels

Demographics

Audience segmentation

Group dynamics

 

Fill in the blank: When describing the purpose of content, what is missing? ‘To entertain, to inspire, to _______ and to convince’.

Humour

Please

Surprise

Educate

 

Which of the following best describes why approaches to writing need to be adapted for online content?

Online readers have a reduced attention span, due to being flooded with information

Certain blogging platforms have a limit on the word count you can publish

Online readers only like to engage with long-form pieces of content

Online audiences are typically younger, so the language used needs to reflect this

 

What are ‘highlighting key dates’ and ‘considering multiple channels’ best practices of?

Creating a content calendar

Designing illustrations to support content

Segmenting your audience

Identifying social media influencers

 

Which of the following metrics could help you understand which blog post is resonating the most with your audience?

Session duration

Page views

Referral traffic

Unique page views

 

Which of the following will you need to start an email marketing programme?

A collection of email templates

A ‘Contact Us’ form

A way to collect people’s email addresses

A set budget

 

Which of the following is a common feature of email marketing platforms?

Personalised, custom templates

A free list of email addresses you can target

A feature allowing users to unsubscribe from your emails

Automation of your search ad campaigns

 

Which of these is a good practice to keep in mind when sending emails to your contacts?

Run an A/B test on your subject line to determine which one works best

Send the same generic and simple message to your entire contact database

Include enough content in the email so there is no need for them to click away to read further elsewhere

Only include a call-to-action on the landing page you’re linking to in the email

 

If the open rate of your emails seems low, which of the following could help you fix that?

Redesign your website

Change the colour of the buttons inside your email

Send your emails to more contacts

Adjust the subject line of your email

 

Which of the following statements is true when it comes to running email campaigns for a business?

There’s no need to use sponsored ads within your email marketing

There’s no need for analytics when it comes to email marketing

You need to include personal contact details

You can use any imagery, despite copyright

 

If you own a film blog, which type of customer can you expect to reach with display advertising?

People who use ad-blockers and are interested in your subject

People who haven’t read your blog before but are interested in your subject

Only people who have read your blog previously

Only people interested in films and movies

 

Fill in the blank: The ads on search engines are usually made up of ________.

Audio

Video

Text

Images

 

When using search engine marketing, where can your ads appear?

Only on search engines

Only on websites

On search engines and websites

On websites and social media

 

When setting up display advertising campaigns, who can you target?

People with specific names

People who speak different languages

People who already own specific products

People with a specific address

 

In what way can display advertising be effective?

It guarantees more visitors to your site

It guarantees increased sales

It drives traffic to your website

It improves your ranking in search engines

 

Which of the following is an example of the type of data that advertising networks automatically collect and share with businesses?

The number of sales you make from the ad

The cost of each ad you publish

The cost of creating the ad

A prediction of sales you can make from your ad

 

Which of the following is true when purchasing ad placements on an advertising network?

You always need to contact the owner of the website to buy ads on their page

The network provides data on the click-through-rate

The network provides names of the people who click your ad

The network will continue to show your ad for 7 days once your budget has expired

 

If a person adds a product to a shopping cart but then leaves the website – which of the following tactics is most likely to encourage that person to return and purchase the product?

Retargeting with a display ad encouraging newsletter sign-up

Redesigning your website

Creating a Facebook page for your business

Retargeting with a display ad that has a discount coupon

 

What is the first step of display retargeting?

Sourcing keywords

Defining your audience

Writing content

Setting a call to action

 

When incorporating videos into a digital strategy, which of the following tactics provides value to customers?

Setting up live streams of the business’s physical shop on their website

Publishing a how-to video on their website

Producing sale campaign videos

Sharing personal vlogs

 

What can using video as part of your online presence help you create?

Content that will go viral

A channel to engage with customers

A variety of different brand perceptions

An online following and fanbase

 

Fill in the blank: As a small business, creating videos to showcase your business or product requires only ______.

An agency, professional crew and equipment

Creativity, lots of experience and a large budget

Creativity, planning and any budget

Creativity, planning and high-quality equipment

 

Using videos in email marketing and social media is an effective way to do what?

Increase word of mouth referrals

Engage and grow your audience

Guarantee sales of your product or service

Lower the cost of developing content

 

How can you take advantage of video for your product/services without actually making a video?

This isn’t possible

Advertise on other people’s videos

Use images with a call to action instead

Share other people’s videos

 

When looking at your video analytics, you discover people are only watching the first few seconds of your video. What should you do?

Consider removing the video from the platform

Consider re-shooting your video based on comments

Consider updating your preview images, video titles or descriptions

Consider asking people to watch the whole video in the description

 

Fill in the blank: Website analytics can tell you _____________.

What time of day your website gets the most traffic

How many mentions or likes you get on social media

How well your competitor’s ad campaigns are doing

The email addresses of visitors to your landing pages

 

Analytics can give you immediate valuable information about which type of customers?

Previous and current customers

Current and future customers

Previous and future customers

Offline and online customers

 

If your key business goal is to get people to book rooms at your guesthouse, what data are you most likely to be interested in?

How long people spend on your ‘How To Find Us’ page

Which day of the week is most popular for bookings

Whether your funny Tweet goes viral

How many people visiting your site book a room with you

 

Most web analytics tools can tell you what information about the user?

Their contact details, their behaviour and their operating system

Their location, type of device they’re using and pages visited

Their location, type of device they’re using and contact details

Their interests, when they delete their browser cookies and their location

 

Fill in the blank: If an ad is not performing well, one effective tactic is to _____________.

Try a different search engine

Tweak the ad’s copy and analyse the results

Hire a professional ad agency

Delete the ad and try again

 

Which section of Google Analytics can tell you whether visitors have found your website via social media?

Site search

Acquisition

Behaviour

Search Console

 

Which type of data relates to a metric that can be represented with a number?

Quantitative

Qualitative

Holistic

Customer

 

What makes the data cycle useful?

It helps you make the most of the data collected from marketing activities

It helps you evaluate your competition

It provides information about what users like about your website

It presents collected data in a visually appealing way

 

Fill in the blank: Actionable insights can be described as explaining the ______ of an online marketing campaign.

‘Why’

‘How’

‘When’

‘Who’

 

Which of the following is a benefit of using spreadsheets?

Vast quantities of data can be stored, sorted and analysed quickly

Data can only be accessed when all users are online

Valuable customer and market insights can be delivered quickly

Spreadsheets are the only way to collect data and extrapolate results

 

If you needed to showcase which parts of a website are being clicked on the most, which presentation type should you consider?

Bar chart

Pie chart

Table

Heat map

 

What would be beneficial to include on a product description page?

Previous versions of the product

Links to other suppliers

Reviews of the product

Price comparisons

 

Which of the following is an advantage of e-commerce?

More relaxed checkout procedure

Low operational costs

Minimal interaction required with the customer

Segmentation of audiences

 

To an owner or administrator, what is a functional benefit of having an online store?

It collects the addresses of your online store visitors

It provides a backend system with order management

It provides a quicker checkout process than a physical store

It allows you to feature more sales and discounts than a physical store

 

What is the name of the process that describes what happens when a customer is taken to a separate site to complete a transaction before being sent back to the original site again?

Second-party payment processing

Third-party payment processing

External payment processing

Internal payment processing

 

Which of the following is a sign that customers are having trouble using a particular device to make purchases?

Analytics shows you have a lot of mobile visitors, but very few purchases through mobile

A specific product is not selling much compared to your other products

You get a lot of questions about your return policy

People are having trouble using a promo code for a current sale

 

What is an example of product merchandising?

Running an ad for your products

Adding a way for customers to filter your products

Displaying very specific, featured products on your home page

Cross-selling products in the checkout process

 

Which of the following statements is true when describing how retargeting ads work?

Retargeting ads are visible to people who haven’t been on your website yet

Once a user visits your site, the code drops an anonymous browser cookie

Once your customer purchases, you can not turn off the retargeting ad

Retargeting will always drive customers to your site

 

What is the best way to translate the content on your website for a new market?

Google translate

Native speakers

Translation software

Language guide

 

Before starting to promote products to other countries online, what could you use to gauge demand for your product in that specific market?

Translation software

Keyword planning tools

Interviews with people from that country

A range of search ads in different countries

 

When adapting your website for customers who speak a different language, what should you do?

Have a ‘translate’ button that pulls a translation from an external provider

Translate your content with consideration to particular words and phrases

Translate your content directly, word for word

Localise the name of the business owners

 

Which of the following is primarily meant to target new customers online?

Email marketing

Print advertising

Retargeting advertising

Search advertising

 

What should a business do first, when considering going into a new market?

Hire an agency to translate its website into the local language

Open a new office in the capital city

Determine its ability to deliver products and review all tax and legal information

Invest in major ad campaigns to raise brand awareness

 

When selling to people in different countries, what payment form should you consider using if you aren’t already?

Debit cards

Credit cards

Paypal or Worldpay

Bank transfers

 

Which of the following options is important to research when planning to expand delivery of products and services to customers across the globe?

What times of the day international shoppers are online

The legal and tax considerations in that market

Which social channels are popular in that market

Which couriers offer the cheapest services for global shipping

 

 

Final exam :

Total number of questions 40
Required to pass : 32 questions (80%)

 

Take a business online

 

What’s the biggest challenge for most businesses when going online?

A Planning a budget
B Developing a plan
C Optimising a website
D Defining a customer base

 

Web analytics can tell you many things about your online performance, but what can analytics tools not tell you?

A What your customers are doing on your website
B Where your customers have come from before visiting your website
C Where your customers go after leaving your website
D What your customers are looking for on your website

 

Website hosting servers have their own unique IP address, what does this address consist of?

A Numbers and letters
B Numbers
C Letters
D Letters and symbols

 

Where does the domain name of a website primarily sit?

A In the URL
B In the coding of your header image
C In your navigation menu
D In your logo’s hyperlink

 

When looking to advertise a new business online, what is one of the major benefits of display ads?

A They are seen by everyone
B They have higher click-through rate
C They can come in many different formats
D They don’t cost too much to set up

 

Imagine a customer has downloaded an app made by their local hardware store. How could that business connect with their audience through the app?

A Call the customer when there is an offer they’d enjoy
B See where their customers are and monitor their shopping behaviours
C Send them offers when they enter a certain geographical area
D Add items to their in-app basket that you think they’d like

 

How can businesses benefit from using analytics on their website?

A It will show you where your audience comes from
B It will list which pages your audience does not like
C It will show where your customers go after they’ve left your site
D It will show you why your audience visit your site

 

Websites are hosted on a server and each of these servers has its own unique IP address. What does the ‘IP’ stand for?

A Internet Position
B Internet Placement
C Internet Privatisation
D Internet Protocol

 

When considering whether to have a web presence for your business, which of the following is not a major factor?

A Technology
B Cost
C Scope
D How long you’ve been in business

 

When planning your website, what is one of the key things you should consider?

A The order your products will appear on the site
B What you want your customers to do on the site
C How customers will interact with the site
D What your customers want to see on the site

 

When you’re building a business website, what purpose does a server have?

A It manages your website
B It hosts your website
C It promotes your website
D It secures your website

 

When defining a strategy for your business, how can competitor analysis help you establish a USP (or Unique Selling Point)?

A It can enable you to offer discounts that compete directly with your competitors’ pricing
B It can identify how your offering is different in comparison to your competitors
C It can give you deeper insight into the market and their approach
D It can reveal which additional regions you could be operating in so that you can grow your business

 

You notice that when people see images of your products online, you have an increase in conversions or sales. Which customer touchpoint could you use to take advantage of this insight?

· A Shopping bags
· B Blog content
· C YouTube
· D Social media

 

Which are the first steps you should consider when constructing an online business strategy?

A Understand the target audience
B Change your mission statement to match the goals
C Create goals and identify a USP
D Define and segment your audiences

 

When designing content as part of your content marketing strategy, what does the «Think» stage represent in the «See, Think, Do, Care» framework?

A The consideration phase, when customers start to research potential products to buy
B The finance stage, when customers think about their budgets
C The action stage, the moment when customers commit and purchase your product
D The sharing stage, when customers share images and feedback on your products

 

Make it easy for people to find a business on the web

 

Search engines see the content on a website as written code, how can you help search engines identify the images on your website?

A Place them well within your text
B Make them eye-catching
C Put branding on them
D Give them descriptive names

 

When running a search engine marketing campaign, what goal do you expect to achieve by having conversion tracking on your site?

A To see personal data about the person who bought from you
B To understand what is working and what is not
C To increase your budget to get more traffic
D To advertise internationally more easily

 

What is the most important thing to consider when optimising a search engine marketing campaign?

A Increasing the bid for the keywords you are targeting
B Increasing the relevance of the keywords, ads, and landing page
C Adding lots of keywords to the campaign to get more traffic
D Continually changing the ad copy

 

Which of the following is a benefit of Search Engine Marketing (SEM)?

A Reach out to potential customers actively looking for your product or service
B Create different types of ad formats to show to potential customers
C Target people based on their interests and habits
D SEM is a lot cheaper than any other advertising medium

 

When looking to increase the presence of a website, putting together your search engine optimisation plan will help you plan your steps. Which activity would be first on the list?

A Choosing what images to put on your website
B Reserving all the social profiles that you will be using for the business
C Finding people who will link back to your website
D Keyword Research

 

When looking to optimise the performance of a website to improve its search engine ranking, using ‘long tail keyword terms’ in your SEO plan often allows you to…

· A Outrank lots of larger, more established companies
· B Find more opportunities
· C See more traffic than short tail keywords
· D Perform better on social media

 

Google Search Console “Crawl” reports let you monitor…?

· A If potential customers can access your web pages
· B If Google can view your web pages
· C How people interacts with your website

· D What information Google records about your site

 

Gaining backlinks to your website is a great way to improve the SEO performance. What best practice will encourage people to link back to your site?

A Pay people to link back to your site
B Write some great content they will find useful
C Ensure your staff link back to your site
D Link to them first, regardless of whether they have anything interesting on their site

 

When ranking websites on search engine results pages, which element of a website do search engines value the most?

A How long the content on the page is
B If you mention keywords over 50 times in a short piece of content
C Unique, engaging, relevant content
D Where you are in the world when adding content to your site

 

When using a search engine, what is the name of a word or phrase somebody types to find something online?

A Search phrase
B Search term
C Search query
D Search word

 

Fill the blank: ‘Search engines _________ the internet to discover content.’

A index
B crawl
C investigate
D rank

 

What is the term we use to describe how search engines categorise each piece of content?

A Listing
B Crawling
C Indexing
D Ranking

 

To improve your website’s SEO performance, when should you consider updating your SEO plan?

A When you write a new blog post
B When you have a sale or promotion
C When you add a new service or product
D When you employ new staff

 

What’s the first step in the search engine optimisation process for your website?

A Off-site optimisation
B Keyword research
C Writing fresh content
D Setting an ad budget

 

We use them every day, but what is the overall purpose of a search engine?

A To position websites based on how popular they are
B To display websites in a random order to increase site traffic
C To ensure every business gets an equal number of site visits
D To help the user find the most relevant answer to their query

 

What are three key considerations when evaluating keywords for search engine optimisation?

A Competition, cohesiveness, relevance
B Frequency, competition, relevance
C Relevance, cohesiveness, execution
D Frequency, execution, relevance

 

When optimising a website for search, what impact do meta and title tags have on the search engine?

A They are hidden messages that have no bearing on search engines
B They are the on-page content that appears on your homepage, telling search engines what you do
C They are automatically generated and help websites rank within search engines
D They are embedded messages that help the search engine determine what’s on the page

 

There are many ways you can improve the performance of a website from an SEO perspective. When it comes to link building which of the following statements is accurate?

A The quantity of links is important, not the quality
B The quality of links is important, not the quantity
C Links hidden within code on sites improves your SEO performance
D Links hidden within images on sites improves your SEO performance

 

Which of the following will be achieved by including an offer in a Search Engine Marketing (SEM) ad?

A It will help the ad stand out and encourage people to click it
B It will guarantee the ad appears at the top of the search results
C It will increase the amount of users across your entire website
D It can increase the quality score of your ad

 

Fill the blank: When managing SEM campaigns, the best way to optimise your quality score is to improve the _________ of your keywords, adverts, and landing pages.

A relevance
B conversion
C clicks
D importance

 

What can you achieve if you divide your search engine marketing account into relevant campaigns and ad groups?

A Drive more traffic to your website
B Target more people in different areas of the world
C Ensure people see relevant ads that relate to their search query
D Stop using negative keywords

 

Fill the blank: When optimising SEM campaigns, negative keywords _________ your ads from appearing when people search for things that aren’t relevant to your business.

A prevent
B secure
C increase the chance of
D decrease the chance of

 

When advertising on search engines, if you bid the same as your competitor, having a higher quality score will mean you appear where in comparison?

A Alongside them
B Below them
C On the next page after them
D Above them

 

When fine-tuning paid search ads, you change a broad-match keyword to a phrase-match keyword using which symbol?

A Quotation marks
B Apostrophes
C Italics
D Square brackets

 

If you want to track a completed order in your website, what would be a proper place to add the conversion tracking code?

A Website’s homepage
B Order confirmation page
C Order form page
D Contact us page

 

A lot of factors can affect how well a website will rank on search engines. What role does metadata have in this process?

· A Helps your website stand out from the competition
· B Allows you to input lots of keywords so that you appear for all of them
· C Provides search engines with more consistent and clear information about what’s on the website
· D Allows you to place sales promotion offers within the search results

 

When advertising using Search Engine Marketing (SEM), you only pay…

· A when your ad appears within the search results
· B when a conversion happens on your website
· C when your ad is clicked by someone
· D when someone stays on your website for more than 2 minutes

 

Which search query would trigger an ad based on this keyword: [London portrait photographer]?

· A Portrait photographer London
· B London photographer
· C London portrait photographer
· D Photographers in London

 

Reach more people locally, on social media, or on mobile

 

When trying to promote your business locally, what three key bits of information should be present in your directory listing?

A Business name, address, phone number
B Personal name, business name, postcode
C Name, PO box, freephone number
D Business name, CEO, company registration number

 

Mobile advertising is a great tool for marketers, but all that good work could be undone if your website isn’t what?

A Optimised for different devices
B Visually engaging
C Full of relevant information
D Text heavy

 

Digital marketing isn’t just about selling your products internationally. It can be used to great effect for local businesses. What do we mean by ‘local businesses’?

A A business that operates from a specific geographic location
B A business that is within a 5km radius from the customer
C A business that has existed within a community for more than 5 years
D A business that only provides a service based product

 

With more and more users using mobile to look at websites, it is key that you optimise your site so users can find it when searching online. Which two elements should you look to optimise for improved SEO performance?

A Site speed and usability
B Keywords and metadata
C Image size and navigation
D Site speed and visual appearance

 

When looking to create video content for your marketing strategy, what three best practices should you look to include?

A Short, technical, include a call to action
B Relevant, short, entertaining
C Short, entertaining, include a call to action
D Short, relevant, include a call to action

 

How would you classify the content distribution channel that uses influencer and outreach marketing to increase a brand’s reach?

A Paid
B Owned
C Earned
D Published

 

What type of tool can be used to monitor and evaluate your social media audience’s actions on your website?

A Content scheduling tools
B Audience profiling tools
C Social media analytic tools
D Website analytic tools

 

There are lots of social media platforms out there, but what is a benefit of using smaller, more niche social media platforms for your business?

A People on niche platforms are more likely to engage with you
B Your content will be put in front of specific audiences
C Your content will be seen by a mix of different people, gaining more views and likes
D It enhances your brand to be seen on more specific social media platforms

 

Fill the blank: When it comes to promoting a business locally, search engines can _______________ your business in the search results page if the user is near your location.

A prioritise
B highlight
C hide
D promote

 

Using social media for business purposes can be very different to running personal profiles. If you’re looking to attract people to your social network, what tone of voice should you consider?

A Stern & Serious
B Serious & Honest
C Fun & Inviting
D Engaging & Inviting

 

Fill in the blank: When search engines use factors like geolocation, IP address and location based search terms to produce geographically tailored results, this is called _____________.

A Local Search
B Geo search
C Mobile search
D Organic search

 

Local directories are a great tool for getting noticed locally online. What would be the first step in using a directory?

· A Research competitors
· B Create a listing
· C Create an ad
· D Post a link

 

What are the benefits of using social media when looking to advertise your business locally?

· A People trust local businesses on social media
· B You can target ads to a specific local audience
· C You can make video ads promoting the area
· D People use social media more than they use search engines

 

Which of the following is a core benefit that content marketing can bring to a business’s online presence?

· A It can improve sales by directing more traffic to your website
· B It can enable a business to create a bank of content, which can be reused to create ads
· C It helps a company identify its biggest competitors
· D It provides you with another channel to push sales and promotional messages to customers on a regular basis

 

When looking to get noticed locally online, what information should you ensure is on your website as a minimum?

A Your social media links
B An interactive map
C Your physical location details
D Business registration number

 

Why is it important to reach customers on their mobiles when advertising locally?

A People use their phones while they are on the go
B Ads are smaller in mobile devices and therefore cheaper
C People prefer to receive adverts on their mobile
D Everyone has a mobile phone

 

When looking to promote your products and services locally, what are the benefits of using search engine ads?

A Everyone uses search engines
B You can target ads to a specific geographic area
C You can target ads to specific genders
D Search ads are cheaper than display adverts

 

Which of the following would be described as a good business goal to set for your social media campaigns?

A Increase staff morale
B Increase audience engagement
C Increase customer satisfaction
D Increase overall profit

 

«Because online attention spans are shorter, a great hook or opening sentence is important to draw people in.» What is this a best practice example of?

A Writing engaging online copy
B Keeping the target audience in mind
C Understanding the user journey
D Being consistent in your approach to copy

 

When designing mobile advertising campaigns, what is a best practice to identify which keywords to target?

A Ask your audience what they search for when looking for similar products
B Use the Google Keyword research tool or Bing Keyword research tool
C Use a tool to harvest the keywords your competitors are using
D Use all the usual keywords from your website in your advertising account

 

Which of the following tools could be used to gain an insight into the phrases and questions people search for about a given subject online?

A Answer The Public
B AdWords Editor
C Facebook business manager
D SEM Rush

 

When building a website for a business, what type of design should it have in order to be «mobile friendly»?

A A scaled design
B A visual design
C A responsive design
D An integrated design

 

Building a plan will help you to focus your efforts when using social media. What should you consider when making your social media plan?

A Your audience’s data
B Your audience’s interests
C You audience’s available income
D Your audience’s offline behaviour

 

Why is social media a great tool for your business to build trust and engagement with your audience?

A You can share offers and discounts exclusively to your following
B You can share blogs from other businesses to cover more than what you do
C You can share honest reviews about your product or service
D You can connect with customers at any time of the day

 

Mobile apps are a great tool to engage with customers on the go. What is one of the major benefits of a mobile app over a website?

A Apps allow you to send push notifications
B Apps are easy to access on the app store
C Apps generally work on more mobile devices
D Apps allow you to collate more data on your customers

 

When looking to promote a business on social media, what is a good way to grow your social media following or engagement quickly?

A Paid advertising
B Pay for followers
C Follow all of your competitors’ followers
D Overuse hashtags

 

When it comes to knowing which social media platforms to focus your efforts on, how can you work out which one will work best for you?

A Compare follower numbers across platforms
B Use online analytics tools to measure engagement
C See what competitor businesses are using
D Ask friends and family which platforms they use

 

When it comes to mobile, how would you define usability?

A The visitor’s time navigating your site
B The visitor’s experience on your site
C The visitor’s general time on your site
D The vistior’s purpose when on your site

 

When looking to advertise your business to mobile users, social media advertising can be really effective because…

A it allows you to target people who have ad blockers enabled
B it can be seen by people who aren’t logged into their accounts
C it allows you to target people based on their likes and interests
D it doesn’t cost too much to spread your ads far

 

Which of the following actions would be most effective for a business to take in order to help them progress towards achieving their content marketing goals?

A Personalising content to make each customer feel important, taking into account available data about each individual customer.
B Reducing the number of channels used for content marketing to only those channels with the highest referral numbers, thus saving money
C Identifying audiences who view their content, and ensuring those specific audiences get targeted in the future, with the aim of increasing sales
D Refining their content marketing strategy as they go, taking into account available data and metrics

 

Reach more customers with advertising

 

When looking at your email marketing metrics, Click Through Rate (or CTR) highlights which of the following insights?

A % of people that made a purchase after receiving the email
B % of people that opened the email out of the total recipients
C % of people who clicked on a link in the email out of the total recipients
D % of people who were sent the email against the total number of conversions made

 

When discussing display advertising, what is an ad network?

A A way to get free traffic to your site
B A directory of lots of websites that sell the same products as you do
C An online store of images you can use within your content
D A platform allowing the advertiser to advertise on websites within the network

 

When it comes to email marketing, what do we mean by the term A/B testing?

A A/B testing means you can split your contacts alphabetically
B A/B testing means you send the same email twice to the same people
C A/B testing means splitting your audience and sending each of them a different variation of your email
D A/B testing means it is spell checked and proofed, prior to hitting send

 

What is one of the benefits of using templates for your email marketing campaigns?

A You can reuse the same template
B They are always free
C You can duplicate the design of your website
D Templates work better on mobile

 

Which of the following factors can impact the open rate of your email campaigns?

A The amount of links contained in the email
B The number of images in your email
C The opportunity for customers to opt-out
D The subject line of the email

 

How can you attract social media users to share your video content online?

· A Tag them in posts
· B Use hashtags
· C Make them funny
· D Use subtitles

 

Which of the following is a key strategy for distributing your video content?

A Share videos across all of your digital marketing tools
B Pick one primary place to share your video content
C Trust word-of-mouth to drive traffic to your videos
D Send out a postcard to relevant mailing lists

 

Which of the following is a benefit of search advertising over display advertising?

A Search ads are more likely to be clicked on
B Search advertising is cheaper than display advertising
C Search advertising allows ads to be created in multiple formats
D Search advertising is shown to customers who are searching for your specific terms

 

When advertisers run online ads that typically include an image for people to click on, it’s called…

A Search Engine Optimisation
B Banner advertising
C Display advertising
D Webpage advertising

 

Which of the following is the most accurate analogy for a display advertising network?

A A targeting option for publishers
B A marketplace between online publishers and advertisers
C A payments system for online ad campaigns
D A targeting option for advertisers

 

Why is it important that you set goals when planning your display ad campaigns?

A To help determine the best way to collate customer data
B To help determine the performance and allow for optimisation
C To help determine where your budget will be spent
D To help determine the performance of your competition

 

If the analytics for your video campaign shows people are only watching the first few seconds of your video, what can you do to try and amend this?

A Change the colours to be more eye-catching
B Change how much your branding is shown in the video
C Update the description to tell people more about the video
D Delete the video and try again with edited content

 

How can your business benefit from video without making one yourself?

A Advertising on other people’s videos
B Commenting on other people’s videos
C Sharing other people’s videos
D Interacting with other people’s videos

 

When using display advertising, what could you include in an ad to achieve the goal of driving more sales?

A Promotions and special offers
B Personalised messages
C Location specific information
D Product shots and detailed information

 

Which of the following is a benefit of display advertising over search advertising?

A Display advertising is cheaper than search advertising
B Appearing on relevant websites offering advertising space
C Ads can appear at the top of search engine results pages
D Display ads are more likely to be clicked on

 

When planning your display advertising, what does the word ‘placement’ mean?

A The exact location of your ad on a particular page of a website
B The size and position of your ad
C The exact location of your ad on search engine results pages
D The position of text within your ad

 

Retargeting allows you to…

A Target users, based on the specific actions they take on your site
B Target people, based on their likes and interests
C Appear higher within the search results
D Target people before they come to your website

 

Which form of targeting would you use to display ads to people who have previously visited your website?

A Search advertising
B Reacquiring
C Readvertising
D Retargeting

 

Fill the blank: In the world of display advertising, remarketing is a way to _________.

A pay less per click than standard SEM ads
B show ads to people before they visit your website
C show ads to people after they visit your website
D display a pop up on your website when people visit it

 

When creating video marketing content on a budget, what is the first thing you should consider doing?

A Shooting as much as you can and culling it later
B Finding editing software
C Finding equipment to use
D Planning your content

 

What can you do to help your videos appear in search results?

A Make the content really interesting
B Give detailed descriptions of its content
C Clearly brand your videos
D Include calls to action within the videos

Track and measure web traffic

 

When using analytics programmes on your website, which of these do not fall under the category of a metric?

A Browser users use to access your site
B Unique visitors to your site
C Time users spend on your site
D Number of pages viewed per visit

 

When using analytics on your website, what do we mean by the term ‘conversion’?

A The act of a user coming from a certain geographical location
B The act of a user spending a certain amount of time on the site
C The act of a user meeting a specific metric
D The act of a user completing a goal

 

How is a spreadsheet defined?

· A An interactive computer application for the organisation, analysis and storage of data
· B A static collection of related data tables that can be queried to locate specific fields
· C A tool for storing large amounts of numerical data, but not text-based data
· D A digital balance sheet to keep track of financial transactions

 

When using web-based analytics tools, by segmenting the data you will be able to achieve which of the following?

A Bid higher within your SEM advertising account
B Find insights that can help you identify where to make improvements
C Build better social media profiles
D Run advertising in other countries around the world

 

What is the benefit of using digital data?

A It can help you make informed decisions and improve online performance
B Digital data is always 100% accurate
C Digital data allows you to save money on offline analytics
D Using digital data allows you to automatically reach more customers

 

When it comes to web analytics, what insights can you gather using analytics tools?

A What websites users visit after leaving your website
B How you currently rank in search engines
C How people interact with your website
D How people interact with your competitors’ websites

 

When using analytics programmes on your website, which of these do not fall under the category of a dimension?

A The device users access the site with
B The time a user spends on the site
C The browser a user uses to visit the site
D The geographical location of the user

 

What do website analytics allow you to do?

A Set up advertising accounts to drive continuous improvement
B Understand users behaviour and improve the effectiveness of your digital marketing efforts
C Interact with customers on your website to increase conversion
D Predict your users next move based on previous data

 

In the world of analytics, the time the user spent on your site is considered which type of data?

A Conversion
B Clocking
C Metric
D Dimension

 

In the world of analytics, tracking the type of device the user accessed your site by is considered which type of data?

A Conversion
B Dimension
C Access
D Metric

 

How do you handle data in analytics to gain greater insights into our audience’s behaviour?

A Partition
B Sample
C Segment
D Extract

 

Fill the blank: When you link Google Ads with Google Analytics you are able to understand which ________ are driving performance.

A Organic keywords
B Social media ads
C Paid keywords
D Directories

 

When creating a presentation based on lots of data, what principle should you bear in mind?

A Show all the information available, to give your audience as much context as possible
B Tailor your approach to your audience in order to tell a better story
C Stick to visual graphics only, as everyone will prefer this presentation format over tables and text
D Present all information in the same way because everyone interprets things similarly

 

Why should you avoid focusing on collecting as much data as possible?

A Vast quantities of data will take a long time to process
B Large amounts of data are harder to store online
C The right information, at the right time, is more valuable
D Spreadsheets have a limit on the amount of information they can store

 

Sell products or services online

 

When building your online product store, to make it as effective as possible you should look to optimise the performance by using images in what kind of way?

A Use images direct from the internet to ensure accurate file size
B Use images direct from the original manufacturer
C Ensure images are of a high quality
D Use detailed descriptions instead of images to help search engines

 

Which of these is not a benefit for businesses using fully integrated e-commerce platforms?

A Stock control
B Integrated invoicing
C The ability to track shipping
D Automated complaints process system

 

When trying to increase the product sales on your website, one way to achieve this is to_________?

A send multiple follow up emails once a purchase has been made
B show them remarketing ads with a variety of products
C provide the customer with relevant suggested purchases
D include a pop up on your website that they have to action before continuing

 

Fill in the blank: When you are considering the layout of the product pages, it is important to put them in ________ order?

A price
B hierarchical
C a constantly changing
D alphabetical

 

When looking to introduce e-commerce functions to your website, which of the following would be the best first step?

A Build an online store with an integrated payment system
B Set up a web-based money transfer software like PayPal
C Invest in a new website platform
D Use other platforms such as eBay or Etsy

 

If a user abandons their shopping cart without making a purchase, one way to bring them back to complete the purchase is?

A SEM advertising
B Social advertising
C Retargeting
D Email campaigns

 

Analytics can help optimise your website for which of the following?

A For different devices, navigation & search
B For different devices & social media profiles
C For email templates & social media profiles
D For navigation, search & video campaigns

 

Take a business global

 

Fill in the blank: When considering expanding a business internationally, the best place to start is to__________?

A use online tools to help you understand where there’s a strong demand for your products
B move the whole business to that country
C replicate your current business in as many countries as possible
D buy new domains for the country

 

Fill the blanks: When advertising internationally, you should make your business ______ to the new market, consider the ___________ and any possible ___________ implications.

A accessible | supply chain | legal
B affordable | supply chain | language
C exciting | customers needs | currency
D affordable | customer needs | legal

 

When looking to expand your business internationally on social media, what should you do first?

A Treat all social media channels the same
B Use popular phrases and memes for that area
C Analyse platforms popular in that area
D Not advertise at all, as other countries don’t like social advertising

 

If you are looking to expand your company’s presence online internationally, which of the following should you consider with regards to your online content?

A Translated by an automated tool only
B Translated but also locally adapted for the audience
C Translated into the native language
D Left the same, and not translated

 


 

 

 

 

Respuestas de Fundamentos de Marketing Digital de Google

Por

Respuestas al examen de certificación Fundamentos de Marketing Digital Google Activate

Respuestas de Fundamentos de Marketing Digital - Google Activa tu Negocio

 

Respuestas al examen de certificación Fundamentos de Marketing Digital Google Activate

 

I – Oportunidades en el mundo online

 

1¿Para qué tipo de empresas el aumento en el uso de Internet representa un gran potencial?
A Todos los tipos de empresas

B Pequeñas y medianas empresas

C Empresas internacionales

D Empresas locales

 

2Crear presencia online para una empresa implica varios pasos. ¿Qué tareas podrían llevarse a cabo al principio de este proceso?
A Enviar folletos a los clientes con la dirección web de la empresa.

B Crear una ficha de empresa en directorios locales.

C Incrementar los anuncios impresos y en vallas publicitarias.

D Formar un equipo de expertos en publicidad digital.

 

3¿Cuál es la vía más fácil para que los usuarios de un sitio web conozcan la empresa? Elige una de estas acciones:
A Obtener una prueba de uno de los productos al registrarse para recibir correos electrónicos.

B Escuchar un archivo de audio que se reproduce automáticamente cada vez que los usuarios visitan el sitio web.

C Consultar las distintas páginas de producto y leer la información de la página de preguntas frecuentes.

D Leer los términos y condiciones de los productos en el sitio web.

 

4Para las empresas, ¿cuál de las siguientes es una ventaja clave de tener presencia online?
A La capacidad de vender productos directamente a los clientes a través de las redes sociales.

B Ser visible cuando los usuarios buscan una empresa como la tuya.

C Enviar correos electrónicos a los usuarios para informarles de los productos nuevos.

D La capacidad de ofrecer descuentos promocionales a los clientes nuevos.

 

II – Primeros pasos para alcanzar el éxito online

 

1¿Qué herramienta te permite medir el éxito de tu sitio web?
A El planificador de palabras clave

B La galería de anuncios

C La herramienta de vista previa de anuncios

D Una solución de analítica

 

2¿Cuál de las siguientes sugerencias para crear presencia online para una empresa es la más acertada?
A Sigue igual que hasta ahora; no cambies nada.

B El mismo contenido funciona en plataformas online y offline.

C Utiliza analíticas para tomar decisiones fundamentadas.

D Utiliza analíticas para hacer un seguimiento de los clientes en Internet.

 

3¿Cuál de los siguientes términos describe mejor la actividad empresarial que se produce cuando los usuarios compran productos o servicios online en tu sitio web?
A Comercio electrónico

B Publicidad de display

C Marketing en buscadores

D Pago por clic

 

4¿Cuál de las siguientes afirmaciones relacionadas con promocionar tu empresa en Internet es cierta?
A Si quieres aparecer en los resultados de búsqueda, necesitas un sitio web.

B Conseguirás una base de clientes similar a la que tienes en el mundo real.

C Te verá el mismo número de clientes tanto si utilizas la publicidad en búsquedas como si no.

D Las redes sociales son un canal ideal para atraer a tu audiencia.

 

III – Desarrolla tu presencia online

 

1¿Cuál de las siguientes afirmaciones relacionadas con desarrollar presencia web para las empresas es cierta?
A Los clientes pueden obtener información sobre una empresa descargando la correspondiente aplicación móvil, pero no pueden hacer pedidos en este canal.

B Para poder crear un sitio web se debe disponer de un presupuesto elevado.

C Las aplicaciones móviles permiten a tus clientes comprar tus productos sin tener que visitar tu sitio web.

D Para que las empresas puedan vender productos deben tener un sitio web.

 

2¿Qué es un servidor web?
A El representante del servicio de atención al cliente al que se puede llamar para resolver cualquier duda relacionada con tu sitio web.

B La respuesta que se obtiene al buscar un término en la Web.

C Un ordenador conectado a Internet con un software que le permite alojar todos los componentes de tu sitio web.

D El dispositivo que determina la velocidad de tu conexión móvil.

 

3Rellena el espacio en blanco___________ son accesos directos que permiten acceder a otras páginas de tu sitio o a otros lugares de la Web.
A Los hiperenlaces

B Los enlaces de retorno

C Las barras de menú

D Las rutas de exploración

 

4¿Cuál de los elementos siguientes se recomienda excluir de los sitios web?
A Precios

B Mucha información científica compleja y estadísticas detalladas

C Ofertas especiales

D Certificaciones que avalan que estás cualificado para ofrecer un determinado servicio

 

5¿Cuál de los siguientes elementos es un ejemplo de llamada a la acción en un sitio web?
A Un listado de números de teléfono que los clientes pueden usar para ponerse en contacto contigo

B Un botón que dice «Mira cómo llegar» que, al hacer clic en él, redirige a los usuarios a un mapa en el que se indica cómo llegar a la tienda en función de dónde se encuentren

C Un botón con un icono que redirige a los clientes a tus cuentas de las redes sociales

D Un número de teléfono al que los usuarios pueden llamar para obtener ayuda con sus compras

 

6¿Qué deberías tener en cuenta a la hora de crear contenido para tu sitio web?
A Lo que buscan tus clientes

B Tus últimas promociones y descuentos

C Los valores de tu marca

D Si el contenido se hará viral o no

 

IV – Planifica tu estrategia comercial online

 

1¿Cuál es el primer paso para crear una estrategia empresarial online?
A Identificar los objetivos de negocio.

B Conocer la posición de la competencia.

C Conocer el mercado.

D Alinear los objetivos con la estrategia.

 

2¿Cuál es el objetivo del proceso «See, Think, Do, Care»?
A Ayudar a determinar una estrategia de remarketing.

B Ayudar a las empresas a conocer el recorrido de sus clientes online.

C Ayudar a las empresas a llegar a una audiencia internacional.

D Ofrecer información valiosa sobre determinados grupos de clientes.

 

3¿Por qué beneficia a las empresas optimizar los puntos de contacto online con los clientes?
A Porque permite a las marcas añadir anuncios emergentes en cada punto del recorrido del cliente, con lo que se aseguran una visibilidad alta.

B Porque permite a las empresas ahorrar dinero en la publicidad online.

C Porque ayuda a los clientes cada vez que se ponen en contacto con la marca y permite generar confianza.

D Porque ofrece a las empresas la oportunidad de recoger más datos de clientes potenciales.

 

4Una vez que hayas formulado y desarrollado tus ventajas competitivas,

¿qué harías para integrarlas en una estrategia online a largo plazo?

A Incorporarlas en los materiales de marketing de todos los canales para aumentar la notoriedad entre los clientes.

B Crear campañas por correo electrónico explicando a tus clientes por qué eres diferente de la competencia.

C Incluirlas en un vídeo y luego enviarlo a tus empleados.

D Enviar un comunicado de prensa a través de tus canales de comunicación.

 

5¿Qué tipo de información ofrecen los indicadores clave de rendimiento?
A Segmentación de audiencia

B Previsiones a largo plazo

C Viabilidad económica

D Decisiones del consejo de administración

 

V – Descubre el mundo de los buscadores

 

1¿Por qué los buscadores son muy eficaces para encontrar empresas?
A Porque como los usuarios pagan para usarlos, tienen una base de clientes con un fuerte poder adquisitivo.

B Porque los usuarios que los utilizan buscan activamente información, productos o servicios.

C Porque son una herramienta muy utilizada entre los usuarios. D Porque te aseguran que podrás captar clientes nuevos.

 

2¿Qué tecnología utilizan los buscadores para rastrear sitios web?
A Androides

B Becarios

C Autómatas

D Robots

 

3¿Cuál de los siguientes datos permite a los buscadores identificar el tema de tu página?
A La fecha de publicación

B El número de imágenes que incluye

C El número total de palabras

D La etiqueta del título

 

4Rellena el espacio en blanco: Invertir dinero en la publicidad en búsquedas influye en la posición que aparece tu sitio web en___________.
A Los resultados de búsqueda orgánica

B La página de resultados de búsqueda

C Los directorios de empresas

D Las redes de publicidad de display

 

5¿Cuál de los siguientes es un factor importante en el sistema de subastas de la publicidad en buscadores?

 

A La popularidad de tu marca

B La imagen de tu logotipo

C La antigüedad de tu empresa

D La relevancia de tus anuncios

 

6¿Cuál de las siguientes ventajas ofrece Google Search Console?
A Te permite conseguir más seguidores en las redes sociales.

B Te ayuda a optimizar tu ficha de Google My Business.

C Te ayuda a saber qué palabras clave buscan los usuarios en Google.

D Te ayuda a realizar pruebas A/B en la página principal de tu sitio web.

 

VI – Haz que te encuentren en los buscadores

 

1¿Cuál de los siguientes factores deberías tener en cuenta a la hora de optimizar tu sitio web para que aparezca en los resultados de los buscadores?
A El esquema de colores del sitio

B El uso de contenido reciclado

C El uso de un nombre de empresa atractivo

D La popularidad del sitio

 

2¿Cuál debería ser el primer paso de un plan de SEO estructurado?
A Identificar el presupuesto publicitario.

B Comprar un software de analítica.

C Crear presencia en sitios de redes sociales.

D Buscar las palabras clave adecuadas.

 

3¿Cuál de los siguientes factores podría determinar que tus anuncios de búsqueda tengan un mejor rendimiento que los de la competencia?
A El número de seguidores en las redes sociales

B La cantidad de la puja

C La autoridad del dominio del sitio web

D El promedio de usuarios que recibe el sitio web de la empresa

 

4Rellena el espacio en blanco: Las cadenas cortas de términos muy concretos con un volumen de búsquedas bajo se denominan___________.
A Palabras clave muy generales

B Palabras clave muy específicas

C Palabras clave muy relevantes

D Palabras clave poco específicas

 

5¿Cuál de los siguientes sería un excelente objetivo en un plan de SEO?
A Conseguir más Me gusta y seguidores en las redes sociales.

B Aumentar el número de usuarios reIevantes que visitan tu sitio web.

C Mostrar tu sitio web a tantas personas como sea posible.

D Aparecer en la primera posición de las páginas de resultados de los buscadores como respuesta a la búsqueda de cualquier palabra clave.

 

VII – Saca partido de los buscadores

 

1¿Cuál de los siguientes títulos encajaría mejor en la página de un sitio web en la que se describe la política de devolución de la tienda?
A Cómo realizar devoluciones

B Política de devoluciones de [nombre de la empresa]

C Política de devoluciones

D Políticas de la empresa

 

2¿Cuál de los siguientes es un buen método para conseguir que otros sitios web incluyan enlaces al tuyo?
A Seguir incluyendo enlaces a esos sitios web hasta que estos también incluyan enlaces que dirijan al tuyo.

B Enviar correos electrónicos a esos sitios web hasta que incluyan enlaces que dirijan al tuyo.

C Establecer relaciones con sitios web similares.

D Incluir un gran número palabras claves relevantes en la página a la que te gustaría que vincularan esos sitios web.

 

3Si tuvieras que internacionalizar tu empresa, ¿cuál de los siguientes elementos no podría faltar en tu sitio web?
A Información de los productos y las entregas en la moneda que corresponda

B Horas y fechas en el formato local

C Información sobre el tipo de cambio

D Regalos para los clientes locales

 

VIII – Promociónate en los buscadores

 

1El marketing en buscadores también se denomina:
A Publicidad de pago por clic

B Publicidad orgánica

C Marketing de cuadro de búsqueda

D Publicidad de un clic

 

2En una subasta SEM, ¿en cuál de los siguientes aspectos de tu anuncio se basa el nivel de calidad?
A Puja

B Relevancia

C Ingenio

D Duración

 

3Rellena el espacio en blanco: Es posible determinar el rendimiento que tendrá un/una___________ sin pujar por él/ella.
A Subasta

B Sitio web

C Palabra clave

D Anuncio

 

4¿Qué elemento deberían incluir los anuncios de búsqueda para recibir más clics?
A Una llamada a la acción

B Un título llamativo

C Una foto en primer plano

D Un enlace a una plataforma de redes sociales

 

IX – Mejora tus campañas en buscadores

 

1¿Cuál de las siguientes es una ventaja de utilizar anuncios y páginas de destino relevantes?
A Mayor coste de los emplazamientos publicitarios

B Mejores posiciones de anuncio en la página de resultados de búsqueda

C Mayor coste por clic en tus anuncios

D Se consigue que los anuncios atraigan más compras

 

2¿Cuál de las siguientes descripciones se corresponde con el término «palabras clave negativas» en el contexto de anuncios de búsqueda?
A Palabras clave que no guardan relación con el sitio web

B Palabras clave que generan un volumen de búsquedas bajo

C Palabras clave que se excluyen de una campaña

D Palabras clave que se escriben de forma incorrecta

 

3Rellena el espacio en blanco: Si utilizas palabras clave de____________ al crear tus anuncios de búsqueda, aunque los usuarios usen términos con pequeñas variaciones (como el plural del término) también se podrá activar la publicación del anuncio.
A Concordancia exacta

B Concordancia aleatoria

C Concordancia directa

D Concordancia cercana

 

4En el caso de las campañas de búsqueda, ¿qué podrás medir con el seguimiento de conversiones?
A El número total de transacciones que se llevan a cabo en tu sitio web

B El número de usuarios que hacen clic en tus anuncios de SEM y terminan navegando en tu sitio web

C El número de usuarios que visitan tu sitio web desde un anuncio de búsqueda y terminan realizando una compra

D El número de clientes que se han convertido en embajadores de tu marca gracias a tu anuncio

 

X – Promociónate de forma local

 

1¿Qué puedes hacer para mejorar la visibilidad de una empresa ante los usuarios que se encuentran cerca?
A Traducir tu sitio web a otros dos idiomas como mínimo.

B Ofrecer asistencia por teléfono gratuita durante el horario laboral.

C Usar una herramienta de analítica eficaz en tu sitio web.

D Procurar que el número de teléfono, la dirección y el horario laboral de tu empresa sean fáciles de encontrar.

 

2¿Cuál de las siguientes frases es un ejemplo de búsqueda local?
A tienda de bicis cerca

B tienda de bicis en el Reino Unido

C tienda de bicicletas local

D tiendas de bicis

 

3¿Cuál de las siguientes es una ventaja de registrar tu empresa en fichas de directorios locales online?
A Descuentos en tus campañas de publicidad en búsquedas

B Más posibilidades de que los usuarios descubran tu empresa a través de los buscadores

C Más menciones en plataformas de redes sociales

D Ventas aseguradas a los clientes locales

 

4¿Qué tres datos debes incluir en primer lugar en tu ficha de directorio local?
A Dirección, sitio web y números de teléfono de la empresa

B Nombre de empresa, dirección y números de teléfono de la empresa

C Sitio web, números de teléfono y dirección de correo electrónico de la empresa

D Razón social, dirección de correo electrónico y sitio web de la empresa

 

XI – Haz que tus clientes locales te encuentren online

 

1¿Cuál de los siguientes factores permite a los buscadores determinar si tu empresa es local con respecto a la búsqueda que realizan los usuarios?
A Datos de ubicación en el sitio web, contenido de calidad y grado de optimización del sitio web para móviles

B Datos de ubicación en el sitio web, lista de tiendas en tu zona y formulario de contacto

C Calidad del contenido, lista de proveedores locales y datos sobre la ubicación

D Etiquetas GPS de ubicación en fotos, contenido de calidad y grado de optimización del sitio web para móviles

 

2Si quieres atraer a una audiencia local, ¿por qué es importante optimizar tu sitio web y el contenido para los usuarios de móviles?
A Porque los usuarios locales suelen utilizar el dispositivo móvil cuando salen de casa.

B Porque los móviles sustituirán a los ordenadores.

C Porque hoy en día todos los usuarios online navegan a través de dispositivos móviles.

D Porque el marketing en móviles es más rentable.

 

3¿Cuál de las siguientes acciones puede ayudarte a conseguir una mayor visibilidad en los buscadores?
A Añadir contenido relevante que resalte la ubicación de tu empresa.

B Incluir tu dirección en tu cuenta de Twitter.

C Optimizar tu sitio web para ordenadores únicamente.

D Añadir en tu sitio web una lista de tiendas que se encuentran en tu zona.

 

XII – Promociónate en las redes sociales

 

1¿Cuál de los objetivos siguientes pueden conseguir las empresas gracias a las redes sociales?
A Atraer a audiencias nuevas.

B Forjarse una buena reputación entre los clientes.

C Conseguir los objetivos de venta.

D Incrementar el tráfico del sitio web.

 

2Rellena el espacio en blanco: Las empresas deberían centrar su estrategia en plataformas de redes sociales que_________.
A Tengan la mejor reputación.

B Se prevea que capten la atención del mayor volumen de usuarios.

C Tengan una audiencia relevante.

D Cuenten con el mayor número de usuarios.

 

3¿Cuál de los siguientes es un ejemplo de objetivo para tu estrategia de redes sociales?
A Conseguir reseñas de productos auténticas.

B Atraer más tráfico a tu tienda.

C Establecer comunicaciones unidireccionales con los clientes.

D Imitar la estrategia de la competencia.

 

4 ¿Qué datos deberías incluir en la página de perfil de tu empresa de una plataforma de redes sociales?
A Información sobre el director ejecutivo

B Un enlace a un sitio web de fichas locales en el que aparece tu empresa

C La descripción de tu empresa

D El coste de los productos y los servicios

 

XIII – Entra de lleno en las redes sociales

 

1¿Qué incluye un plan de redes sociales eficaz?
A Una lista con contenido que imita al de la competencia

B Todos tus objetivos de negocio online

C Una planificación a largo plazo que especifique cuándo publicarás contenido

D Una lista de los amigos que pueden publicar en las cuentas

 

2¿Cuál es la mejor manera de mostrar tu contenido social a personas que todavía no te siguen?
A Aumentar tus campañas de marketing por correo electrónico.

B Pedir a los usuarios que compartan el contenido en sus redes sociales.

C Usar promociones de pago para llegar a audiencias nuevas.

D Incluir enlaces en tu sitio web que dirijan a tus redes sociales.

 

3A la hora de evaluar los resultados de tus campañas, ¿qué pueden ayudarte a medir las herramientas de analítica de redes sociales?
A Si la campaña ha obtenido mejores resultados que la de la competencia.

B Si a los usuarios les han gustado las campañas en redes sociales.

C Si algún visitante ha llamado a la tienda después de ver una publicación en las redes sociales.

D Si los usuarios han hecho clic en un anuncio de pago o en un resultado de búsqueda orgánica.

 

4¿Cuál de los siguientes es un error habitual que cometen las empresas a la hora de usar plataformas de redes sociales?

 

A Mantener conversaciones bidireccionales con los clientes.

B No estar presente en todas las plataformas de redes sociales.

C No contar con los recursos necesarios para responder a comentarios y preguntas en un plazo razonable.

D Dedicar demasiado tiempo a revisar analíticas de redes sociales.

 

XIV – Descubre las posibilidades del mundo móvil

 

1Si quieres asegurarte de que los usuarios de móviles puedan acceder fácilmente a tu sitio web, ¿qué deberías hacer primero?
A Cambiar la paleta de colores del sitio web.

B Optimizar el sitio web.

C Crear una aplicación móvil.

D Reducir el contenido del sitio web.

 

2¿Qué significa «diseño adaptable»?
A Los usuarios de tu sitio web pueden ajustar manualmente el tamaño del sitio.

B Tu sitio web se adapta para que pueda verse bien en cualquier dispositivo.

C Tus clientes pueden hacer comentarios sobre el diseño de tu sitio web.

D Tu sitio web responde más fácilmente a los clics.

 

3Si tuvieras que adaptar la estrategia de SEO de tu sitio web a los usuarios de móviles, ¿cuál de estos es un factor clave que deberías tener en cuenta?
A Contenido breve y menos imágenes

B Rendimiento y usabilidad

C Usabilidad y contenido breve

D Menos contenido de vídeo

 

4¿Qué recurso pueden usar las empresas para enviar mensajes a los usuarios que ya han descargado su aplicación?
A Mensajes de texto

B Notificaciones pendientes

C Notificaciones push

D Notificaciones por correo electrónico

 

XV – Saca partido a los dispositivos móviles

 

1¿Qué tipo de palabras clave deberías usar teniendo en cuenta la manera en que los usuarios de móviles buscan tu empresa?
A Palabras clave muy específicas

B Palabras clave y frases cortas

C Palabras clave y frases largas

D Palabras clave de concordancia exacta

 

2Antes de publicar anuncios de búsqueda deberías asegurarte de que tu sitio web esté optimizado para móviles. ¿Cuál de las siguientes situaciones proporcionaría una buena experiencia a los clientes que usan móviles?
A La empresa tiene una aplicación móvil en lugar de un sitio web. B El sitio web incluye números de teléfono de la empresa.

C El sitio web funciona en diferentes dispositivos móviles.

D El sitio web no incluye ningún vídeo, por lo que se carga rápidamente.

 

3¿Cuál de estos datos se puede usar para segmentar audiencias si publicas anuncios en redes sociales?
A Nombres de persona

B Direcciones

C Nombres de mascota

D Situación sentimental

 

4Cuando crees contenido de vídeo para tus anuncios de display, ¿cómo deben ser los vídeos?
A Interesantes, largos y con una llamada a la acción

B Relevantes, cortos y con una llamada a la acción

C Relevantes, largos y con una URL

D Cortos, informativos y con un número de teléfono

 

XVI – Comienza a aplicar el marketing de contenido

 

1¿Cuál de las siguientes definiciones refleja con exactitud las acciones que implican las campañas de marketing de contenido?
A Crear y publicar contenido específico cuando se dispone del tiempo suficiente.

B Crear contenido en función del tiempo que puede publicarse en diferentes canales.

C Enviar correos electrónicos periódicamente a los clientes con noticias sobre los productos o los servicios que ofrece la empresa.

D Crear y promocionar materiales online para incrementar el interés por un producto o servicio.

 

2¿Qué describe la siguiente definición? «División de una audiencia en grupos según las características y los gustos de los usuarios que tiene como objetivo identificar el grupo más interesado en tu producto o servicio».
A Canales de marketing

B Datos demográficos

C Segmentación de audiencia

D Dinámica de grupos

 

3Rellena el espacio en blanco: ¿Cuáles son los objetivos del contenido? Indica el que falta: «Entretener, influir,_______ y convencer».
A Consentir.

B Complacer.

C Sorprender.

D Informar.

 

4¿Por qué la forma de redactar contenido online debe ser distinta a la que se emplea en los textos offline? Elige la opción que mejor describa el motivo.
A Los lectores online reciben una gran cantidad de información, por lo que su periodo de atención es reducido.

B En algunas plataformas de blogs, las entradas tienen límites de palabras.

C A los lectores online solo les gusta interactuar con contenido largo.

D Las audiencias online suelen ser jóvenes y el lenguaje del contenido debería reflejar esta característica.

 

5Destacar fechas clave y tener en cuenta varios canales son prácticas recomendadas para llevar a cabo uno de estos procesos. ¿Cuál de ellos?
A Crear un calendario de contenidos.

B Diseñar ilustraciones que apoyen el contenido.

C Segmentar la audiencia.

D Identificar los influencers de las redes sociales.

 

6¿Con cuál de las siguientes métricas podrías saber la entrada de blog que más interesa a tu audiencia?
A Duración de la sesión

B Páginas vistas

C Tráfico referido

D Páginas vistas únicas

 

XVII – Conecta a través del correo electrónico

 

1¿Qué necesitarás para poner en marcha un programa de marketing por correo electrónico?
A Varias plantillas de correo electrónico

B Un formulario de contacto

C Una herramienta para recoger las direcciones de correo electrónico de los usuarios

D Un presupuesto concreto

 

2¿Cuál de las siguientes funciones suelen ofrecer las plataformas de marketing por correo electrónico?
A Plantillas personalizadas

B Lista gratuita de direcciones de correo electrónico a las que puedes enviar tus mensajes

C Opción para que los usuarios puedan cancelar la suscripción a tus correos electrónicos

D Automatización de tus campañas de anuncios de búsqueda

 

3¿Cuál de las siguientes es una práctica eficaz que deberías aplicar a los mensajes de correo electrónico que envías a tus contactos?
A Hacer una prueba A/B de la línea de asunto para determinar qué variante es más eficaz.

B Enviar un mismo mensaje, sencillo y genérico, a toda tu base de datos de contactos.

C Incluir suficiente contenido en el correo electrónico de manera que los usuarios no tengan que salir de él para obtener información adicional.

D Solo incluir una llamada a la acción en la página de destino a la que se enlaza desde el correo electrónico.

 

4Si el porcentaje de mensajes abiertos es bajo, ¿qué podrías hacer para solucionarlo?
A Rediseñar tu sitio web.

B Cambiar el color de los botones que aparecen en los correos electrónicos.

C Enviar los correos electrónicos a más contactos.

D Modificar la línea de asunto de los correos electrónicos.

 

5¿Cuál de las siguientes afirmaciones sobre publicar campañas de correo electrónico para empresas es cierta?
A No es necesario usar anuncios patrocinados en las campañas de marketing por correo electrónico.

B No es necesario usar analíticas en las campañas de marketing por correo electrónico.

C Se debe incluir información personal de contacto.

D Se pueden usar imágenes, independientemente de los derechos de autor que las protegen.

 

XVIII – Anúnciate en otros sitios web

 

1Si tienes un blog sobre películas, ¿a qué tipo de clientes crees que llegarás con la publicidad de display?
A Personas que utilizan bloqueadores de anuncios y que están interesadas en la temática de tu blog

B Personas que nunca han leído tu blog pero están interesadas en la temática de este

C Solo personas que han leído tu blog con anterioridad

D Solo personas interesadas en películas

 

2Rellena el espacio en blanco: Los anuncios que aparecen en buscadores suelen ser anuncios de__________.
A Audio

B Vídeo

C Texto

D Imagen

 

3Si utilizas el marketing en buscadores, ¿dónde pueden aparecer tu anuncios?
A Solo en buscadores

B Solo en sitios web

C En buscadores y en sitios web

D En sitios web y en redes sociales

 

4Al configurar tus campañas de publicidad de display, ¿a qué tipo de usuarios puedes orientarlas?
A Personas con un determinado nombre

B Personas que hablan diferentes idiomas

C Personas que tienen determinados productos

D Personas con una determinada dirección

 

XIX – Profundiza en la publicidad de display

 

1¿Por qué es eficaz la publicidad de display?
A Garantiza un mayor volumen de usuarios en tu sitio web.

B Garantiza un mayor volumen de ventas.

C Genera tráfico hacia tu sitio web.

D Mejora el posicionamiento en los buscadores.

 

2¿Cuál de los siguientes es un ejemplo de los tipos de datos que recogen automáticamente las redes publicitarias y luego comparten con las empresas?
A Número de ventas que consigues gracias al anuncio

B El coste de cada anuncio que publicas

C El coste de crear el anuncio

D Una previsión de las ventas que conseguirás gracias al anuncio

 

3¿Cuál de estas afirmaciones es cierta cuando compras emplazamientos publicitarios en redes publicitarias?
A Si quieres comprar anuncios en ciertas páginas, tendrás que ponerte en contacto con los propietarios de los sitios web.

B Las redes publicitarias proporcionan datos sobre el porcentaje de clics.

C Las redes publicitarias proporcionan los nombres de las personas que hacen clic en tu anuncio.

D Las redes publicitarias seguirán mostrando tu anuncio hasta siete días después de haberse agotado el presupuesto.

 

4Supongamos que alguien añade un producto en un carrito de la compra y después abandona el sitio web. ¿Cuál de las siguientes tácticas es más probable que anime a esa persona a volver al sitio y comprar el producto?
A Utilizar el retargeting con un anuncio de display que le anime a registrarse en el boletín informativo.

B Rediseñar tu sitio web.

C Crear una página de Facebook de tu empresa.

D Utilizar el retargeting con un anuncio de display que incluya un cupón de descuento.

 

5Si quisieras utilizar el retargeting de display, ¿qué es lo primero que deberías hacer?
A Decidir qué palabras clave se usarán.

B Definir tu audiencia.

C Escribir contenido.

D Crear una llamada a la acción.

 

XX – Saca el máximo partido a tus vídeos

 

1Si tuvieras que incorporar vídeos a una estrategia digital, ¿cuál de las siguientes tácticas crees que favorecería a los clientes?
A Presentar transmisiones en directo de la tienda física de la empresa en el sitio web.

B Publicar un videotutorial en el sitio web.

C Crear vídeos para la campaña de ventas.

D Compartir videoblogs personales.

 

2Si utilizas el vídeo como parte de tu estrategia para tener presencia online, ¿qué conseguirás crear?
A Contenido que se hará viral

B Un canal para interactuar con los clientes

C Distintas percepciones de la marca

D Una base de seguidores online

 

3Rellena el espacio en blanco: Si eres una empresa pequeña y quieres crear vídeos para mostrar tu negocio o tus productos tan solo necesitarás______.

 

A Una agencia, un equipo de profesionales y equipo técnico

B Creatividad, mucha experiencia y un presupuesto elevado

C Creatividad, planificación y un presupuesto de cualquier cuantía

D Creatividad, planificación y equipo técnico de gran calidad

 

4¿Qué ventaja puede aportar usar vídeos en campañas de marketing por correo electrónico o en las redes sociales?
A Más referencias boca a boca

B Una audiencia más amplia e implicada

C Ventas seguras de tu producto o servicio

D Contenido nuevo a un precio inferior

 

5¿Cómo puedes sacar partido al formato de vídeo en beneficio de tus productos o servicios sin que tengas que crear un vídeo?
A Esto no es posible.

B Anunciándote en los vídeos de otras personas.

C Usando imágenes con llamadas a la acción.

D Compartiendo los vídeos de otras personas.

 

6Al revisar las analíticas de tu vídeo, descubres que los usuarios solo ven los primeros segundos. ¿Qué deberías hacer?
A Plantearte quitar el vídeo de la plataforma.

B Plantearte repetir el vídeo a partir de los comentarios recibidos.

C Pensar en si deberías cambiar las imágenes, los títulos o las descripciones del vídeo de vista previa.

D Pensar en si deberías pedir a los usuarios que vean el vídeo completo en la descripción.

 

XXI – Descubre la analítica web

 

1Rellena el espacio en blanco: Las analíticas de sitios web proporcionan_____________.

 

A Las horas del día en las que tu sitio web recibe la mayor cantidad de tráfico

B El total de menciones o Me gusta que recibes en las redes sociales C Los resultados de las campañas publicitarias de la competencia

D Las direcciones de correo electrónico de los usuarios que visitan tus páginas de destino

 

2¿Sobre qué tipo de clientes pueden ofrecer las analíticas información valiosa al instante?
A Clientes anteriores y actuales

B Clientes actuales y futuros

C Clientes anteriores y futuros

D Clientes offline y online

 

3Si tu principal objetivo de negocio es conseguir reservas de habitaciones en tu pensión, ¿qué dato es el que probablemente más te interesará saber?
A El tiempo que los usuarios pasan en la página que ofrece las indicaciones sobre cómo llegar

B El día de la semana con el mayor volumen de reservas

C Saber si el tuit que has publicado se ha vuelto viral

D El número de usuarios de tu sitio web que han reservado una habitación en tu pensión

 

  • Ten éxito con la analítica web

 

1¿Qué información sobre los usuarios proporcionan la mayoría de las herramientas de analítica web?
A La información de contacto, el comportamiento y el sistema operativo

B La ubicación, el tipo de dispositivo que usan y las páginas que han visitado

C La ubicación, el tipo de dispositivo que usan y la información de contacto

D Sus intereses, cuándo eliminan las cookies del navegador y su ubicación

 

2Rellena el espacio en blanco: Si los anuncios no ofrecen buenos resultados, una buena táctica sería_____________.
A Probar en otro buscador.

B Hacer unos pequeños cambios en el texto del anuncio y analizar los resultados.

C Contratar a una agencia publicitaria.

D Eliminar el anuncio e intentarlo de nuevo.

 

3¿Qué sección de Google Analytics te permite saber si los usuarios han encontrado tu sitio web a través de las redes sociales?
A Búsquedas en el sitio

B Adquisición

C Comportamiento

D Search Console

 

XXIII – Convierte los datos en estadísticas

 

1¿Qué tipo de datos hacen referencia a una métrica que se puede representar mediante un número?
A Datos cuantitativos

B Datos cualitativos

C Datos holísticos

D Datos de cliente

 

2¿Para qué sirve el ciclo de datos?
A Para aprovechar al máximo los datos que se recogen de las actividades de marketing.

B Para evaluar la competencia.

C Para obtener información sobre lo que les gusta a los usuarios de tu sitio web.

D Para ver los datos que recoge el sistema en un formato agradable.

 

3Rellena el espacio en blanco: Las métricas útiles son el_________ de las campañas de marketing online.

 

A Motor

B Proceso

C Medio

D Procesamiento

 

4¿Cuál de las siguientes es una ventaja de usar hojas de cálculo?
A Se puede almacenar, ordenar y analizar rápidamente una gran cantidad de datos.

B Solo se puede acceder a los datos cuando todos los usuarios están conectados.

C Se puede proporcionar rápidamente información valiosa de cliente y tendencias de mercado.

D Las hojas de cálculo son la única herramienta para recoger datos y extrapolar los resultados.

 

5Si tuvieras que mostrar las partes de un sitio web que más clics reciben, ¿qué tipo de presentación elegirías?
A Gráfico de barras

B Gráfico circular

C Tabla

D Mapa de calor

 

XXIV – Crea tu tienda online

 

1¿Qué convendría incluir en las páginas de descripción de producto?
A Las versiones anteriores del producto

B Enlaces a otros proveedores

C Reseñas del producto

D Comparaciones de precios

 

2¿Cuál de las siguientes es una ventaja que ofrece el comercio electrónico?
A Proceso de tramitación de la compra más fácil

B Costes operativos bajos

C Se requiere interacción mínima con los clientes

D Segmentación de audiencias

 

3¿Cuál de estas funciones ofrecen las tiendas online como ventaja a sus propietarios o administradores?
A Recoger las direcciones de los usuarios de la tienda online.

B Incluir un sistema de gestión de pedidos.

C Tramitar las compras más rápidamente que las tiendas físicas.

D Permitir mostrar más ventas y descuentos que las tiendas físicas.

 

4¿Qué nombre recibe el proceso por el cual se envía a los clientes a otro sitio web para completar una transacción y posteriormente se les redirige al sitio original?
A Procesamiento de pagos secundario

B Procesamiento de pagos de terceros

C Procesamiento de pagos automático

D Procesamiento de pagos interno

 

XXV – Vende más a través de Internet

 

1¿Cuál de las siguientes es una señal que indica que los clientes tienen problemas para usar un determinado dispositivo para comprar?
A Las analíticas revelan que tienes muchos usuarios que usan móviles, pero pocas compras a través de este canal.

B Observas que el volumen de ventas de un determinado producto es bajo con respecto al de otros productos.

C Recibes muchas preguntas sobre la política de devolución.

D Los usuarios tienen problemas para utilizar un código de oferta en una de tus promociones.

 

2¿Cuál de los siguientes es un ejemplo de merchandising de productos?
A Publicar un anuncio de tus productos.

B Añadir una opción para que los clientes puedan filtrar tus productos.

C Mostrar productos muy específicos en la página principal de tu sitio web.

D Realizar una venta cruzada de productos en el proceso de tramitación de la compra.

 

3¿Cuál de estas afirmaciones es cierta a la hora de describir el funcionamiento de los anuncios de retargeting?
A Los anuncios de retargeting se muestran a las personas que todavía no han visitado tu sitio web.

B Cuando los usuarios visitan tu sitio web, el código inserta una cookie de navegador anónima.

C Una vez que los clientes han comprado, no es posible desactivar el anuncio de retargeting.

D El retargeting siempre dirigirá clientes a tu sitio web.

 

XXVI – Internacionaliza tu negocio

 

1¿Cuál es la mejor manera de traducir el contenido de tu sitio web para un mercado nuevo?
A Traductor de Google

B Hablantes nativos

C Un programa de traducción

D Un diccionario de frases

 

2Antes de empezar a promocionar tus productos a otros países online, ¿cuál de estos elementos te permitiría medir la demanda de tu producto en los mercados en cuestión?
A Un programa de traducción

B Herramientas para planificar palabras clave

C Entrevistas a personas originarias de esos países

D Varios anuncios de búsqueda en distintos países

 

3Si decides adaptar tu sitio web a clientes que hablan otro idioma, ¿qué deberías hacer?
A Incluir un botón que permita traducir el contenido a través de un proveedor externo.

B Traducir el contenido teniendo en cuenta las particularidades de cada idioma.

C Traducir el contenido directamente, palabra por palabra.

D Localizar los nombres de los propietarios de las empresas.

 

4¿Cuál de los siguientes tipos de publicidad tiene como principal objetivo atraer nuevos clientes online?
A Marketing por correo electrónico

B Publicidad impresa

C Publicidad de retargeting

D Publicidad en búsquedas

 

5¿Qué es lo primero que debe hacer una empresa para introducirse en un mercado nuevo?
A Contratar los servicios de una agencia para traducir su sitio web al idioma local.

B Abrir una oficina en la capital del país en cuestión.

C Determinar su capacidad para servir los productos y estudiar toda la información fiscal y legal.

D Invertir en campañas publicitarias de gran envergadura para aumentar la notoriedad de la marca.

 

6Si vendes productos o servicios en distintos países, ¿qué forma de pago deberías plantearte ofrecer en caso de que todavía no la ofrezcas como opción?
A Tarjetas de débito

B Tarjetas de crédito

C PayPal o Worldpay

D Transferencias bancarias

 

7Si quieres que tus productos y servicios lleguen a clientes de todo el mundo, ¿cuál de estas opciones deberías analizar en profundidad?

 

A Las horas del día en que se conectan a Internet los compradores de cualquier parte del mundo

B Los requisitos legales y fiscales que debes tener en cuenta en el mercado en cuestión

C Las redes sociales que más se utilizan en ese mercado

D Los países donde los envíos internacionales son más económicos

 

Examen final de certificación

 

1¿Cuál es el desafío más grande al que se enfrentan la mayoría de las empresas para estar online?
A Preparación del presupuesto

B Desarrollo de un plan

C Optimización del sitio web

D Definición de una base de clientes

 

2Cuando pretendes anunciar una nueva empresa online, ¿cuál es uno de los principales beneficios de los anuncios gráficos?
A Los ven todas las personas

B Tienen una tasa de clics más alta

C Pueden aparecer en muchos formatos diferentes

D El coste de configurarlos es relativamente bajo

 

3Imagina que un cliente ha descargado una aplicación realizada por una tienda de hardware local. ¿De qué manera esa empresa podría conectarse con su público a través de la aplicación?
A Podrá llamar al cliente cuando haya una oferta que posiblemente le interese

B Podría ver dónde se encuentran sus clientes y supervisar sus comportamientos de compra

C Podría enviarles ofertas cuando ingresan a un área geográfica determinada

D En el carrito de compra de la aplicación, podría agregar los artículos que crea que serían interesantes para sus clientes

 

4¿Cuáles son los primeros pasos que deberías considerar al preparar una estrategia de negocio online?
A Entender al público objetivo

B Cambiar el enunciado de tu misión para que coincida con los objetivos

C Establecer tus objetivos y, también, identificar una PUV

D Definir y segmentar tus públicos

 

5Al definir una estrategia para tu empresa, ¿cómo puede ayudarte el análisis de la competencia a establecer una propuesta única de venta (PUV)?
A Puede permitirte ofrecer descuentos que compitan directamente con el precio de la competencia

B Puede identificar de qué manera tu oferta es diferente de la de la competencia

C Puede brindarte estadísticas más detalladas acerca del mercado y su enfoque

D Puede revelar en qué regiones adicionales podrías operar a fin de hacer crecer tu empresa

 

6¿Qué es lo que los informes de «Rastreo» de Google Search Console le permiten supervisar?
A Si los clientes potenciales pueden acceder a tus páginas web

B Si Google puede ver tus páginas web

C La forma en la que las personas interactúan con tu sitio web

D La información que Google registra sobre tu sitio

 

7Los motores de búsqueda ven el contenido de un sitio web como código escrito; ¿cómo puede ayudar a que los motores de búsqueda identifiquen las imágenes que hay en tu sitio web?
A Colócalas en el lugar correcto dentro de su texto B Haz que sean atractivas

C Aplícales las características que definen el desarrollo de la marca

D Asígnales nombres descriptivos

 

8A fin de mejorar el rendimiento del SEO de tu sitio web, ¿cuándo deberías considerar actualizar tu plan de SEO?
A Al escribir una nueva entrada de blog

B Cuando tengas una venta o promoción

C Cuando agregues un nuevo servicio o producto

D Cuando contrates personal nuevo

 

9Obtener vínculos externos a tu sitio web es una excelente manera de mejorar el rendimiento del SEO. ¿Qué recomendación alentará a las personas a que incluyan vínculos en sus páginas que redirijan a los usuarios a tu sitio?
A Pagar para que los demás coloquen vínculos en sus páginas que redirijan a los usuarios a tu sitio

B Redactar contenido excelente que les resulte útil a los usuarios

C Asegurarse de que tu personal coloque vínculos en las páginas que redirijan a los usuarios a tu sitio

D Agregar primero vínculos a ellos, independientemente de que tengan contenido interesante o no en su sitio

 

10Hay muchas formas de mejorar el rendimiento de un sitio web desde una perspectiva de SEO. En lo que respecta a la creación de vínculos,

¿cuál de los siguientes enunciados es verdadero?

A La cantidad de vínculos es importante, no así la calidad

B La calidad de los vínculos es importante, no así la cantidad

C Los vínculos ocultos dentro del código en los sitios mejoran su rendimiento de SEO

D Los vínculos ocultos dentro de las imágenes en los sitios mejoran su rendimiento de SEO

 

11Al anunciar en motores de búsqueda, si ofertas lo mismo que tu competidor,¿dónde aparecerás en comparación si tienes un nivel de calidad más alto?
A Junto al anuncio de tu competidor

B Debajo del anuncio de tu competidor

C En la página siguiente después del anuncio de tu competidor

D Encima del anuncio de tu competidor

 

12Completa el espacio en blanco: Al administrar campañas de SEM, la mejor manera de optimizar tu nivel de calidad es mejorar_________________________________________________________ de tus palabras claves, anuncios y páginas de destino.
A la relevancia

B la conversión

C los clics

D la importancia

 

13Si deseas hacer seguimiento de un pedido completado en tu sitio web,

¿cuál sería un lugar adecuado para agregar el código de seguimiento de conversiones?

A La página principal del sitio web

B La página de confirmación del pedido

C La página donde se encuentra el formulario del pedido

D La página de contacto

 

14Al ejecutar una campaña de marketing en motores de búsqueda, ¿qué objetivo te ayuda a cumplir el seguimiento de conversiones en tu sitio?
A Ver los datos personales del usuario que compró en tu sitio

B Entender qué es lo que funciona y lo que no

C Aumentar el presupuesto para obtener más tráfico

D Anunciar de manera internacional con mayor facilidad

 

15Si intentas promocionar tu empresa de manera local, ¿qué tres datos clave deberían estar presentes en tu ficha de directorio?
A Nombre de la empresa, dirección, número de teléfono

B Nombre personal, nombre de la empresa, código postal

C Nombre, casilla postal, número de teléfono de la línea gratuita

D Nombre de la empresa, director general, número de registro de la empresa

 

16¿Cuáles son los beneficios de utilizar las redes sociales cuando quieres anunciar tu empresa de forma local?

A Las personas confían en las empresas locales que están en las redes sociales

B Puedes orientar tus anuncios a un público local específico

C Puedes hacer anuncios de video para promocionar el área

D Las personas utilizan las redes sociales más que los motores de búsqueda

 

17Existen muchas plataformas de redes sociales, pero ¿cuál es el beneficio para tu empresa de utilizar las plataformas de redes más pequeñas y orientadas a un público más específico?
A Las personas que visitan las plataformas orientadas a un público más específico tienen más probabilidades de interactuar contigo

B Tu contenido se mostrará a públicos específicos

C Tu contenido lo verá una combinación de personas diferentes, lo que te permitirá obtener mayor cantidad de vistas y «me gusta»

D Mejora tu marca para que se vea en plataformas de redes sociales más específicas

 

18¿Qué tipo de herramienta puede utilizarse para supervisar y evaluar las acciones que el público de tus redes sociales lleva a cabo en tu sitio web?
A Herramientas para programación del contenido

B Herramientas para determinar el perfil del público

C Herramientas de analítica para las redes sociales

D “Herramientas analíticas de sitio web”

 

19Al crear un sitio web para una empresa, ¿qué tipo de diseño debería tener para que esté «optimizado para dispositivos móviles»?
A Un diseño a escala

B Un diseño visual

C Un diseño responsive

D Un diseño integrado

 

20Al diseñar campañas de publicidad para móviles, ¿qué recomendación darías para identificar a qué palabras clave orientar tus anuncios?

 

A Preguntarle a tu público qué busca cuando está mirando productos similares

B Utilizar las herramientas de Google o de Bing para investigar palabras clave

C Utilizar una herramienta para recolectar las palabras clave que usa la competencia

D Utilizar todas las palabras clave habituales de su sitio web en su cuenta publicitaria

 

21¿Cuál de las siguientes acciones sería la más efectiva para una empresa si desea avanzar en la consecución de sus objetivos de marketing de contenido?
A Personalizar el contenido para hacer que cada cliente se sienta importante, con los datos disponibles sobre cada cliente en particular

B Reducir la cantidad de canales que se utilizan para el marketing de contenido a solo aquellos con la mayor cantidad de referencias, lo que te permitirá ahorrar dinero

C Identificar a los públicos que ven el contenido y asegurarse de orientar los anuncios a esos públicos específicos en el futuro, con el objetivo de aumentar las ventas.

D Definir mejor la estrategia de marketing de contenido sobre la marcha y tener en cuenta los datos y las métricas disponibles.

 

22En lo que respecta al marketing por correo electrónico, ¿qué significa el término prueba A/B?
A Una prueba A/B es aquella en la que puedes dividir tus contactos alfabéticamente

B Una prueba A/B es aquella en la que puedes enviar el mismo correo electrónico dos veces a las mismas personas

C Una prueba A/B es aquella en la que puedes dividir tu público en grupos y enviarle a cada grupo una variante diferente de correo electrónico

D Una prueba A/B es aquella en la que se corrige el contenido y la ortografía del mensaje antes de enviarlo

 

23Al planificar tu publicidad gráfica, ¿qué significa la palabra «posición»?
A La ubicación exacta de tu anuncio en una página específica de un sitio web

B El tamaño y la posición de tu anuncio

C La ubicación exacta de tu anuncio en las páginas de resultados de los motores de búsqueda

D La posición del texto dentro de tu anuncio

 

24Cuando los anunciantes publican anuncios online que típicamente incluyen una imagen en la que las personas deben hacer clic, ¿qué nombre recibe?
A Optimización por motores de búsqueda

B Publicidad en banners

C Publicidad gráfica

D Publicidad en páginas web

 

25En relación con la publicidad gráfica, ¿qué es una red de publicidad?
A Una forma de obtener tráfico gratuito hacia tu sitio

B Un directorio con muchos sitios web que venden los mismos productos que tú

C Una tienda online con imágenes que puedes usar en tu contenido

D Una plataforma que permite a los anunciantes publicar en los sitios web de la red

 

26¿De qué manera puede beneficiarse tu empresa con el uso de un vídeo sin que tengas que realizarlo tú mismo?
A Anunciar en los vídeos de otras personas

B Comentar los vídeos de otras personas

C Compartir los vídeos de otras personas

D Interactuar con los vídeos de otras personas

 

27Si la analítica de tu campaña de vídeo muestra que las personas solo miran los primeros segundos del mismo, ¿qué puedes hacer para intentar corregirlo?
A Cambiar los colores para que sean visualmente más atractivos

B Cambiar la cantidad de tiempo que se muestra tu marca en el vídeo

C Actualizar la descripción para que las personas tengan más información sobre el vídeo

D Borrar el vídeo y probar nuevamente con contenido editado

 

28Cuando usas la analítica en tu sitio web, ¿qué significa el término «conversión»?

 

A El acto que implica que un usuario povenga de una ubicación geográfica determinada

B El acto que implica que un usuario permanezca una determinada cantidad de tiempo en el sitio

C El acto que implica que un usuario cumpla una métrica específica

D El acto que implica que un usuario alcance un objetivo

 

29En el ámbito de la analítica, ¿qué tipo de dato sería el tiempo que un usuario permaneció en su sitio?
A Conversión

B Tiempo

C Métrica

D Dimensión

 

30¿Qué te permite hacer la analítica del sitio web?
A Configurar las cuentas publicitarias para impulsar la mejora continua

B Entender el comportamiento de los usuarios y mejorar la efectividad de tus iniciativas en marketing digital

C Interactuar con los clientes en tu sitio web para aumentar las conversiones

D Predecir el movimiento que harán tus usuarios a continuación según los datos previos

 

31Completa el espacio en blanco: Cuando vinculas Google Ads con Google Analytics, puedes entender qué__________ están impulsando el rendimiento.
A palabras clave orgánicas

B anuncios de redes sociales

C palabras clave de pago

D directorios

 

32Al crear una presentación basada en una gran cantidad de datos, ¿qué principio deberías tener presente?
A Mostrar toda la información disponible, a fin de ofrecerle al público la mayor cantidad de contexto posible

B Adaptar tu enfoque a tu público, a fin de contar una mejor historia

C Utilizar únicamente gráficos visuales, ya que todos prefieren ese formato de presentación en lugar de las tablas y el texto

D Presentar toda la información de la misma forma, ya que todas las personas interpretan los datos de manera similar

 

33¿Cuál es el beneficio de usar datos digitales?
A Puede ayudarte a tomar decisiones bien fundamentadas y a mejorar el rendimiento online

B Los datos digitales no tienen margen de error

C Los datos digitales te permiten ahorrar dinero en la analítica sin conexión

D Utilizar datos digitales te permite llegar a más clientes automáticamente

 

34Al crear tu tienda de productos online, a fin de hacerla lo más efectiva posible, ¿qué tipo de uso de imágenes te permitiría optimizar su rendimiento?
A Usar imágenes directamente de Internet a fin de garantizar un tamaño de archivo adecuado

B Usar imágenes directamente del proveedor original

C Asegurarte de que las imágenes sean de alta calidad

D Usar descripciones detalladas en lugar de imágenes para facilitar la tarea a los motores de búsqueda

 

35¿Cuál de los siguientes no es un beneficio para las empresas que utilizan plataformas de comercio electrónico totalmente integradas?
A Control de stock

B Facturación integrada

C La capacidad de hacer un seguimiento de los envíos

D Sistema de procesamiento automático de reclamaciones

 

36Una manera de intentar aumentar las ventas de productos en tu sitio web es_________.
A enviar varios correos electrónicos de seguimiento una vez que un usuario realizó una compra

B mostrarles anuncios de remarketing a los usuarios con una variedad de productos

C ofrecerle al cliente sugerencias de compra relevantes

D incluir una ventana emergente en tu sitio web en la que los usuarios deban hacer alguna acción para continuar

 

37Completa el espacio en blanco: Si estás considerando el diseño de las páginas de productos, es importante ordenarlas según ________
A su precio

B su jerarquía

C un orden aleatorio

D su orden alfabético

 

38Completa los espacios en blanco: Al anunciar a nivel internacional, debes hacer que tu empresa sea________ para el nuevo mercado y debes tener en cuenta ______ y todas las posibles implicaciones________.
A accesible | la cadena de abastecimiento | legales

B asequible | la cadena de abastecimiento | relacionadas con el idioma

C atractiva | las necesidades de los clientes | monetarias

D asequible | las necesidades del cliente | legales

 

39Si estás buscando expandir la presencia online de tu empresa al ámbito internacional, ¿cuál de las siguientes opciones considerarías respecto de tu contenido online?
A Traducción del contenido únicamente mediante una herramienta automática

B Traducción, pero también adaptación del contenido para el público local

C Traducción al idioma nativo

D Conservación del contenido en el idioma original, sin traducción

 

40Completa el espacio en blanco: Al considerar la ampliación de una empresa al ámbito internacional, lo primero que debes hacer es __________.
A utilizar herramientas online que te ayuden a entender dónde hay una demanda fuerte de tus productos

B trasladar toda la empresa a ese país

C duplicar tu empresa actual en tantos países como te sea posible

D comprar nuevos dominios para el país

 

41La analítica web puede brindarte muchos indicadores respecto de tu rendimiento online, pero ¿qué es lo que las herramientas de analítica no indican?
A Lo que hacen tus clientes en tu sitio web

B De dónde vienen tus clientes antes de visitar tu sitio web

C A dónde van tus clientes después de dejar tu sitio web

D Lo que buscan tus clientes en tu sitio web

 

42Los sitios web se alojan en un servidor y cada uno de estos servidores tiene su propia dirección IP única. ¿Qué significa la sigla «IP»?
A Posición en Internet

B Posicionamiento en Internet

C Privatización de Internet

D Protocolo de Internet

 

43Observas que, cuando las personas ven imágenes de tus productos online, experimentas un aumento en las conversiones o las ventas.

¿Qué punto de contacto con los clientes podrías utilizar para aprovechar esta estadística?

A Bolsas de compra

B Contenido del blog

C YouTube

D Redes sociales

 

44¿Cuál es el término que usamos para describir la forma en que los motores de búsqueda categorizan el contenido?
A Listado

B Rastreo

C Indexación

D Clasificación

 

45Al clasificar los sitios web en las páginas de resultados de los motores de búsqueda, ¿qué elemento de un sitio web es el que los motores de búsqueda valoran más?

 

A La longitud del contenido de la página

B Si se mencionan palabras clave más de 50 veces en un contenido breve

C Contenido único, atractivo, relevante

D En qué lugar del mundo te encuentras al agregar contenido a tu sitio

 

46Al optimizar un sitio web para la búsqueda, ¿qué impacto tienen las metaetiquetas y las etiquetas de título en el motor de búsqueda?
A Son mensajes ocultos que no tienen efecto alguno en los motores de búsqueda

B Constituyen el contenido de página que aparece en tu página principal y les indican a los motores de búsqueda lo que tú haces

C Se generan de manera automática y ayudan en la clasificación de los sitios web dentro de los motores de búsqueda

D Son mensajes incorporados que ayudan a que el motor de búsqueda determine lo que hay en la página

 

47Si te anuncias utilizando el marketing en motores de búsqueda (SEM), ¿en cuál de los siguientes casos debes pagar?
A Cuando tu anuncio aparece dentro de los resultados de la búsqueda

B Cuando se produce una conversión en tu sitio web

C Cuando una persona hace clic en tu anuncio

D Cuando alguien permanece en tu sitio web durante más de 2 minutos

 

48¿Qué búsqueda haría que se muestre un anuncio basado en esta palabra clave: [fotógrafo de retratos de Madrid]?
A Madrid fotógrafo de retratos

B Fotógrafo de Madrid

C Fotógrafo de retratos de Madrid

D Fotógrafos de Madrid

 

49¿Qué es lo más importante que debes considerar al optimizar una campaña de marketing en motores de búsqueda?
A Aumentar la oferta para las palabras clave a las que se orienta la campaña

B Aumentar la relevancia de las palabras clave, los anuncios y la página de destino

C Agregar muchas palabras clave a la campaña para obtener más tráfico

D Cambiar continuamente el texto del anuncio

 

50Si buscas destacar tu presencia local online, ¿qué información deberías asegurarte de que figure en tu sitio web como mínimo?
A Redes sociales

B Un mapa interactivo

C Los detalles de tu ubicación física

D El número de registro de tu empresa

 

51¿Por qué es importante llegar a los clientes en sus dispositivos móviles cuando te anuncias de manera local?
A Las personas utilizan sus teléfonos estén donde estén

B Los anuncios son más pequeños en los dispositivos móviles y, por lo tanto, más económicos

C Las personas prefieren recibir anuncios en sus dispositivos móviles

D Todas las personas tienen un teléfono móvil

 

52Las aplicaciones para dispositivos móviles constituyen una excelente herramienta para interactuar con los clientes estén donde estén. ¿Cuál es uno de los principales beneficios de tener una aplicación para dispositivos móviles en comparación con un sitio web?
A Las aplicaciones te permiten enviar notificaciones push

B Es muy fácil acceder a las aplicaciones en la tienda de aplicaciones

C Las aplicaciones suelen funcionar en más dispositivos móviles

D Las aplicaciones le permiten reunir más datos sobre tus clientes

 

53Si quieres anunciar tu empresa entre los usuarios de dispositivos móviles, ¿por cuál de los siguientes motivos puede ser realmente eficaz la publicidad en las redes sociales?
A Te permite orientar tus anuncios a las personas que tienen bloqueadores de anuncios habilitados

B Pueden verla personas que no han accedido a tus cuentas

C Te permite orientar tus anuncios a las personas según sus intereses y gustos

D Resulta económico difundir ampliamente tus anuncios

 

54¿Cuál de los siguientes es un beneficio central que el marketing de contenido puede aportar para la presencia online de una empresa?
A Puede mejorar las ventas mediante el direccionamiento de más cantidad de tráfico a tu sitio web

B Puede permitir que una empresa cree un banco de contenido, el cual puede reutilizarse para crear anuncios

C Ayuda a que una empresa identifique a sus principales competidores

D Le ofrece otro canal donde promover regularmente sus ventas y difundir mensajes promocionales entre sus clientes

 

55¿Cuál de los siguientes es un beneficio de la publicidad gráfica en comparación con la publicidad en búsqueda?
A La publicidad gráfica es más económica que la publicidad en búsqueda

B Los anuncios se muestran en sitios web relevantes que ofrecen espacio publicitario

C Los anuncios pueden aparecer en la parte superior de las páginas de resultados de los motores de búsqueda

D Hay más probabilidades de que los usuarios hagan clic en los anuncios gráficos que en los anuncios de búsqueda

 

56¿Cuál de los siguientes es un beneficio de la publicidad en búsqueda en comparación con la publicidad gráfica?
A Hay más probabilidades de que los usuarios hagan clic en los anuncios de búsqueda que en los anuncios gráficos

B La publicidad en búsqueda es más económica que la publicidad gráfica

C La publicidad en búsqueda permite crear los anuncios en distintos formatos

D La publicidad en búsqueda se muestra a los clientes que buscan sus términos específicos

 

57Al crear contenido de marketing de vídeo dentro de un presupuesto establecido, ¿qué es lo primero que deberías considerar?
A Grabar tanto como puedas y seleccionar el contenido después

B Buscar un software de edición

C Buscar al equipo que utilizarás

D Planificar su contenido

 

58¿Cómo puedes atraer a los usuarios de redes sociales para que compartan online el contenido de tus vídeos?
A Puedes etiquetarlos en sus publicaciones

B Puedes usar hashtags

C Puedes hacer que sean graciosos

D Puedes usar subtítulos

 

59En lo que respecta a la analítica web, ¿qué estadísticas puedes obtener mediante las herramientas de analítica?
A Los sitios web que los usuarios visitan después de dejar el tuyo

B La clasificación actual que tu sitio tiene en los motores de búsqueda

C La forma en la que las personas interactúan con tu sitio web

D La forma en la que las personas interactúan con los sitios web de la competencia

 

60¿Cómo administrarías los datos analíticos para obtener más estadísticas respecto al comportamiento de tu público?
A Partición

B Muestra

C Segmento

D Extracto

 

61¿Por qué deberías evitar centrarte en reunir la mayor cantidad de datos posible?
A Las grandes cantidades de datos tardan mucho tiempo en procesarse

B Es más difícil almacenar online grandes cantidades de datos

C Es más valioso contar con la información adecuada en el momento adecuado

D Las hojas de cálculo tienen un límite respecto de la cantidad de información que pueden almacenar

 

62Si buscas introducir funciones de comercio electrónico en tu sitio web, ¿cuál de los siguientes sería el mejor primer paso?
A Crear una tienda online con un sistema de pago integrado

B Configurar un software de transferencia de dinero basado en la Web, como PayPal

C Invertir en una nueva plataforma para el sitio web

D Utilizar otras plataformas, como eBay o Etsy

 

63¿Para cuál de las siguientes opciones la analítica puede ayudar a optimizar tu sitio web?
A Para diferentes dispositivos, la navegación y la búsqueda

B Para diferentes dispositivos y perfiles de redes sociales

C Para las plantillas de correo electrónico y los perfiles de redes sociales

D Para la navegación y las campañas de vídeo y de Búsqueda

 

64Al considerar la ampliación de una empresa al ámbito internacional en los medios sociales, ¿qué es lo primero que debes hacer?
A Utilizar software de traducción para traducir tus publicaciones

B Utilizar frases y memes populares para esa área

C Utilizar las plataformas de medios sociales que son populares en esa área

D Utilizar anuncios de pago en medios sociales

 

65Al planificar tu sitio web, ¿qué aspecto clave deberías considerar?
A El orden en el que aparecerán tus productos en la web

B Lo que quieres que tus clientes hagan en la web

C La forma en la que los clientes interactuarán con la web

D Lo que tus clientes quieren ver en la web

 

66Al diseñar contenido como parte de tu estrategia de marketing de contenido, ¿qué representa la etapa «Pensar» en el marco «Ver, Pensar, Hacer y Cuidar»?
A La fase de consideración, cuando los clientes comienzan a investigar sobre posibles productos para comprar

B La etapa de finanzas, cuando los clientes piensan en su presupuesto

C La etapa de acción, el momento en el que los clientes se comprometen con su producto y efectúan la compra

D La etapa de uso compartido, cuando los clientes comparten imágenes y comentarios sobre tus productos

 

67Complete el espacio en blanco: «Los motores de búsqueda _________Internet para descubrir contenido».
A indexan

B rastrean

C investigan

D clasifican

 

68¿Cuál es el primer paso en el proceso de optimización por motores de búsqueda para tu sitio web?
A La optimización fuera del sitio

B La investigación de palabras clave

C La redacción de contenido nuevo

D La definición de un presupuesto publicitario

 

69Si deseas optimizar el rendimiento de un sitio web para mejorar su clasificación en los motores de búsqueda, ¿qué puedes conseguir si utilizas «términos de palabras clave específicas» en tu plan de SEO con frecuencia?
A Mejorar la clasificación de muchas otras empresas más grandes y más establecidas

B Encontrar más oportunidades

C Obtener más tráfico que con las palabras clave generales

D Tener un mejor rendimiento en las redes sociales

 

 

70¿Cuál de los siguientes es un beneficio del marketing en motores de búsqueda (SEM)?
A Llegar a los clientes potenciales que buscan activamente su producto o servicio

B Crear diferentes tipos de formatos de anuncios para mostrarles a los clientes potenciales

C Orientar los anuncios a las personas según sus intereses y hábitos

D El SEM es mucho más económico que otros medios publicitarios

 

71Utilizar las redes sociales para fines comerciales puede ser muy diferente de utilizar perfiles personales. Si estás buscando atraer personas a tu red social, ¿qué tono de voz deberías considerar?
A Rígido y serio

B Serio y franco

C Divertido y accesible

D Atractivo y accesible

 

72Si buscas promocionar una empresa en las redes sociales, ¿cuál es una buena manera de incrementar rápidamente sus seguidores o la participación del publico en las redes sociales?
A Usar la publicidad de pago

B Pagar para tener seguidores

C Seguir a todos los seguidores de la competencia

D Hacer un uso excesivo de los hashtags

 

73¿Qué forma de orientación utilizarías para mostrarles anuncios a las personas que ya visitaron tu sitio web con anterioridad?
A Publicidad en búsqueda

B Recaptación

C Reanuncio

D Reorientación

 

74¿Por qué es importante que establezcas objetivos al planificar tus campañas de anuncios gráficos?
A Para ayudar a determinar la mejor manera de reunir los datos de los consumidores

B Para ayudar a determinar el rendimiento y permitir la optimización

C Para ayudar a determinar dónde se invertirá tu presupuesto

D Para ayudar a determinar el rendimiento de la competencia

 

75Al utilizar programas de analítica en tu sitio web, ¿cuál de las siguientes opciones no corresponde a la categoría de una dimensión?
A El dispositivo que utilizan los usuarios para acceder al sitio

B El tiempo que un usuario permanece en el sitio

C El navegador que utiliza un usuario para visitar el sitio

D La ubicación geográfica del usuario

 

76Si un usuario abandona su carrito de la compra sin realizarla, ¿de qué manera puedes hacer que vuelva para que la complete?
A Mediante la publicidad de SEM

B Mediante los anuncios en redes sociales

C Mediante la reorientación

D Mediante las campañas por correo electrónico

 

77¿Cuáles son las tres consideraciones clave que debes tener en cuenta al evaluar palabras clave para la optimización por motores de búsqueda?
A Competencia, coherencia, relevancia

B Frecuencia, competencia, relevancia

C Relevancia, coherencia, ejecución

D Frecuencia, ejecución, relevancia

 

78Muchos son los factores que pueden afectar la clasificación de un sitio web en los motores de búsqueda ¿Qué función cumplen los metadatos en este proceso?
A Ayudan a que tu sitio web se diferencie de la competencia

B Le permiten ingresar muchas palabras clave para que tu sitio aparezca con todas ellas

C Brindan información más clara y uniforme a los motores de búsqueda sobre lo que hay en el sitio web

D Permiten colocar ofertas con promociones de ventas dentro de los resultados de la búsqueda

 

79Si buscas promocionar tus productos y servicios de manera local,¿cuáles son los beneficios de utilizar los anuncios en los motores de búsqueda?
A Todas las personas utilizan motores de búsqueda

B Puedes orientar tus anuncios a un área geográfica específica

C Puedes orientar tus anuncios a un género específico

D Los anuncios de búsqueda son más económicos que los anuncios gráficos

 

80¿Por qué las redes sociales son una herramienta excelente para que tu empresa fortalezca la confianza y la participación de tu público?
A Puedes compartir ofertas y descuentos exclusivamente con tus seguidores

B Puedes compartir blogs de otras empresas para cubrir más de lo que haces tú solamente

C Puedes compartir opiniones sinceras sobre tus productos o servicios

D Puedes conectarte con los clientes en cualquier momento del día

 

81Preparar un plan te ayudará a concentrar tus esfuerzos al utilizar las redes sociales. ¿Qué deberías considerar cuando preparas un plan de redes sociales?
A Los datos de tu público

B Los intereses de tu público

C Los ingresos de tu público

D El comportamiento de tu público sin conexión

 

82En lo que respecta a los dispositivos móviles, ¿cómo definirías la usabilidad?
A El tiempo que un visitante permanece navegando por tu sitio

B La experiencia de un visitante en tu sitio

C El tiempo general que un visitante permanece en tu sitio

D El propósito de un visitante mientras permanece en tu sitio

 

83Si buscas crear contenido de video para tu estrategia de marketing,¿qué tres recomendaciones deberías incluir?
A Ser breve, técnico y, también, incluir una llamada a la acción

B Ser relevante, breve y entretenido

C Ser breve, entretenido y, también, incluir una llamada a la acción

D Ser breve, relevante y, también, incluir una llamada a la acción

 

84Dado que los intervalos de atención online son más cortos, es importante contar con una excelente frase inicial o ‘gancho’ para hacer que las personas se interesen. ¿A qué recomendación hace referencia este ejemplo?
A Redactar texto online atractivo

B Tener siempre presente al público objetivo

C Comprender cuál es el recorrido del usuario

D Usar un enfoque coherente para el texto

 

85Al utilizar la publicidad gráfica, ¿qué podrías incluir en un anuncio para lograr el objetivo de generar más ventas?
A Promociones y ofertas especiales

B Mensajes personalizados

C Información específica de la ubicación

D Información detallada y fotografías de los productos

 

86¿Cuál de las siguientes es una estrategia clave para distribuir tu contenido de vídeo?
A Compartir vídeos en todas tus herramientas de marketing digital

B Elegir un lugar principal para compartir tu contenido de vídeo

C Confiar en que las recomendaciones boca a boca generarán tráfico hacia tus vídeos

D Enviar una tarjeta postal a las listas de distribución relevantes

 

87¿Qué es una hoja de cálculo?
A Una aplicación informática interactiva para la organización, el análisis y el almacenamiento de datos

B Una colección estática de tablas con datos relacionados que puede consultarse para encontrar campos específicos

C Una herramienta para almacenar grandes cantidades de datos numéricos, pero no datos de texto

D Una hoja de saldos digital para llevar el seguimiento de las transacciones financieras

 

88Al usar un motor de búsqueda, ¿cómo se llama una palabra o frase que alguien escribe para encontrar algo online?

 

A Frase de búsqueda

B Término de búsqueda

C Búsqueda

D Palabra de búsqueda

 

89Los usamos todos los días, pero ¿cuál es el propósito general de los motores de búsqueda?
A Posicionar los sitios web según su popularidad

B Mostrar los sitios web en orden aleatorio para aumentar el tráfico del sitio

C Garantizar que todas las empresas obtengan igual cantidad de visitas a su sitio

D Ayudar a que el usuario encuentre la respuesta más relevante para su búsqueda

 

90¿Qué puede lograr si divides tu cuenta de marketing en motores de búsqueda en campañas y grupos de anuncios relevantes?
A Puedes generar más tráfico a tu sitio web

B Puedes orientar tu campaña a más personas en diferentes partes del mundo

C Puedes garantizar que las personas vean anuncios relevantes que se relacionan con su búsqueda

D Puedes dejar de usar palabras clave negativas

 

91Dado que cada vez más usuarios utilizan los dispositivos móviles para mirar los sitios web, es clave que optimices tu sitio paras que los usuarios puedan encontrarlo cuando buscan online. ¿Qué dos elementos debería optimizar para tener un mejor rendimiento de SEO?
A La velocidad del sitio y su usabilidad

B Las palabras clave y los metadatos

C El tamaño de las imágenes y la navegación

D La velocidad del sitio y su apariencia visual

 

92¿Dónde se encuentra principalmente el nombre del dominio de un sitio web?
A En la URL

B En la codificación de la imagen del encabezado

C En el menú de navegación

D En el hipervínculo del logotipo

 

93¿Qué símbolo utilizarías para cambiar una palabra clave de concordancia amplia a una de concordancia de frase con el fin de mejorar tus anuncios de búsqueda de pago?
A Comillas

B Apóstrofos

C Cursiva

D Corchetes

 

94¿Cómo se clasifica el canal que utiliza el marketing y el alcance de influencias para aumentar el alcance visible de una marca?
A De pago

B Propio

C Obtenido

D Publicado

 

95¿Cuál es uno de los beneficios de usar plantillas para tus campañas de marketing por correo electrónico?
A Puede reutilizar la misma plantilla

B Son siempre gratuitas

C Puede duplicar el diseño de tu sitio web

D Las plantillas funcionan mejor en los dispositivos móviles

 

96¿Cuál de las siguientes es la analogía más precisa de una red de publicidad gráfica?
A Una opción de orientación para los editores

B Un mercado de anunciantes y editores online

C Un sistema de pagos para las campañas publicitarias online

D Una opción de orientación para los anunciantes

 

97¿Qué puedes hacer para ayudar a que tus vídeos aparezcan en los resultados de la búsqueda?

 

A Hacer que el contenido sea realmente interesante

B Ofrecer descripciones detalladas del contenido

C Desarrollar su marca claramente en los vídeos

D Incluir llamadas a la acción dentro de los vídeos

 

98Al utilizar las herramientas de analítica basadas en la Web, ¿cuál de los siguientes objetivos podrás lograr mediante la segmentación de los datos?
A Realizar mayores ofertas dentro de tu cuenta publicitaria de SEM

B Encontrar estadísticas que puedan ayudarte a identificar dónde realizar mejoras

C Crear mejores perfiles en las redes sociales

D Publicar anuncios en otros países del mundo

 

99Los servidores donde se alojan los sitios web tienen su propia dirección IP única; ¿en qué consiste esta dirección?
A Números y letras

B Números

C Letras

D Letras y símbolos

 

100¿Cuál de los siguientes resultados obtendrás si incluyes una oferta en un anuncio de marketing en motores de búsqueda (SEM)?
A Ayudará a que el anuncio se destaque y animará a las personas a que hagan clic en él

B Garantizará que el anuncio aparezca en la parte superior de los resultados de la búsqueda

C Aumentará la cantidad de usuarios en todo tu sitio web

D Puede aumentar el nivel de calidad de tu anuncio

 

101Los directorios locales son una herramienta excelente para destacar tu presencia local online. ¿Cuál sería el primer paso para usar un directorio?
A Investigar a la competencia

B Crear una ficha

C Crear un anuncio

D Publicar un vínculo

 

102¿Cuáles de los siguientes factores pueden afectar el porcentaje de mensajes abiertos de tus campañas por correo electrónico?
A La cantidad de vínculos que hay en el correo electrónico

B La cantidad de imágenes que hay en tu correo electrónico

C La oportunidad que tienen los clientes de cancelar la suscripción

D La línea de asunto del correo electrónico

 

103En el ámbito de la analítica, ¿qué tipo de dato sería el seguimiento del tipo de dispositivo que el usuario utilizó para acceder a tu sitio?
A Conversión

B Dimensión

C Acceso

D Métrica

 

104La publicidad para móviles es una herramienta excelente para los especialistas en marketing, pero todo ese trabajo podría perderse si tu sitio web no responde a cuál de las siguientes condiciones:
A Está optimizado para distintos dispositivos

B Es visualmente atractivo

C Está lleno de información relevante

D Tiene gran contenido de texto

 

105Cuando consideras que tu empresa tenga presencia en la Web, ¿cuál de los siguientes no es un factor importante?
A La tecnología

B El coste

C El alcance

D El tiempo desde el que tu empresa está en actividad

 

106Completa el espacio en blanco: En lo que respecta a promocionar una empresa de forma local, los motores de búsqueda pueden_______________ tu empresa en la página de resultados de búsqueda si el usuario se encuentra cerca de tu ubicación.
A priorizar

B destacar

C ocultar

D promocionar

 

107¿Cuál de las siguientes opciones podría describirse como un buen objetivo comercial para tus campañas de redes sociales?
A Aumentar la motivación del personal

B Aumentar la participación del público

C Aumentar la satisfacción del cliente

D Aumentar las ganancias generales

 

108Completa el espacio en blanco: En el ámbito de la publicidad gráfica, el remarketing es una manera de_________.
A pagar menos por clic que con los anuncios de SEM estándares

B mostrar los anuncios a las personas antes de que visiten tu sitio web

C mostrar los anuncios a las personas después de que visitaron tu sitio web

D mostrar una ventana emergente en tu sitio web cuando las personas lo visitan

 

109Al utilizar programas de analítica en tu sitio web, ¿cuál de las siguientes opciones no corresponde a la categoría de una métrica?
A El navegador que utilizan los usuarios para acceder a tu sitio

B Los visitantes únicos de tu sitio

C El tiempo que los usuarios permanecen en tu sitio

D La cantidad de páginas vistas en cada visita

 

110Si deseas aumentar la presencia de un sitio web, preparar un plan de optimización por motores de búsqueda te ayudará a planificar qué pasos seguir. ¿Qué actividad estaría primera en la lista?
A Elegir qué imágenes publicar en el sitio web

B Registrar todos los perfiles sociales que utilizarás para la empresa

C Buscar personas que coloquen vínculos en sus páginas que dirijan a los usuarios a tu sitio web

D Investigar sobre palabras clave

 

111Completa el espacio en blanco: Al optimizar las campañas de SEM, las palabras clave negativas_________ que tus anuncios aparezcan cuando las personas buscan términos que no son relevantes para tu empresa.
A evitan

B garantizan

C aumentan las probabilidades de

D reducen las probabilidades de

 

112Completa el espacio en blanco: Cuando los motores de búsqueda usan factores tales como términos de búsqueda basados en la ubicación, la ubicación geográfica y la dirección IP para obtener resultados adaptados geográficamente, esto se llama______________.
A búsqueda local

B búsqueda geográfica

C búsqueda móvil

D búsqueda orgánica

 

113En lo que respecta a las métricas de marketing por correo electrónico, ¿cuál de las siguientes estadísticas destaca la tasa de clics (CTR)?
A Porcentaje de personas que hicieron una compra después de haber recibido el correo electrónico

B Porcentaje de personas del total de los destinatarios que abrieron el correo electrónico

C Porcentaje de personas del total de los destinatarios que hicieron clic en un vínculo en el correo electrónico

D Porcentaje de personas a las que se les envió el correo electrónico en comparación con el total de conversiones realizadas

 

114¿Qué beneficios obtienen las empresas que usan la analítica en su sitio web?
A Pueden ver de dónde proviene el público

B Pueden ver una lista de las páginas que no le gustan a su público C Pueden ver a dónde van sus clientes después de dejar su sitio

D Pueden ver por qué su público visita su sitio

 

115Cuando estás construyendo un sitio web para tu empresa, ¿cuál es la finalidad de un servidor?
A La administración de tu sitio web

B El alojamiento de tu sitio web

C La promoción de tu sitio web

D La protección de tu sitio web

 

116El marketing digital no trata solo de vender tus productos a nivel internacional. También puede tener muy buenos resultados para las empresas locales. ¿Qué significa «empresas locales»?
A Una empresa que opera desde una ubicación geográfica específica

B Una empresa que se encuentra dentro de un radio de 5 km del cliente

C Una empresa que está en una comunidad desde hace más de 5 años

D Una empresa que solo ofrece productos basados en servicio

 

117¿Qué te permite el retargeting?
A Orientarte a los usuarios según las acciones específicas que realizan en tu sitio

B Orientarte a las personas según sus intereses y gustos

C Aparecer más arriba dentro de los resultados de la búsqueda

D Orientarte a las personas antes de que visiten tu sitio web

 

 

Respuestas al examen de certificación Fundamentos de Marketing Digital Google Activate

 

 

 

Respuestas de Evaluación de Propiedad del contenido de Youtube

Por

Respuestas de Evaluación de Propiedad del contenido de Youtube

Respuestas de Propiedad del contenido de Youtube

Más información sobre la certificación en: skillshop.exceedlms.com/student/path/8299-propiedad-del-contenido

Youtube Content Ownership Assessment Exam Answers 100% score

 

 

¿Qué tres métricas pueden ayudarte a evaluar el rendimiento?

Dispositivo, vistas y ubicación de la reproducción

Vistas, ingresos y subtítulos

Comentarios, vistas y tiempo de reproducción

Geografía, datos demográficos y tiempo de reproducción

 

Un socio decide usar una política de seguimiento para reclamar los videos que otros usuarios subieron. ¿A qué datos del video tendrá acceso el socio?

Los ingresos provenientes de anuncios que se muestran en el video

Los minutos del tiempo de reproducción sumados al total de su cuenta

Los datos de Analytics sobre el video

Las vistas del video reclamado que se agregan a las de su propia versión del video

 

¿Qué sección del CMS proporciona acceso a las herramientas automáticas de YouTube para la administración de derechos?

Administrador de videos

Creator Studio

Identificación de videos

Content ID

 

Un socio posee los derechos de un video en España, pero no en otras regiones. Este sube el video a su canal de YouTube, pero no está seguro de qué configuración usar. ¿Qué le recomendarías que haga?

Solo configurar la propiedad del activo en España

Configurar la propiedad del activo en España y «Bloquear fuera de la propiedad» para el reclamo

Configurar la propiedad del activo para todos los países y establecer una política de coincidencias que lo bloquee fuera de España No asignar la propiedad hasta que el socio obtenga los derechos internacionales

 

¿Qué necesitas para usar una obra con derechos de autor de otra persona en tu video?

Permiso explícito del propietario de los derechos de autor Mostrar el nombre completo del propietario en los créditos finales Un vínculo a la obra original en los metadatos

Una referencia en la pantalla al comienzo del video

 

¿Qué debes hacer si encuentras un video de YouTube que muestra actos nocivos o peligrosos?

Denunciar el video con la acción Marcar

Nada, debido a la libertad de expresión

Enviarle un correo electrónico a la persona que subió el video

Enviar una solicitud de eliminación por el incumplimiento de los derechos de autor

 

¿Cuál de las siguientes opciones describe con precisión la manera en que se aplican los derechos de autor a un video de remix o mashup?

Se pueden considerar obras derivadas de acuerdo con la ley y es posible que necesites permiso de los creadores del contenido original.

La ley de derechos de autor actual no contempla estas categorías de contenido, por lo que su aplicación es poco clara. Se consideran obras originales, por lo que los derechos de autor te pertenecerían a ti.

Se encuentran protegidos por el uso legítimo y no necesitas permiso de los creadores del contenido original.

 

¿Cómo puede ayudarte el Centro de derechos de autor de YouTube en relación con los derechos de autor?

Te asesora en relación con un video específico.

Ofrece recursos de administración de derechos de autor y responde preguntas frecuentes.

Te conecta con la persona que subió el video infractor.

Contiene herramientas para que quites de inmediato los videos que infringen alguna ley.

 

Tienes un conflicto de propiedad sobre un activo porque declaraste accidentalmente tener derechos de propiedad en Canadá. ¿Qué debes hacer?

Quitar la propiedad del activo para Canadá

Editar tu propiedad si deseas monetizar el activo Descargar el Informe de propiedad y filtrar por Canadá

Comunicarte con el otro propietario del activo para solicitar una actualización

 

¿Cómo le explicarías qué es una política a un socio que desea controlar su contenido en YouTube?

Es el marco de trabajo legal de YouTube para la administración de infracciones relacionadas con derechos de autor. Son instrucciones sobre los formatos de anuncios que deben aparecer en los videos.

Es un conjunto de reglas que especifican si un video reclamado se debe Monetizar, Seguir o Bloquear.

Es similar a una licencia. Da permiso para que otras personas reutilicen el contenido en Internet.

 

¿Cuál de las siguientes opciones es una ventaja de filtrar los datos para el análisis?

Identificar datos estadísticos atípicos

Agrupar datos en porciones útiles

Ocultar la información no relevante

Ordenarlos por nivel de importancia

 

¿Cuáles son las consecuencias de no configurar una política de coincidencias en tus activos o de configurar una incorrecta?

Puede impedir que controles y monetices los videos subidos por usuarios que contengan tu material protegido por derechos de autor.

Puede impedir que ajustes la configuración de privacidad de los videos.

Puede provocar una impugnación de la política por parte de otro propietario del contenido. Puede causar que tu canal reciba una advertencia para socios.

 

Un miembro de tu empresa no conoce la definición del término «activo» en el contexto de YouTube. ¿Cómo se lo explicarías?

Es una política que se aplica a un video, una canción o una composición.

Es un contenedor de información sobre un elemento de propiedad intelectual.

Es similar a un video que se sube a un canal.

Es el vínculo entre un video de YouTube y su valor monetario.

 

Un usuario impugna un reclamo por la música de fondo de su video. ¿Qué ocurre con este reclamo si seleccionas «Restablecer»?

Se envía a la junta de revisión de terceros para una investigación manual.

El usuario que subió el contenido recibe un aviso por infringir las Condiciones de uso. Se mantiene el reclamo, pero pasa al estado «nulo».

El reclamo se vuelve a activar y la política del socio se aplica al video.

 

¿Qué función o filtro puede ayudarte a investigar por qué dos videos de la misma duración tienen diferentes métricas de retención de público?

Filtro

Período

Comparación

Grupos

 

¿Qué podría ocurrir si tienes contenido difícil de distinguir en la referencia?

Podrían generarse reclamos erróneos.

Content ID silenciará la parte del audio.

Content ID borrará la referencia.

El tipo de activo se convierte a Web.

 

El socio A y el socio B envían archivos de referencia con contenido que se superpone. En la página Superposiciones de referencia, el socio B selecciona «Excluir». ¿Qué ocurre con los videos de usuarios que coinciden solo con la parte excluida?

Se consideran no reclamados.

Le corresponden al socio B.

Se consideran reclamados por ambos socios.

Le corresponden al socio A.

 

¿Qué beneficio ofrece administrar el contenido con SFTP o la solución Aspera dropbox?

Se pueden importar discos sin conexión.

No se necesitan conocimientos técnicos.

Es fácil de escalar.

El video tiene alta calidad.

 

¿Qué patrón suelen observar los canales que monetizan contenido al inicio del año?

Una disminución de las vistas

Un notorio repunte en los ingresos generales

Una caída en los ingresos por publicidad

Un aumento en el tiempo de reproducción

 

¿Qué forma de expresión no está sujeta a derechos de autor?

El título de un video

Un avance de canal

Un video de comedia improvisado Un programa de TV animado

 

El propietario de los derechos de autor se retractó de una solicitud de eliminación por incumplimiento de los derechos de autor. ¿Cuál es el resultado de esta acción?

El solicitante no puede volver a solicitar eliminaciones por el incumplimiento de los derechos de autor.

Se quita la advertencia por incumplimiento de los derechos de autor de la cuenta del usuario.

Se cambia el estado de la advertencia por incumplimiento de los derechos de autor a «pendiente».

El video se restablece, pero no se puede monetizar.

 

¿En qué momento analiza Content ID el video de un usuario para ver si coincide con algún material de referencia enviado?

Cuando se ubica un anuncio en el video

Mientras se sube y periódicamente después de su publicación

Solo cuando se sube y se publica

Después de que reciba más de 1000 vistas

 

Los derechos de autor protegen las obras originales. ¿Cuál de las siguientes opciones es un ejemplo de un video que es posible que no puedas proteger con derechos de autor?

Una serie de reacciones a los videos de otras personas

Un video en el que apareces en tu casa y das consejos de belleza

Un video que compila clips graciosos sacados de videos de otros canales de YouTube

Comentarios y críticas de obras con derechos de autor

 

¿Cuál de las siguientes opciones es un método para crear un archivo de referencia a partir de un video nuevo o no reclamado?

Seleccionar una política de uso

Reclamar el video y habilitar las coincidencias de Content ID

Todos los videos que suben los socios se convierten en referencias de manera automática

Cambiar la configuración de privacidad del video de Privado a Público

 

¿Qué forma de expresión está sujeta a los derechos de autor?

Los títulos

Los nombres

Las obras literarias

Las frases cortas

 

¿Quién puede darte permiso para usar partes de otro video que viste en YouTube?

El propietario del video original y de todas las obras que incluye

Mientras se mencione el video original en el video, no se necesitan más permisos Después de que un video se sube a YouTube, Content ID otorga el permiso

El propietario del canal al que se subió el video

 

¿Cuál de las siguientes afirmaciones acerca de Content ID es verdadera?

Content ID analiza todos los videos subidos y quita las partes que infringen los derechos de autor.

Con Content ID, los titulares de derechos pueden aplicar políticas de bloqueo, seguimiento o monetización a los videos subidos que usan contenido protegido por derechos de autor.

Content ID está disponible solo para los canales con más de 1 millón de suscriptores.

Con Content ID, los espectadores pueden marcar el contenido dañino o peligroso.

 

¿Cuándo se agregan derechos de autor a una obra creativa?

Después de que la obra creativa se comunica a otra parte por cualquier medio

En cuanto la obra creativa se fija a un medio de expresión tangible

Después de que la aprueba un abogado local especializado en derechos de autor

Cuando la obra creativa se registra en la oficina internacional de derechos de autor

 

¿Cómo se aplican los derechos de autor a un video en el que se reseña una película?

Impiden que se muestren grabaciones sin el consentimiento escrito de los actores que tienen diálogos. Permiten que se incluyan muchos fragmentos de la película si el video aparece como una reseña de película.

Se puede considerar uso legítimo (o trato legítimo) si se usa un clip muy corto de una película para acompañar un comentario sobre la trama o los personajes.

Pueden usarse partes del video, siempre y cuando se excluya el sonido.

 

¿Cuál de las siguientes opciones es un requisito previo para usar SFTP o el método de envío Aspera dropbox?

Proporcionar una llave SSH a tu administrador de cuentas

Mantener un total de suscriptores superior a 100,000

Subir más de 100 videos al mes

Subir videos en resolución HD

 

¿Cuál de las siguientes opciones es un motivo para actualizar los activos si tus derechos de propiedad cambian en algunos territorios?

Garantizar que el ID del activo cambie con tu propiedad

Permitir que varias partes compartan la propiedad de un activo web en el mismo territorio

Establecer el acceso del nuevo propietario de los derechos a los reclamos vencidos del propietario anterior del contenido

Reducir los conflictos de propiedad de los activos, porque ya no tienes los derechos y no puedes aplicar tus políticas en esos territorios

 

Un socio decide bloquear los videos que otros usuarios subieron. ¿Qué ocurre cuando un usuario sube un video que coincide con la política?

El video no está disponible para reproducirse y quien lo subió recibe una advertencia por incumplimiento de los derechos de autor de manera automática.

El video está disponible para reproducirse, pero quien lo sube recibe una advertencia por incumplimiento de los derechos de autor.

El video no está disponible para reproducirse, pero conserva una URL única.

El video está disponible solo en YouTube (las incorporaciones y otras formas de reproducción están inhabilitadas).

 

¿Por qué es importante revisar el contenido de referencia posiblemente no válido?

Para verificar que el contenido cumple con los Lineamientos de Content ID

Para evitar las advertencias por incumplimiento de los derechos de autor  Para resolver las superposiciones de referencias

Para responder a las impugnaciones de otro propietario del contenido

 

YouTube recibe un aviso legal de eliminación de un video que subió un creador sin el permiso del propietario de los derechos de autor. ¿Qué recibirá el creador?

Instrucciones para comunicarse con el propietario de los derechos de autor a fin de conseguir una licencia

Un documento para llenar y presentar una apelación

Una advertencia de posible rescisión de la cuenta si continúa el abuso de los derechos de autor

Un aviso para mediar la impugnación o enfrentar multas legales

 

¿Después de cuántos días vence un reclamo pendiente?

60 días

45 días

30 días

Nunca

 

Si un propietario de contenido desactiva un archivo de referencia, ¿qué le ocurrirá?

Se retirarán todos los reclamos anteriores generados con el archivo de referencia, pero continuarán buscándose coincidencias en el contenido nuevo que suban los usuarios.

El archivo de referencia se desactivará por 30 días y se suspenderá la búsqueda de coincidencias.

Ya no se reclamará contenido nuevo subido por usuarios que coincida con el archivo de referencia.

Se seguirán buscando coincidencias en el contenido nuevo que suban los usuarios, pero la política de coincidencias cambiará a Seguir.

 

¿Qué opción describe con precisión la manera en que se aplican los derechos de autor al cover de una canción?

Está protegido por el uso legítimo, por lo que no necesitas permiso del creador del contenido original.

Cuando interpretas un cover de una canción, debes asegurarte de contar con el permiso del compositor o autor de la letra.

Es conveniente cambiar parte de la letra en el cover de la canción para evitar problemas de derechos de autor.

El cover de una canción se considera una obra transformativa, por lo que no necesitas permiso del creador del contenido original.

 

¿Cómo te ayuda YouTube a administrar los derechos por el contenido que subes a la plataforma?

Crea listas de referencia con personas que pueden actuar en tu defensa.

Usa un equipo de revisores para examinar de forma manual todo el contenido que se sube. Proporciona asesoría legal durante una impugnación sobre el contenido que subiste.

Crea tecnologías como Content ID para ayudar a administrar los derechos a gran escala.

 

Dos socios tienen una coincidencia de referencia. ¿Qué sucede si el socio que envía el archivo de referencia en segundo lugar selecciona «Declarar derechos exclusivos»?

Ambos socios reclamarán los videos de los usuarios que coincidan solo en la parte excluida, pero estos se excluirán de la lista de reclamos del otro socio.

El primer socio perderá los reclamos sobre el contenido de inmediato y deberá quitar la parte que se superpone de su referencia.

Se le pedirá al primer socio que revise la superposición y que declare derechos exclusivos o excluya el segmento que se superpone de su referencia.

Los videos de los usuarios que coincidan solo en la parte excluida se proporcionarán al segundo socio que seleccionó «Declarar derechos exclusivos».

 

¿Qué tipo de contenido es apto como archivo de referencia de Content ID?

Clips de terceros bajo principios de uso o trato legítimo

Contenido con derechos territoriales exclusivos

Contenido publicado bajo una licencia abierta

Grabaciones de dominio público

 

El sistema de Content ID genera un reclamo automático por un video que subió un usuario, y este último impugna el reclamo. Como propietario de los derechos de autor del video, ¿qué opción elegirías si ya no deseas declarar tus derechos sobre el contenido que se impugnó?

Restablecer

Retirar

Eliminar

Restituir

 

¿Cómo se aplican los derechos de autor a un cover de una canción?

Los derechos de autor se aplican a los videos musicales nuevos, pero no a las grabaciones de sonido de covers. Se considera una obra colectiva y no es necesario pedir permiso al creador del contenido original.

Se considera una reproducción y es posible que se necesite permiso del creador del contenido original para poder usarla.

No se aplican derechos de autor, ya que el cover de una canción no es algo fijo.

 

¿De qué se compone un activo?

Material de referencia, formatos de anuncios

Metadatos, propiedad, material de referencia y política de coincidencias

Propiedad, reclamos, videos

Propiedad intelectual y avisos por el incumplimiento de los derechos de autor

 

Imagina que se emitió por error un aviso de eliminación por incumplimiento de los derechos de autor relacionado con contenido que se subió a YouTube. ¿Cuál de las partes puede retractar el aviso?

La persona que subió el video No es posible retractar el aviso

Un árbitro externo para reclamos de derechos de autor

La que envió el aviso originalmente

 

Si se impugna un reclamo de Content ID, ¿cuánto tiempo tiene el solicitante para responder?

1 semana

60 días

30 días

48 horas

 

Imagina que tienes una biblioteca de contenido de video que quieres administrar en YouTube. ¿Qué pasos debes seguir para proteger tu contenido en YouTube?

Presentar reclamos cuando recibas notificaciones de coincidencias de contenido Crear huellas digitales y configurar permisos

Validar tus activos con el Administrador de videos

Subir archivos de referencia y habilitar Content ID

 

¿Qué ocurre si un reclamo impugnado queda en la fila de elementos pendientes por más de 30 días?

No ocurre nada. Un reclamo puede estar en la fila de elementos pendientes por un tiempo indefinido. Se aplica la política predeterminada de Bloquear y después se puede apelar el reclamo.

El reclamo se extiende por 30 días más.

El reclamo se retira.

 

Mientras revisas las impugnaciones, ves un reclamo en el que se detectó una coincidencia con un clip corto de contenido no exclusivo incluido en tu archivo de referencia, que es válido salvo por ese clip. ¿Cuál es la mejor medida que puedes tomar al respecto?

Retirar el reclamo y excluir de la referencia la parte que generó la coincidencia, a fin de evitar futuros errores

Eliminar

Retirar el reclamo y desactivar el archivo de referencia

Restablecer el reclamo y cambiar la política de coincidencias a Bloquear

 

Un socio decide restablecer un reclamo de Content ID después de que un usuario lo impugnó. El usuario apela el restablecimiento del reclamo. ¿Qué sucede después?

El socio puede elegir restablecer el reclamo otra vez para declarar sus derechos.

El usuario y el socio deben mediar el reclamo fuera del sistema automático de Content ID. El usuario recibe permiso para usar el video de forma automática.

El socio debe decidir si retira el reclamo o envía un aviso de eliminación legal.

 

¿Qué ocurre si el sistema de YouTube detecta una coincidencia poco confiable?

El reclamo se retira, pero se puede restablecer después de 30 días.

Se aplica la política de coincidencias, a menos que dicha política sea de monetización.

El reclamo se envía al propietario del contenido para que lo revise.

El archivo de referencia correspondiente se clasifica como pendiente.

 

¿Cómo especificarías qué tipos de anuncios debe mostrar YouTube en un video?

Configuras los tipos de anuncios en la sección Monetizar de Content ID. Especificas los tipos de anuncios cuando creas el canal.

Especificas los tipos de anuncios con la configuración de publicidad, que es diferente de una política de derechos.

YouTube selecciona los tipos de anuncios apropiados en forma automática.

 

Si necesitas asesoría con un problema relacionado con la ley de derechos de autor, ¿a quién deberías consultar?

Al Centro de derechos de autor de YouTube

Al Departamento de Derechos de Autor de los Estados Unidos A un administrador de cuentas

A un abogado

 

El socio BritFlix es propietario de una película en el Reino Unido. Tu empresa tiene un programa de TV que muestra un clip de la película y crea una referencia. ¿Qué deberías hacer con el archivo de referencia?

Usar la referencia, pero acordar dividir los ingresos que generen los anuncios

Desactivar el archivo de referencia en el Reino Unido

Excluir el segmento con el clip de la película

Agregar la propiedad en el activo de BritFlix

 

¿Cómo puede un administrador controlar si los usuarios ven informes de ingresos?

Excluir los datos de ingresos del rol de un usuario

Informar las preferencias de los informes al administrador de socios

No es posible. Todos los usuarios que acceden tienen a su disposición el conjunto completo de Analytics. Invitar a los usuarios a ser propietarios del contenido a través de correo electrónico

 

¿Qué métrica puede proporcionar las mejores estadísticas sobre el rendimiento del canal?

Comentarios

Tiempo de reproducción

Datos demográficos

Dispositivos

 

¿Cuáles son las consecuencias de seleccionar la opción de reclamo «Bloquear fuera de la propiedad»?

El video no estará listado en tu canal.

Otras partes no podrán agregar la propiedad a tu activo en territorios donde tú no eres propietario.

Todos los videos de usuarios por los que el activo genere reclamos dejarán de estar disponibles en las áreas donde no seas propietario del activo.

El video no estará disponible en los países donde no seas propietario del activo.

 

¿Qué informe de tiempo de reproducción te muestra dónde encuentran tu contenido los espectadores web?

Dispositivos Geografía

Ubicaciones de reproducción

Fuentes de tráfico

 

¿Cuál es el último paso cuando se usa el Cargador de paquetes?

Subir archivos de metadatos a través de la IU Hacer clic en el botón «Validar».

Arrastrar y soltar los archivos de medios

Procesar el paquete

 

Mientras revisas las impugnaciones, ves un reclamo de una persona que tiene una licencia válida. ¿Qué debes hacer?

Retirar el reclamo y excluir el segmento de la búsqueda de coincidencias

Retirar el reclamo

Restablecer el reclamo

Eliminar

 

¿Cómo maneja YouTube los avisos de incumplimiento válidos que envían los propietarios de derechos de autor?

Comparte información sobre el caso de inmediato con los organismos policiales para aplicar acciones penales.

Cada trimestre, publica y comparte una lista de cuentas que subieron material protegido por derechos de autor.

Coloca una insignia en la página de inicio del canal de la persona que subió el video para identificarla como un usuario con comportamiento inadecuado.

Quita el video del sitio y envía una advertencia por incumplimiento de los derechos de autor a quien subió el video.

 

¿Qué protección legal se aplica a los nombres de marcas, los lemas y los logotipos?

Patente

Marca comercial

Privacidad

Uso legítimo

 

Una socia es la presentadora de un programa de conversación en YouTube llamado «Hablemos de gatos». Uno de los episodios consiste en una entrevista de 10 minutos con un veterinario, seguida de una compilación de 5 minutos con videos virales de gatos que otros usuarios subieron a YouTube. La socia obtuvo una licencia de uso comercial de los usuarios que subieron los videos de gatos para usarlos en «Hablemos de gatos». Ahora, quiere usar Content ID para monetizar clips del programa. ¿Qué debería hacer la socia?

No subir el video como archivo de referencia, ya que incluye contenido de terceros

Subir solamente la entrevista de 10 minutos como archivo de referencia, puesto que la socia no es propietaria exclusiva de los videos virales

Subir el episodio completo como archivo de referencia, porque tiene licencia para usar los videos virales de gatos

No subir el video como archivo de referencia, porque las filmaciones de entrevistas no pueden tener derechos de autor

 

Cuando dos socios agregan propiedad internacional a un activo no musical con políticas de monetización, ¿qué ocurre con ese activo?

El socio que haya agregado la propiedad al activo antes recibirá todos los ingresos internacionales.

El activo pasará a un estado de conflicto y las políticas de monetización de los socios no se aplicarán en los territorios superpuestos.

El activo se monetizará en nombre de ambos socios y se dividirán los ingresos en partes iguales.

El socio que haya agregado la propiedad más recientemente recibirá todos los ingresos internacionales.

 

Imagina que ves un video en YouTube que incluye clips cortos de una obra protegida por derechos de autor. ¿Cómo puedes evaluar si se aplica el uso legítimo (o trato legítimo)?

Calcular el porcentaje del contenido protegido por derechos de autor para asegurarte de que no supere el 25% Comparar el video con otros videos del mismo canal

Considerar los criterios para el uso legítimo (o trato legítimo), lo que incluye si el video es una parodia o una crítica con valor social.

Enviar el video al sistema automatizado de evaluación

 

Un usuario impugna un reclamo y, para ello, cita los lineamientos de uso legítimo o trato legítimo. ¿Qué sucede si seleccionas «Retirar» en este reclamo impugnado?

Se retira el reclamo y la política cambia a «Seguir».

El reclamo pasa al estado inactivo y tu política de coincidencias no se aplica.

El reclamo queda pendiente hasta que el usuario responda. El reclamo pasa a la fila de «Reclamos retirados».

 

¿Cómo pueden beneficiarse los propietarios del contenido de la administración de derechos de autor en YouTube?

Pueden erradicar sitios piratas de Internet.

Pueden quitar hasta 100 videos rápidamente con el formulario web de eliminación por incumplimiento de los derechos de autor.

Pueden monetizar el contenido generado por usuarios que incluya material protegido por derechos de autor.

Pueden emitir una «advertencia por incumplimiento de los derechos de autor» cuando el sistema automatizado marca una posible infracción.

 

¿Qué puedes hacer con el contenido de YouTube que tiene una licencia de Creative Commons?

Reutilizarlo, de acuerdo con los términos de la licencia

Usarlo sin atribución

Usarlo solo para obras no comerciales

Reclamarlo como contenido original

 

Enviaste un archivo de referencia que contiene el mismo audio, video o material audiovisual que un archivo de referencia previo que envió otro socio. ¿Cuál es el resultado?

El sistema revela la superposición de referencias para que la revises y la resuelvas.

El archivo de referencia se atribuye al socio que tenga el canal con más suscriptores.

El archivo de referencia más antiguo sobrescribe al nuevo.

En este caso, no ocurre nada.

 

Un usuario impugna un reclamo, por lo cual revisas el video y decides que se debe quitar de YouTube porque usa tu contenido protegido por derechos de autor. ¿Qué sucede si seleccionas «Eliminación» en el reclamo impugnado?

Se envía un aviso de eliminación legal contra este video.

El video se quita de los resultados de las búsquedas, pero sigue publicado. El reclamo se retira.

La solicitud se reenvía al administrador de socios para que la evalúe.

 

Tu empresa le dio a otra parte el derecho de usar tu contenido en sus videos. ¿Qué puedes hacer para evitar que Content ID envíe reclamos automáticos en su canal?

Incluir el canal de la otra parte en la lista blanca

Pedir a la otra parte que ingrese el ID de tu canal en los metadatos de activo

Duplicar el activo para que la otra parte pueda asignar propiedad al contenido

Desactivar la opción «Habilitar las coincidencias de Content ID»

 

¿Cuál de las siguientes opciones se puede proteger con derechos de autor?

Ideas abstractas

Fotos

Métodos de operación Datos

 

¿Cuál de las siguientes opciones es una estrategia eficaz para evitar problemas de derechos de autor en YouTube?

Borrar los videos cuando recibes un aviso sobre los derechos de autor

Subir solo contenido original

Apelar todos los reclamos contra el contenido que subes Incluir menos de 10 segundos de las obras de otras personas

 

Un usuario impugna un reclamo porque el segmento que generó la coincidencia pertenece a una grabación de dominio público. ¿Qué sucede cuando seleccionas «Retirar y excluir» en este reclamo impugnado?

Un aviso de eliminación legal se envía al usuario que subió el contenido.

El reclamo se retira y se crea una exclusión en el archivo de referencia correspondiente.

Los datos de referencia correspondientes se quitan para evitar reclamos en el futuro. Los datos de rendimiento se excluyen de los informes de YouTube Analytics.

 

¿Por qué es importante que selecciones las referencias detenidamente?

Para identificar los idiomas en los que tienes propiedad

Porque las referencias se rechazan si incluyen contenido de terceros

Para asegurarte de que los reclamos que se generen sobre los videos de los usuarios sean correctos, a fin de que puedas controlar tu contenido

Porque no puedes modificar tu referencia después de crearla

 

¿Por qué motivo una cuenta sería apta para acceder al Administrador de contenido?

Administra un repositorio de contenido de gran tamaño o con varios canales.

Se convirtió en socio de YouTube y necesita administrar los ingresos del canal.

Produce videos de parodias o covers y desea evitar las eliminaciones por el incumplimiento de los derechos de autor. Se unió a una red de varios canales, especialmente si se trata de una internacional.

 

¿Cuál de los siguientes tipos de contenido NUNCA debe habilitarse para la búsqueda de coincidencias?

Contenido de audio sin video

Contenido de dominio público

Animación

Archivos de más de 45 minutos de duración

 

¿Qué combinación de políticas te permite monetizar todos los videos subidos por usuarios, pero impide que los videos subidos por socios estén disponibles en tu canal?

Política de uso = Monetizar; política de coincidencias = Bloquear Política de uso = ninguna; política de coincidencias = Bloquear Política de uso = Seguir; política de coincidencias = Monetizar

Política de uso = Bloquear; política de coincidencias = Monetizar

 

¿Cómo se considera la traducción de una obra existente?

Es una obra colectiva.

Es una recopilación.

Es una marca comercial.

Es una obra derivada.

 

¿Qué método de carga se recomienda para subir o actualizar algunos videos cada semana?

La interfaz de carga web de Creator Studio

Aspera dropbox

El protocolo de transferencia de archivos segura (SFTP)

La API de YouTube

 

¿Cuáles son los derechos de uso de la música que se selecciona de la Biblioteca de audio de YouTube?

Puedes usar las canciones si le pagas regalías al propietario.

Toda la música se puede usar en videos según los términos especificados.

Solo los efectos de sonido se pueden usar, no las canciones. Se puede usar la música solo en videos no monetizados.

 

¿Qué es un reclamo?

Un vínculo entre un video subido a YouTube y un activo

Un proceso legal para demostrar a quién le pertenece la propiedad intelectual Un contenedor de información sobre un elemento de propiedad intelectual Una política que permite la monetización de todos los videos

 

¿Qué opción está disponible para todos los propietarios de derechos de autor que deseen solicitar la eliminación de contenido infractor?

El Aprendizaje sobre derechos de autor de YouTube

La derivación al administrador de socios

El formulario web de notificación de derechos de autor

La junta de revisión de creadores

 

Para reclamar videos subidos, ¿cuál es el primer paso en el flujo de trabajo de Content ID para un socio, después de verificar los derechos?

Marcar el contenido subido que podría infringir sus derechos

Convertir el material a un formato de video de propiedad del socio

Enviar material de referencia a YouTube que refleje la propiedad del contenido

Ver y administrar la configuración de reclamos

 

¿Cuál de los siguientes ejemplos corresponde a un tipo de activo no musical?

Grabación de sonido

Película

Composición

Video de música

 

¿En qué momento debes pedir permiso para usar una obra protegida por derechos de autor?

Antes de subir tu video a YouTube

Mientras el video se codifica para su uso

Después de que el video reciba al menos 100 vistas

Cuando monetices el video

 

Una de mis artistas favoritas fallece y quiero subir su canción en un video tributo. ¿Qué debería considerar primero?

Hacer un cálculo aproximado de la cantidad de videos en tributo que también podrían usar esta canción Usar la canción con libertad, ya que automáticamente pasa al dominio público

Resolver todos los reclamos pendientes que tienes en tu cuenta antes de agregar contenido nuevo

Solicitar permiso para usar la canción, ya que seguramente está protegida por derechos de autor

 

¿Qué puedes hacer para evitar recibir advertencias para socios por infracción de los derechos de autor?

Agregar una licencia de Creative Commons para todo el contenido subido Marcar todos los videos subidos como contenido original

Mantener controles internos adecuados y educar a tus canales

Inhabilitar la monetización en todos los canales

 

Un socio quiere organizar su biblioteca de activos de YouTube en grupos. ¿Qué función le recomendarías usar?

Etiquetas de referencia

Etiquetas de activos

Campañas

Políticas personalizadas

 

¿Cuál es la ventaja de una política de uso predeterminada?

Si no seleccionas una política predeterminada, YouTube usa la política predefinida Bloquear en todas partes.

Cuando no tienes una política de coincidencias, la política de uso predeterminada se aplica como política de coincidencias.

YouTube aplica la política de uso predeterminada a los videos que los usuarios suben a sus canales, lo que produce mejores coincidencias de Content ID.

YouTube aplica la política de uso predeterminada a los videos que subes a tus canales, lo que acelera el proceso de configuración.

 

¿Qué tres dimensiones pueden proporcionar estadísticas sobre las fuentes del tiempo de reproducción?

Idioma, tiempo de reproducción y datos demográficos

Dispositivo, vistas y ubicación de la reproducción

Geografía, ingresos y subtítulos

Geografía, idioma y dispositivo

 

¿Cómo se aplican las leyes de derechos de autor a nivel internacional?

Son iguales en todos los países.

Varían según el país.

Hay estándares comunes que se actualizan cada año.

Las leyes siguen precedentes de la UE o de los EE.UU.

 

¿Cuál de las siguientes opciones es un factor que consideran los tribunales de los EE.UU. cuando analizan un caso de uso legítimo?

Aparición del nombre del creador original en pantalla

Finalidad y carácter del uso

Inclusión de una renuncia de responsabilidad para el uso posterior Inclusión de un vínculo al contenido original en los metadatos

 

¿Qué combinación de políticas te permite monetizar el contenido subido a tu canal y seguir todos los videos subidos por usuarios?

Política de uso = Seguir; política de coincidencias = Monetizar Política de uso = Seguir; política de coincidencias = ninguna

Política de uso = Monetizar; política de coincidencias = Seguir Esto requiere una política personalizada

 

Te das cuenta de que alguien subió a YouTube un video que te pertenece. ¿Qué debes hacer para solicitar la eliminación por incumplimiento de los derechos de autor?

Cualquier persona puede marcar un video y se envía un aviso de eliminación por el incumplimiento de los derechos de autor a la persona que subió el video.

La persona que subió el video debe admitir que usó material con derechos de autor.

Como propietario de los derechos de autor o agente autorizado, debes enviar un aviso completo del incumplimiento de los derechos de autor.

Tu abogado debe enviar una solicitud formal a un tribunal.

 

¿Cuál de las siguientes opciones es un tipo de activo?

Referencia de IMDB

Premio de la MPAA

Avance de película

Web

 

¿Qué informe de tiempo de reproducción te muestra dónde miran tu contenido los espectadores web?

Dispositivos

Ubicaciones de reproducción

Fuentes de tráfico Geografía

 

Imagina que alguien sube un video a YouTube con material protegido por derechos de autor. ¿Qué sucede si el propietario de los derechos de autor configura una política para bloquear los videos subidos por usuarios?

Se marca para enviar un aviso de eliminación por incumplimiento de los derechos de autor. Se declara como una infracción de las Condiciones del Servicio de YouTube.

Se marca como no disponible para reproducirse en los territorios que especificó el propietario de los derechos de autor.

Se borra del sitio en un plazo de 10 días hábiles.

 

 

 

 


 

Respuestas de Evaluación de monetización de activos de Youtube

Por

Respuestas de Evaluación de monetización de activos de Youtube

Respuestas de Monetización de activos de Youtube

Más información sobre la certificación en: skillshop.exceedlms.com/student/path/8325-monetizacion-de-activos

Youtube Asset Monetization Assessment Exam Answers 100% score

 

 

 

Un usuario sube un video de mashup con escenas de dos películas diferentes. Eres propietario de una película en EE.UU. y tu política de coincidencias es Monetizar. El socio que es propietario de la otra película en EE.UU. también tiene una política de coincidencias de Monetizar. ¿Qué política se aplica en EE.UU.?

Seguir

Ninguna política

Monetizar

Bloquear

 

¿Quién podría recibir pagos de los propietarios de contenido?

Los administradores de canales que participan en colaboraciones de marca

Los creadores de contenido que pertenecen a una red o trabajan con una organización que administra sus ingresos

Los creadores de contenido que colaboran con otros canales

Solo los creadores de contenido de nivel empresarial

 

¿Cuáles son las consecuencias de no configurar una política de coincidencias en una situación con varios reclamos?

Es posible que la política que elegiste no se aplique a los videos subidos por usuarios reclamados.

Se suspenderán las políticas de coincidencias de los otros propietarios del contenido.

No puedes enviar una solicitud de eliminación de conformidad con la DMCA contra videos subidos por usuarios. Todos los videos reclamados se bloquearán de manera automática.

 

¿Qué condiciones de una política de coincidencias personalizada se pueden configurar en minutos (mm:ss) y porcentaje (%)?

Solo la cantidad de coincidencia del video del usuario Cantidad de coincidencia del audio

Solo la cantidad de coincidencia de una referencia

Cantidad de coincidencia del video del usuario y cantidad de coincidencia de la referencia

 

Un socio busca una manera de llevar un seguimiento de los videos subidos por usuarios, que coinciden con contenido de su propiedad. Cuando se usan los informes aptos para descargarse, ¿qué campo podría servir para vincular varios informes y crear conexiones?

ID del activo

Origen del reclamo

Política del propietario

Tipo de contenido

 

¿Qué puede ocurrir si varios activos reclaman un video?

Los ingresos del activo pueden ser superiores a los ingresos de los videos individuales. Ninguno de los propietarios del activo recibirá pagos hasta que se resuelva el conflicto.

Los ingresos del video pueden ser superiores a los ingresos de los activos individuales.

Debes consultar el Informe de reclamos para investigar el uso del activo por parte de otros canales.

 

¿Qué información se incluye en un Informe de tarifas de anuncios?

Los ingresos por cada mil impresiones (RPM) basados en reproducciones en el nivel del canal y de los videos

El rendimiento de cada tipo de anuncio en el tiempo en relación con los otros tipos

El rendimiento de los ingresos de anuncios en relación con otros flujos de ingresos

Los ingresos netos declarables de las ventas de anuncios en el nivel del canal y de los videos

 

El socio A y el socio B comparten la propiedad de un activo (en diferentes territorios). Si el video de un usuario coincide con este activo, ¿quién ve el reclamo?

Ambos socios ven el reclamo.

Solo el socio B ve el reclamo. Solo el socio A ve el reclamo.

No hay información suficiente para determinar qué sucedería.

 

¿Cuál de estos es un informe descargable?

Datos demográficos

Ingresos

Video

Tarifas de anuncios

 

Eres propietario de los derechos de una entrevista de 15 minutos a una celebridad. Te parece bien que los fans suban un video, siempre y cuando su video también incluya otro contenido más largo que tu clip. ¿Qué política personalizada podría lograr este objetivo?

Bloquear si el porcentaje de coincidencia del video del usuario es > 10% y Monetizar si el porcentaje de coincidencia del video del usuario es < 10%

Bloquear si el porcentaje de coincidencia del video del usuario es = 50%

Bloquear si el porcentaje de coincidencia del video del usuario es > 90% y Monetizar si el porcentaje de coincidencia del video del usuario es < 90%

Bloquear si el porcentaje de coincidencia del video del usuario es > 50% y Monetizar si el porcentaje de coincidencia del video del usuario es < 50%

 

¿Qué podría ocurrir si un socio ignora un conflicto de propiedad sobre un activo?

Es posible que el socio deba quitar el activo.

Es posible que el socio no pueda crear nuevos activos.

El socio podría recibir una advertencia por incumplimiento de los lineamientos de la comunidad.

El socio podría perder los ingresos de su activo hasta que se resuelva el conflicto.

 

Agregaste la norma «enviar para revisión» a una política personalizada. ¿Qué sucede con los reclamos asociados?

Aparecen en tu lista de tareas pendientes de posibles reclamos.

Se envían al administrador de socios para que los apruebe.

Si pasan 30 días sin revisión, se convierten en una política de bloqueo.

Quedan pendientes por 30 días y después se vuelven activos automáticamente.

 

Tienes una gran biblioteca de grabaciones de sonido, incluidos algunos discursos antiguos de dominio público. ¿Cuál es la mejor manera de tratarlas con respecto a Content ID?

Usar un ID personalizado para marcar estas grabaciones de sonido como de dominio público, a fin de poder supervisarlas

Configurar las políticas para enviar todos los reclamos a revisión manual, de manera que puedas detectar los reclamos sobre contenido de dominio público

Habilitar las coincidencias de Content ID en todo el catálogo y verificar el Informe de reclamos una vez por trimestre

Identificar los discursos de dominio público y no habilitarlos para la coincidencia de Content ID

 

¿Qué informe descargable puede ayudar a separar el ingreso de anuncios por activo para hacer los pagos?

Activos Ingresos

Tarifas de anuncios

Ingresos de los socios de Ads (activos)

 

¿En qué caso los reclamos se «envían para la revisión manual»? 1

Cuando los activos tienen más de un propietario

Cuando los usuarios impugnan o apelan a un reclamo en un video subido Cuando las coincidencias son audiovisuales

Cuando lo especifica una política personalizada del socio

 

¿Cuál de las siguientes opciones es una de las métricas principales que usan muchos propietarios de contenido para determinar la distribución de los ingresos entre los creadores?

Datos demográficos del público

Ingresos obtenidos por activos

Índice de nuevos suscriptores del canal

Cantidad de videos subidos por usuarios

 

¿Qué afirmación es correcta sobre la revisión manual de los reclamos?

YouTube aplica la política más restrictiva en los reclamos potenciales. La política se aplica automáticamente después de 30 días.

Las revisiones manuales deben especificar una condición sobre la ubicación del espectador.

La política no se aplica hasta que el reclamo esté activo.

 

¿Cuál es uno de los beneficios de supervisar el rendimiento de los activos a partir de los reclamos?

Comparar el posible ingreso de dos canales que administres

Determinar los posibles ingresos y el alcance de tus activos

Comparar tus activos reclamados con los de la competencia

Identificar a terceros que reclamen la propiedad de tus activos

 

El socio A y el socio B comparten la propiedad de un activo (en diferentes territorios). ¿Qué sucede si el socio A retira un reclamo en un video?

La política del socio A se quita, pero la política del socio B se mantiene activa. Se quita la propiedad del socio A sobre el activo.

El reclamo se retira para ambos socios.

El reclamo se dirige al socio B para confirmar el retiro.

 

Cuando revisas los reclamos impugnados, notas que subiste un archivo de referencia de 10 minutos de tu programa de noticias que contiene un clip de 1 minuto de un tercero. ¿Cómo puedes solucionar esto si el reclamo se genera a partir del clip incorporado?

Restablecer el reclamo

Retirar el reclamo, pero sin excluir el segmento de tu referencia

Retirar el reclamo y excluir el segmento de la referencia

Desactivar el archivo de referencia para evitar futuras coincidencias de Content ID

 

¿Cuál sería un buen motivo para volver a revisar una política personalizada?

Reclamos de varios territorios

Una gran cantidad de reclamos impugnados

Una referencia no válida en tu lista de tareas pendientes Una leve disminución de los reclamos después de 6 meses

 

¿Qué puedes hacer para impedir que tu video de YouTube se vea en Indonesia?

Configurar restricciones de reproducción en los metadatos  del  activo Agregar una política de bloquear si la ubicación del espectador es Indonesia

Quitar Indonesia de la propiedad del activo

Bloquear las vistas de todos los dispositivos móviles

 

¿Cuál es la diferencia entre un conflicto de propiedad y un reclamo?

Un reclamo ocurre cuando otra parte dice que tu activo le pertenece; un conflicto ocurre cuando alguien publica un video que contiene tu activo.

Un conflicto ocurre cuando dos propietarios de contenido suben archivos de referencia muy similares; un reclamo es la manera en que asocias las referencias con los activos.

Un conflicto ocurre cuando otra parte dice que tu activo le pertenece; un reclamo ocurre cuando alguien publica un video que contiene tu activo.

Un reclamo ocurre cuando dos propietarios de contenido suben archivos de referencia muy similares; un conflicto ocurre si las referencias no se conectan con activos.

 

¿Qué afirmación es verdadera sobre los activos pertenecientes a varios socios?

YouTube solo aplica tu política en los territorios en los que eres propietario del activo.

Todos los propietarios del activo deben configurar la misma política en todo el mundo. Los propietarios del activo deciden qué política se debe priorizar.

YouTube no aplica ninguna política, a menos que sea la de Bloquear.

 

¿Por qué los ingresos del Informe de activos podrían no coincidir con los ingresos del Informe de videos?

Esto puede ocurrir cuando los activos y los videos que reclaman tienen diferentes políticas de monetización activadas.

Esto puede ocurrir cuando un activo tiene varios propietarios en diferentes territorios: los ingresos pueden variar según el país. Esto solo ocurre con la música, si la propiedad está dividida entre activos de composición y ejecución.

Esto sucede cuando un video incluye varios activos. Los ingresos de todos los activos deberían sumar los ingresos del video.

 

En una situación con varios reclamos, si el propietario de un activo tiene una política de bloqueo y otro propietario de un activo tiene una política de monetización, ¿cómo prioriza YouTube las políticas?

YouTube aplica la política más restrictiva (Bloquear).

YouTube combina las políticas (Bloquear + Monetizar = Seguir).

YouTube asigna al azar una de las políticas de los propietarios.

YouTube aplica la política menos restrictiva (Monetizar).

 

Si el propietario de un activo no configura ninguna política en un territorio en el que tiene propiedad, ¿qué política se aplica?

Ninguna política

Seguir Bloquear Monetizar

 

Recibes una advertencia por exceso de reclamos. ¿Qué puedes hacer para solucionar este problema?

Mirar una muestra al azar de los reclamos del último mes y retirar los reclamos no válidos

Ordenar los activos por cantidad de reclamos y revisar los activos con más reclamos

Descargar el Informe de reclamos y analizar solo los reclamos inactivos

No es necesario hacer nada, ya que es solo una advertencia

 

¿Por qué un socio podría ver datos de activos que no le pertenecen en ningún país?

Esto puede ocurrir cuando una política de uso se configura como «nula» sin querer.

Algunos informes pueden mostrar datos antiguos de activos reclamados previamente.

Para confirmar la veracidad de los detalles de la cuenta de AdSense de un socio.

Los ingresos de activos compartidos pueden estar divididos de manera equitativa entre las partes.

 

¿Cuál de las siguientes opciones es más útil para explicar una disminución súbita y acentuada en los ingresos?

El informe de video

Los informes de ingresos de los socios de Ads

El informe de retención de público El informe de datos demográficos

 

Tú y otro socio tienen una política de coincidencias de Monetizar en activos no musicales independientes. Si ambos activos, y ningún otro, reclaman un video subido por un usuario, ¿quién recibe los ingresos?

YouTube retiene los ingresos hasta que un socio retire su reclamo.

Los ingresos se asignan al socio que tenga la coincidencia más larga con la referencia. El socio que revise primero el reclamo recibe los ingresos.

Cada uno recibe el 50% de los ingresos.

 

Si un activo que reclama un video no tiene propietario en algunos territorios, ¿cuál es la acción de la política predeterminada?

Ninguna política Monetizar Bloquear

Seguir

 

Un activo pertenece al socio A en Canadá y al socio B en México. Tanto el socio A como el socio B tienen una política de coincidencias de Monetizar en todo el mundo. Si los videos de un usuario generan reclamos por la coincidencia con este activo, ¿cuál de los socios recibe los ingresos?

No hay información suficiente para determinar qué sucedería. Los ingresos se pagan al socio que subió el archivo de referencia. Los ingresos se pagan al propietario original del activo.

El socio A recibe ingresos de Canadá; el socio B recibe ingresos de México.

 

¿En una situación con varios reclamos, qué política se aplica cuando los socios tienen políticas de coincidencias diferentes?

YouTube no aplica ninguna política al video reclamado. YouTube aplica la política de seguimiento al video reclamado.

YouTube aplica la política más restrictiva al video reclamado. YouTube aplica la política menos restrictiva al video reclamado.

 

Recibiste una advertencia por abuso de Content ID. Cuando revisas los reclamos incorrectos, observas que muchos problemas se derivan de un único canal cuyo contenido se compone en su totalidad de avances de películas con licencias de estudios. Después de desactivar las referencias incorrectas y retirar los reclamos no válidos, ¿qué más podrías hacer?

Quitar el canal del propietario de tu contenido

Quitar la capacidad del canal para crear referencias

Borrar todos los videos del canal

Solicitar que todos los reclamos se revisen de forma manual

 

¿Cuál de los siguientes tipos de contenido nunca se deberían habilitar para Content ID?

Contenido original Música acústica Contenido doblado

Contenido de dominio público

 

¿Cuál de las siguientes opciones es una buena estrategia para maximizar los ingresos de activos?

Solo monetizar los videos con formatos más largos

Seleccionar una política de uso predeterminada con la opción «Bloquear» en todos los activos Ser selectivo cuando eliges los tipos de anuncios que habilitas

Subir archivos de referencia y activar los reclamos de manera oportuna

 

¿Cuál de las siguientes opciones es una consecuencia negativa de un conflicto de propiedad de un activo?

No tendrás acceso a datos de YouTube Analytics sobre este activo. El administrador de socios se comunicará contigo para resolverlo. El activo no se usará para las coincidencias de Content ID.

Es posible que los reclamos de monetización activos se pospongan.

 

Un video con un aumento en las vistas no muestra un aumento correspondiente en los ingresos. ¿A qué puede deberse esto?

Es posible que el video tenga un reclamo de otro propietario. Es posible que el video tenga un conflicto.

Es posible que el video tenga reclamos de varios activos.

Las vistas pueden provenir de diferentes dispositivos o países.

 

¿Por qué es posible que las cifras de ingresos sean distintas en el Informe de tarifas de anuncios de YouTube Analytics, en comparación con los Informes de ingresos de socios de Ads que pueden descargarse?

Los Informes de ingresos de socios de Ads reflejan los ingresos brutos.

Los Informes de ingresos de socios de Ads reflejan la división de propiedad y los ingresos de terceros.

Esto no sucede nunca; ambos informes reflejarán la misma información siempre. El Informe de tarifas de anuncios incluye los ajustes de fin de mes.

 

¿Qué táctica puede evitar la pérdida de posibles ingresos de anuncios?

Asegurarte de que los tipos de anuncios habilitados sean visibles en los dispositivos que usa tu público para mirar videos

Consultar el Informe de videos periódicamente Configurar los videos como «no listados»

Seleccionar una política de uso con la opción «Bloquear»

 

Los socios que tienen problemas reiterados de abuso de Content ID pueden enfrentar una de las siguientes consecuencias:

La rescisión de la asociación

No hay ninguna consecuencia Una multa de USD 150,000

Advertencias por incumplimiento de los derechos de autor

 

¿Cuál es uno de los beneficios clave de revisar periódicamente tus reclamos?

Limpiar los reclamos incorrectos que pueden afectar a creadores o a otros propietarios de contenido

Calcular los ingresos totales derivados de anuncios, transacciones y suscripciones Comparar las tarifas de anuncios de distintas fuentes

Quitar reclamos inactivos de la lista de reclamos

 

¿Dónde pueden encontrar los socios información definitiva sobre los ingresos declarables?

Informes mensuales de ingresos de socios de Ads

Informe de ingresos Informe de AdSense

Informes semanales de ingresos de socios de Ads

 

¿Por qué deberías revisar si hay reclamos adicionales por un video en particular en la pestaña «Otros reclamos»?

Para ver qué reclamo se generó primero

Para obtener la información de contacto de los propietarios de los otros activos Para actualizar tu política de coincidencias en función de los otros reclamos

Para determinar si otros activos influyen en la política que se aplica

 

Si tú y otros socios son propietarios de un mismo activo en diferentes territorios, ¿cómo administrará Content ID los reclamos contra un video subido por un usuario?

Content ID genera un solo reclamo para cada propietario del activo.

Solo puede haber un reclamo por activo en cada video subido por un usuario.

Esto genera un conflicto de reclamos que deben resolver los propietarios. Un activo puede tener hasta 5 reclamos contra un único video.

 

El día 1 de julio, el departamento de Finanzas necesita los ingresos totales del mes de junio para fines de contabilidad.

¿Dónde pueden encontrar la cifra que deben usar?

En el informe descargable mensual de tarifas de anuncios.

La fecha más cercana en que estará disponible esa cifra es el 10 de julio.

En los ingresos descargables mensuales sobre los ingresos de los socios de Ads. En el Informe de ingresos de YouTube Analytics.

 

¿Cuál es la mejor manera de obtener una descripción general de las tendencias de ingresos?

Consultar el Informe de ingresos en Analytics

Sumar los totales de los informes de tarifas de anuncios, transacciones y suscripciones Consultar el Informe de tarifas de anuncios en Analytics

Sumar los totales de los informes de ingresos, transacciones y suscripciones

 

¿Qué recurso de YouTube incluye los ingresos finales de un mes?

El informe de rendimiento de campañas

Los informes descargables mensuales sobre los ingresos de los socios de Ads

El Informe de ingresos de YouTube Analytics La cuenta DoubleClick de AdSense

 

Si un propietario de contenido en una situación con varios reclamos elige la Eliminación, ¿qué ocurre?

YouTube quita el video.

La persona que subió el video tiene 30 días para responder a la solicitud de eliminación El video se bloquea en los países donde tiene derechos ese propietario del contenido.

Los otros propietarios del contenido reciben una notificación de una eliminación pendiente.

 

¿Cuál de las siguientes opciones es una alerta de que alguien podría estar intentando monetizar tus activos?

Si la cantidad de vistas obtenidas en el canal de usuario según el Informe de reclamos de videos es menor que el total de vistas obtenidas, es posible que estés perdiendo ingresos.

El Informe de reclamos muestra que otro canal que no es tu socio subió un video que reclamó uno de tus activos con seguimiento. El Informe de activos muestra que los ingresos de un activo en específico disminuyeron considerablemente.

El Informe de conflictos de activos muestra que un activo está en conflicto en uno o más territorios.

 

El socio A configuró la propiedad de un activo en Japón y el socio B configuró la propiedad del mismo activo en Corea. El socio A tiene una política de coincidencias de Monetizar en todo el mundo, mientras que el socio B tiene una política de coincidencias de Seguir en todo el mundo. Si el video de un usuario genera un reclamo por una coincidencia con este activo, ¿qué política se aplica?

Seguir en Japón y Corea

Monetizar en Japón y Corea Ninguna política

Monetizar en Japón y Seguir en Corea

 

Dos activos diferentes reclaman un video subido por un usuario. La propiedad de uno de los activos se encuentra en Canadá y tiene una política de coincidencias de Monetizar en todo el mundo. La propiedad del otro activo se estableció a nivel mundial y tiene una política de coincidencias de Monetizar en todo el mundo. ¿Qué política se aplica?

Seguir en Canadá y Monetizar en el resto del mundo Monetizar en todo el mundo

Seguir en todo el mundo

Monetizar en Canadá y Seguir en el resto del mundo

 

¿Cuál de los siguientes pasos NO debes seguir para identificar reclamos incorrectos?

Usar filtros para identificar patrones comunes en reclamos incorrectos

Crear una campaña de activos

Clasificar los activos por reclamos activos para priorizar Examinar tus reclamos impugnados y apelados

 

¿Cuál de las siguientes opciones sería un buen caso de uso de una política personalizada?

Monetizar los clips cortos subidos por los fans

Monetizar covers de una canción, pero bloquear las parodias Monetizar los videos virales durante 30 días

Emitir una solicitud de eliminación para todos los videos subidos desde China

 

En una situación con varios reclamos, un activo no tiene un propietario especificado en algunos territorios. ¿Qué política de coincidencias predeterminada aplicaría YouTube a los reclamos en esos territorios?

Eliminar

Bloquear

Seguir

Monetizar

 

Un activo con política de Monetizar en todo el mundo y otro activo con una política de Seguir en todo el mundo reclaman de manera independiente un video subido por un usuario. Si ambos socios son propietarios de sus respectivos activos en todo el mundo, ¿qué política se aplica?

Ninguna política

Seguir en todo el mundo

Bloquear en todo el mundo

Monetizar en todo el mundo

 

Contrataste a un artista que compone canciones de hip hop completamente originales. ¿Qué método deberías usar para bloquear los videos subidos por usuarios que contengan toda una canción y monetizar los clips cortos (de menos de 2 minutos)?

Bloquear si el porcentaje de coincidencia del video del usuario es del 100%

Monetizar si la duración de la coincidencia del video del usuario es menor de 2:00 y bloquear si la duración de la coincidencia del video del usuario es mayor de 2:00

Monetizar si el porcentaje de coincidencia del video del usuario es menor del 100% Monetizar si la duración de la coincidencia del video del usuario es igual a 2:00

 

¿Cuál de las siguientes opciones es un ejemplo de uso inadecuado de Content ID?

Incluir colocaciones de productos pagadas en el contenido de tu video

Reclamar copias subidas por usuarios de los comerciales de anunciantes incluidos en tu referencia de transmisión

Subir archivos de referencia a través de plantillas de hojas de cálculo

Ignorar los reclamos pendientes en tu Lista de tareas pendientes durante 1 semana

 

¿Cuáles son las tres fuentes de ingresos disponibles directamente a través de la plataforma de YouTube?

Activos, transacciones y suscripciones Anuncios, transacciones y activos Anuncios, activos y suscripciones

Anuncios, transacciones y suscripciones

 

¿Qué tipo de datos se agrega a los informes solo después de que termina el mes?

Ingresos finales

Ingresos estimados

Tiempo de reproducción

Fuentes de tráfico

 

¿Cómo se puede averiguar qué activos están «monetizados en todos los países»?

Ir al Informe de datos demográficos y ordenar por política de coincidencias

Ir al Informe de activos y ordenar por política de coincidencias

Ir al Informe de videos y ordenar por Anuncios habilitados Ir al Informe de datos demográficos y ordenar por activo

 

¿De qué manera una persona puede conocer sus ingresos en función del activo y el país?

Con el Informe de ingresos de socios de Ads

Con el Informe de activos Con el Informe demográfico Con el Informe de ingresos

 

¿Qué afirmación describe de mejor forma el Informe de ingresos?

Es un informe descargable que contiene información sobre rendimiento de diferentes tipos de anuncios en el tiempo en relación con los otros tipos.

En YouTube Analytics, contiene información sobre los tres flujos de ingresos principales para todos los tipos de contenido.

Es un informe descargable que contiene información sobre el rendimiento de los activos en el tiempo en relación con los otros tipos.

En YouTube Analytics, contiene información sobre el rendimiento de diferentes tipos de anuncios en el tiempo en relación con los otros tipos.

 

¿Qué condición de política sería eficaz para ganar ingresos de clips cortos que suban los fans?

Monetizar si la duración de la coincidencia del video del usuario se encuentra entre 3:30 y 3:45

Monetizar si la duración de la coincidencia del video del usuario es menor de 4:00

Monetizar si la duración de la coincidencia del video del usuario es mayor de 8:00 Bloquear si la duración de la coincidencia del video del usuario es mayor de 0:15

 

Un activo pertenece al socio A en Canadá y al socio B en todo el mundo, excepto Canadá. El socio A tiene una política de coincidencias de Monetizar en todo el mundo, mientras que el socio B tiene una política de coincidencias de Bloquear en todo el mundo, excepto en Canadá. Si el video de un usuario genera un reclamo por una coincidencia con este activo, ¿qué política se aplica?

Bloquear en todo el mundo

Monetizar en Canadá y Bloquear en el resto del mundo

Monetizar en todo el mundo

Seguir en Canadá y Bloquear en el resto del mundo

 

¿Qué afirmación describe de mejor forma el Informe de tarifas de anuncios?

Es un informe descargable que contiene información sobre rendimiento de diferentes tipos de anuncios en el tiempo en relación con los otros tipos.

En YouTube Analytics, contiene información sobre los tres flujos de ingresos principales para todos los tipos de contenido.

Es un informe descargable que contiene información sobre el rendimiento de los activos en el tiempo en relación con los otros tipos.

En YouTube Analytics, contiene información sobre el rendimiento de diferentes tipos de anuncios en el tiempo en relación con los otros tipos.

 

Si un activo tiene propietarios en distintos territorios, ¿cómo se pagan los ingresos?

YouTube distribuye el porcentaje correcto de los ingresos a cada propietario.

Esto no ocurre. Los activos pueden tener un solo propietario.

Un administrador externo le paga a cada propietario según el rendimiento de los activos.

El propietario que tenga el porcentaje más alto de activos debe dividir manualmente los ingresos.

 

El socio A configuró la propiedad de un activo web en EE.UU. y Canadá, mientras que el socio B configuró la propiedad del mismo activo en EE.UU. y México. El socio A tiene una política de coincidencias de Seguir en todo el mundo, mientras que el socio B tiene una política de coincidencias de Bloquear en todo el mundo. ¿Cuál es el resultado?

Seguir en EE.UU. y Canadá; Bloquear en México

Seguir en Canadá; Bloquear en EE.UU. y México

Seguir en EE.UU., Canadá y México

Bloquear en EE.UU., Canadá y México

 

¿Cuál de estos ejemplos a menudo contribuye a que se generen reclamos no válidos para los socios deportivos?

Videos virales

Comerciales

Noticias de último momento

Entrevistas a celebridades

 

¿Cuál de las siguientes opciones es uno de los principales beneficios comerciales de supervisar los informes de activos?

Prevenir incumplimientos de los derechos de autor

Identificar la posible pérdida de ingresos

Prevenir parodias  no  autorizadas

Declarar protecciones legales

 

 

 

 


 

Google Analytics Individual Qualification Exam Answers

Por

Google Analytics Individual Qualification Exam Answers PDF – Academy for ad .

During the assessment exam you will get 70 different multiple choice questions. You have to answer 80% correctly in less than 90 min. Please note, that there are 100 possible different questions. Every time you pass the exam, you get 70 questions from those 100 randomly and in random order.

Google Analytics Individual Qualification Assessment Exam Answers - Academy for ads - 2018

The duration of exam is 90 minutes
The exam have 70 questions
The passing score is 80%
Is validity period of 18 months

 

Get Certified Google Analytics Exam Answers Now!!!

 

What feature collects company-specific data such as Member Status?

  • Custom Filter
  • Event Tracking
  • Custom Dimension
  • Custom Metric

 

To recognize users across different devices, what feature must be enabled?

  • Audience Definitions
  • Attribution Models
  • Google Ads Linking
  • User ID

 

In Multi-Channel Funnel Reports, how are default conversions credited?

  • Second to last campaign, search, or ad
  • Equal credit along the conversion touchpoints
  • Last campaign, search, or ad
  • First campaign, search, or ad

 

What report indicates the pages of a website where users first arrived?

  • Landing Pages report
  • Pages report
  • Location report
  • All Pages report

 

What feature is required to send data from a web-connected device (like a point-of-sale system) to Google Analytics?

  • The Measurement Protocol
  • Data Import
  • Browser cookies
  • The Networking Protocol

 

What is not considered a default “medium” in Google Analytics?

  • referral
  • google
  • organic
  • cpc

 

What is the set of rules that determines how sales and conversions get credited based on touch-points in the conversion path?

  • Attribution modeling
  • Conversion tracking
  • Channel Groupings
  • Multi-Channel Funnels

 

What data is Google Analytics Goals unable to track?

  • Customer’s lifetime value
  • Making a purchase
  • Signing up for a newsletter
  • Watching a video

 

In Custom Reports, what must metrics and dimensions share in order to report accurately?

  • a – Same view
  • b – Same scope
  • c – Same Custom Report
  • d – Same index

 

What is used to create Smart Goals?

  • Machine-learning algorithms
  • Custom Reports
  • Analytics Goals
  • Remarketing audience

 

Which three campaign parameters are recommended to manually track campaigns?

  • Medium, Source, and Content
  • Campaign, Content, and Term
  • Medium, Source, and Campaign
  • Source, Content, and Term

 

Filters cannot perform what action on collected data?

  • Include data from specific subdomains
  • Include shopping preferences
  • Convert dynamic page URLs to readable text strings
  • Exclude traffic from particular IP addresses

 

If a user watches a video with event tracking three times in a single session, Analytics will count how many Unique Events?

  • 2
  • 6
  • 1
  • 3

 

What scope levels available for dimensions and metrics?

  • Event-level, duration-level, transaction-level, or user-level scope
  • Event-level, session-level, transaction-level, or user-level scope
  • Location-level, duration-level, product-level, or user-level scope
  • Hit-level, session-level, product-level, or user-level scope

 

Which assets cannot be shared in the Solutions Gallery?

  • Goals
  • Segments
  • Custom reports
  • Custom Dimensions

 

Which Goals are available in Google Analytics?

  • Destination, Event, Duration, Pages/Screens per Session
  • Location, Event, Time, Users per Session
  • Destination, Event, Pageview, Social
  • Pageview, Event, Transaction, Social

 

What report identifies browsers that may have had problems with a website?

  • a – The Active Users report
  • b – The Browser & OS report
  • c – The Source/Medium report
  • d – The New vs Returning report

 

What scope would be set for a Custom Dimension that reports membership status for a customer rewards program?

  • Session
  • Hit
  • Product
  • User

 

What is not considered a “source” in Google Analytics by default?

  • email
  • (direct)
  • google
  • googlemerchandisestore.com

 

If a user visits a web page with an embedded video, leaves without clicking on anything, and the session times out, how will Google Analytics report the session?

  • a – As an event
  • b – As a click
  • c – As a bounce
  • d – As an interaction

 

What is not a benefit of Google Analytics Remarketing?

  • Show customized ads to customers who have previously visited your site
  • Allow customers to quickly reorder an item they have previously purchased
  • Create remarketing lists without making changes to your existing Analytics snippet
  • Create remarketing lists based on custom segments and targets

 

What report provides data on how specific sections of a website performed?

  • Location report
  • Frequency and Recency report
  • Content Drilldown report
  • Top Events report

 

What criteria could not be used to create a Dynamic Remarketing audience?

  • a – Users who returned an item they purchased
  • b – Users who viewed a homepage
  • c – Users who viewed a search result page on a website
  • d – Users who viewed product-detail pages

 

What report shows a visual representation of user interactions on a website?

  • Behavior Flow report
  • Landing Pages report
  • Content Drilldown report
  • Treemaps report

 

A new Custom Channel Group may be applied retroactively to organize data that has been previously collected.

  • True
  • False

 

When linking a Google Ads account to Google Analytics, what is not possible?

  • Import Analytics Goals and transactions into Google Ads as conversions
  • Adjust keyword bids in Google Ads from Google Analytics
  • View Google Ads click and cost data next to site engagement data in Analytics
  • Create remarketing lists in Analytics to use in Google Ads campaigns

 

What asset is used to build a remarketing list?

  • Custom Dimension
  • Custom Segment
  • Custom Report
  • Custom Metric

 

If the Google Merchandise Store sets up a URL goal of “/ordercomplete” and a Match Type of “Begins with”, which of the following pages on www.googlemerchandisestore.com will NOT count as a goal?

  • /ordercomplete.php
  • /ordercomplete/index.html
  • /ordercomplete/thank_you.html
  • /order/complete.php

 

What does assigning a value to a Google Analytics Goal enable?

  • Track actual revenue from conversions
  • Track real-time business revenue
  • Analyze a website conversion funnel
  • Compare goal conversions and measure changes to a website

 

When does a default Analytics session expire?

  • When a user is inactive on a web page for more than 30 minutes
  • After 30 minutes, regardless of user activity on a web page
  • At noon every day
  • When a user opens a new browser window

 

What report indicates the last page users viewed before leaving a website?

  • Landing Pages report
  • All Pages report
  • Exit Pages report
  • Pages report

 

Google Analytics cannot collect data from which systems by default?

  • Offline inventory database
  • Websites
  • Online point-of-sale systems
  • Mobile devices

 

What would prevent data from appearing in a Custom Report?

  • Too many metrics in a Custom Report
  • A filter that removes all the data
  • Custom Report isn’t shared with users in the same view
  • Too many dimensions in a Custom Report

 

Where should the Analytics tracking code be placed in the HTML of a webpage for data collection?

  • Just after the opening <head> tag
  • Just before the closing </body> tag
  • Just after the opening <body> tag
  • Just before the closing </head> tag

 

Segments will not allow you to do what?

  • Create subsets of sessions or users
  • Permanently alter data
  • Build custom Remarketing lists
  • Isolate and analyze data

 

To recognize users across different devices, what is required for User ID?

  • A new Analytics account for reporting
  • Google Tag Manager
  • Sign-in that generates and sets unique IDs
  • All of the above

 

What channel is not included in the default Channels report?

  • Direct
  • Display
  • Organic Search
  • Device

 

What is not a filter setting for data in views?

  • Modify
  • Include
  • Restore
  • Exclude

 

What feature can join offline business systems data with online data collected by Google Analytics?

  • Data import
  • Goal tracking
  • User ID
  • Google Ads Linking

 

Which reports indicate how website referrals, organic search, and ad campaigns assisted in conversions?

  • Goals reports
  • Acquisition reports
  • Multi-Channel Funnel reports
  • Ecommerce reports

 

In Multi-Channel Funnel Reports, what channel would not be credited with a conversion?

  • Paid and organic search
  • Website referrals
  • Social network
  • Television commercials

 

If a Destination Goal is created for a newsletter sign-up and a user completes the newsletter sign-up three times in three separate sessions, how many Goal conversions will Google Analytics count?

  • 3
  • 2
  • 6
  • 1

 

What is a “dimension” in Google Analytics?

  • An attribute of a data set that can be organized for better analysis
  • The lifetime value of a user in a given date range
  • A report that offers different demographic information about your audience
  • A comparison of data between two date ranges

 

What feature is required to collect the number of comments users posted to a web page?

  • Custom Channel Groupings
  • Calculated Metric
  • Custom Dimension
  • Custom Metric

 

Which metric reports on how often a channel contributes to a conversion prior to last-click attribution?

  • Primary conversion
  • Second-to-last-click attribution
  • Assisted conversion
  • Secondary conversion

 

What is the “Bounce Rate” in Google Analytics?

  • Percentage of visits when a user landed on a website and exited without any interactions
  • Number of times users returned to a website in a given time period
  • Percentage of total site exits
  • Percentage of sessions in which a user exits from a homepage

 

What model represents the hierarchical structure of a Google Analytics account?

  • Property > Account > View
  • Account > Property > View
  • View > Account > Property
  • Account > View > Property

 

To increase the speed at which Google Analytics compiles reports, what action could be taken?

  • Choose “Faster response” in the sampling pulldown menu
  • Apply an advanced filter to the report
  • Remove any filters on the view
  • Choose “Greater precision” in the sampling pulldown menu

 

What campaign parameter is not available by default in Google Analytics ?

  • utm_content
  • utm_source
  • utm_medium
  • utm_adgroup

Which kinds of hits does Google Analytics track?

  • Pageview
  • Event
  • All of the above
  • Transaction

 

What metric-dimension combination is not valid?

  • Avg. Time on Page / Device Category
  • Sessions / Bounce rate
  • Sessions / Source
  • Total Events / User Type

 

Which reports indicate how traffic arrived at a website?

  • Demographics
  • Geo
  • All Traffic
  • Behavior

 

In views that don’t have data import enabled, Custom Dimensions values may be viewed for dates before the Custom Dimension was created.

  • TRUE
  • FALSE

 

Custom Dimensions can be used as what?

  • Primary dimensions in Custom Reports
  • All of the above
  • Secondary dimensions in Custom Reports
  • Secondary dimensions in Standard reports

 

What feature must be enabled to use Multi-Channel Funnels?

  • Custom Dimensions
  • Advertising Features
  • Goals or Ecommerce
  • In-page Analytics

 

What data table display compares report metrics to the website average?

  • Pivot
  • Percentage
  • Performance
  • Comparison

 

View filters are applied in what order?

  • Creation date
  • Random order
  • Sequential order
  • Alphabetical order

 

Auto-tagging is used to collect data from what kind of traffic?

  • Social media traffic
  • Social media traffic
  • Google Ads Campaign traffic
  • Website referral traffic

 

What report indicates where users start or exit the conversion funnel?

  • Goal Flow
  • Treemaps
  • Cohort Analysis
  • User Timings

 

Which parameters can be included with an event hit for reporting?

  • Event, Category, Action, Label
  • Category, Action, Label, Unique Events
  • Category, Action, Label, Value
  • Category, Action, Label, Total Events

 

What Remarketing audiences cannot be defined by default?

  • Users who speak a particular language
  • Users who visited a physical store
  • Users who played a video on a website
  • Users who visited a specific page on a website

 

To track users and sessions across multiple domains, what first must be set up?

  • Data Import
  • Ad Exchange Linking
  • Cross-domain tracking
  • Google Ads Linking

 

When the same default tracking code is installed on pages with different domains, what will result?

  • Analytics will associate users and sessions with a single domain
  • Analytics will not associate users and sessions with any domain
  • Analytics will send an alert about duplicate data collection
  • Analytics will associate users and sessions with their respective domains

 

What feature would be used to collect how many times users downloaded a product catalog?

  • Custom Report
  • Event Tracking
  • Calculated Metrics
  • Custom Dimension

 

What is a “secondary dimension” in Google Analytics?

  • An additional report dimension for more specific analysis
  • A dashboard widget that offers more specific analysis
  • A visualization to understand the impact of data
  • An additional report metric for more specific analysis

 

When will Google Analytics be unable to identify sessions from the same user by default?

  • a – When the sessions happen in the same browser on the same deviceAn additional report dimension for more specific analysis
  • b – When the sessions share the same browser cookie
  • c – When the sessions happen in different browsers on the same device
  • d – When the sessions happen in the same browser on the same day

 

What report shows which web pages get the most traffic and highest engagement?

  • Frequency and Recency report
  • Active Users report
  • Engagement report
  • All Pages report

 

View filters may be applied retroactively to any data that has been processed.

  • False
  • True

 

What report shows the percentage of traffic that previously visited a website?

  • Behavior > Frequency and Recency report
  • Interests > Affinity categories report
  • All traffic > Referrals report
  • Behavior > New vs returning report

 

Once filters have been applied, what is the option to recover filtered data?

  • Filtered data is not recoverable
  • Data may be recovered within 10 days
  • Data may be recovered within 30 days
  • Data may be recovered within 5 days

 

For autotagging, what parameter does Google Ads include in the destination URL?

  • adid=
  • urlid=
  • utm=
  • gclid=

 

What report shows the percent of site traffic that visited previously?

  • Sales Performance report
  • Frequency & Recency report
  • Referrals report
  • New vs Returning report

 

What report shows users who initiated sessions over 1-day, 7-day, 14-day, and 30-day periods?

  • Active Users report
  • User Explorer report
  • Users Flow report
  • Cohort Analysis report

 

To view accurate data in a Custom Report, what action should be avoided?

  • Pair metrics and dimensions of different scopes
  • Use multiple dimensions together in the same report
  • Create a report with Custom Metrics
  • Use a Custom Dimension as a primary dimension

 

How would a view filter be configured to include only users from Brazil and Argentina?

  • Filter 1: include Brazil > Filter 2: include Argentina
  • Filter 1: include Argentina > Filter 2: include Brazil
  • Filter 1: include Brazil or Argentina
  • Filter 1: exclude all countries except Brazil and Argentina

 

What cannot be collected by the default Analytics tracking code?

  • Device and operating system
  • User’s favorite website
  • Page visits
  • Browser language setting

 

Views can include website data collected before the view was created.

  • FALSE
  • TRUE

 

What report shows which types of mobile devices visited a website?

  • Technology > Network report
  • Site Content > Landing Page report
  • Mobile > Devices report
  • All Traffic > Source/Medium report

 

Within how many days can a deleted view be restored?

  • 25
  • 5
  • 35
  • 15

 

What is not a benefit of using segments to analyze data?

  • Isolate and analyze specific conversion paths using conversion segments
  • Permanently modify the data in a view
  • Analyze users by single or multi-session conditions
  • Compare behavior metrics for groups of users like Converters vs non Converters

 

What type of Custom Report shows a static sortable table with rows of data?

  • Flat Table
  • Explorer
  • Map Overlay
  • Pivot Table

 

What feature is required to track customer search terms on a website?

  • Enhanced Ecommerce
  • Site Search
  • Data Import
  • Search filters

 

What is a “metric” in Google Analytics?

  • The numbers in a data set often paired with dimensions
  • The dates in a date range
  • A segment of data separated out in a report for comparison
  • A dimension that can help analyze site performance

 

What criteria cannot be used to create a Custom Segment?

  • Ad type
  • Dimensions
  • Metrics
  • Sequences of user actions

 

Which default traffic source dimensions does Google Analytics report for each website visitor?

  • Campaign and Ad Content
  • Source and Campaign
  • Source and Medium
  • Campaign and Medium

 

Which user characteristic may NOT be used to change keyword bids in Google Ads?

  • time of day
  • location
  • device
  • ad preference

 

When does the Analytics tracking code send a pageview hit to Google Analytics?

  • a – Every time a user adds an item to an online shopping cart
  • b – Every time a user clicks a video on a website
  • c – Every time a user searches on a website
  • d – Every time a user loads a webpage with embedded tracking code

 

What campaigns require manual tags on destination URLs for tracking?

  • None of the above
  • Google Ads campaigns
  • Autotagged campaigns
  • Email campaigns

 

What filter would only include data from a campaign titled “Back to School” in Campaign reports?

  • a – Custom Include filter with field “Page Title” and pattern “back to school”
  • b – Custom Include filter with field “Campaign Name” and pattern “back to school”
  • c – Custom Search and Replace filter with field “Campaign Name”, string “back to school”, and pattern “include”
  • d – Predefined Include filter with “traffic to the hostname” “that are equal to” “back to school”

 

What scope applies to Custom Metrics?

  • Customer
  • Session
  • Hit
  • User

 

What report compares metrics based on user acquisition date over a series of weeks?

  • User Explorer
  • Active Users
  • Users Flow
  • Cohort Analysis

 

The default session timeout duration in Google Analytics is how many minutes?

  • 5
  • 10
  • 30
  • 20

 

What data does Google Analytics prohibit collecting?

  • Product SKU(s)
  • Billing city
  • Purchase amount
  • Personally identifable information

 

Using a standard Google Analytics configuration, which characteristics cannot be used to create a custom segment?

  • Users 25 to 34 years old who have their browser set to Spanish
  • Users who engaged in a social media or email campaign
  • Users who viewed a page on a website, then watched a video
  • Users who are female and have children

 

Sampling is applied to reports before segmentation.

  • TRUE
  • FALSE

 

If a web page visitor clears the Analytics cookie from their browser, what will occur?

  • All of the above
  • Analytics will set a new browser cookie the next time a browser loads a tracked page
  • Analytics will set a new unique ID the next time a browser loads a tracked page
  • Analytics will not be able to associate user behavior data with past data collected

 

Which reports require the activation of Advertising Features?

  • Geo reports
  • Cohort Analysis reports
  • Real-time reports
  • Demographics and Interests reports

 

When does the tracking code send an event hit to Google Analytics?

  • Every time a user performs an action with pageview tracking implemented
  • Every time a user adds an event to their calendar
  • Every time a user performs an action with event tracking implemented
  • Every time a user makes a reservation

 

Sharing a Custom Report will share the report configuration and data included in the report.

  • TRUE
  • FALSE

 

 

 

 

 

Google Ads Fundamentals Certification Assessment Answers

Por

The Google Adwords Fundamentals Exam Answers is now Google Ads Fundamentals Certification Assessment Answers and covers basic and intermediate concepts, including the benefits of online advertising and AdWords, and best practices for managing and optimizing AdWords campaigns.

 

 

Google Adwords Fundamentals Assessment Exam Answers – Academy for ads

The exam is 120 minutes
The exam have 100 questions
The passing score of the exam is 80%.
The certification is validity period of 12 months

 

The Exam contains 65 questions. You have 90 minutes to answer them. But there are 128 possible different questions you could get during AdWords Fundamentals Assessment Exam. This means that every time you take an exam, you randomly get 65 questions out of 127.

 

Get Certified in Google Ads Fundamentals NOW!!!

 

 

When people search for your client’s watch repair business, they use very specific terms like “vintage watch repairs”. To show your ads for these searches, you’ll want to use:

  • Broad match keywords
  • Exact match keywords
  • Negative match keywords
  • Phrase match keywords

 

Julian wants to reach potential customers based on the type of device they’re using, but he doesn’t know how his campaign performs on different devices. How can Julian find meaningful data that will help him decide which devices to target?

  • Segment his campaign statistics by device
  • Set up an experiment to test which device he should target
  • Negative match keywords
  • Create multiple campaigns that target different devices, and monitor the results

 

Which statistic indicates how often a click has led to a conversion?

  • Conversion rate
  • Cost-per-thousand impressions (CPM)
  • Clickthrough rate (CTR)
  • Cost–per–conversion

 

Blake is focused on branding and is more interested in his ads being viewed than in generating clicks. Which of these features would not be a good fit for him?

  • Cost–per–thousand–impressions (CPM) bidding
  • Placement targeting
  • Reach and frequency data
  • Call extensions

 

An advertiser looking to drive conversions is using manual cost–per–click (CPC) bidding. Which factor should be most important for this advertiser when deciding keyword bids?

  • The profit derived from a paid click
  • The bids of the next closest advertiser
  • The average profit per conversion
  • The Quality Score of the keyword

 

An e-commerce client wants her campaign to be more profitable. After calculating this client’s total profits from Google Ads, what can you do to start maximizing results for profit?

  • Test only one version of your ad text
  • Lower the cost-per-click (CPC) bids and increase the budget
  • Delete keywords that are generating the most clicks
  • Test different cost-per-click (CPC) bids

 

When creating a keyword list using broad match, why should you leave out misspellings and plural forms of keywords?

  • Broad match only includes the exact words and phrases a user searches for
  • Your keyword list would be disapproved based on Google’s advertising policies
  • Google Ads only shows an ad for keywords with proper spelling and plural forms
  • Google Ads can automatically include these variations for you

 

Which is the best bidding option for an advertiser who wants to drive more clicks from mobile devices?

  • Target cost-per-acquisition (CPA)
  • Mobile bid adjustments
  • Target search page location
  • Target return on ad spend (ROAS)

 

How would you recommend that William set his budget if he wants to spend US $608 per month on his campaign?

  • Set a daily budget of $20 for the advertiser’s campaign
  • Set a bid of $20 for the advertiser’s campaign
  • Set a bid of $20 per ad group
  • Set a daily budget of $20 for the advertiser’s account

 

A conversion is:

  • When someone reaches your landing page after clicking your ad or video
  • By definition when someone makes a purchase after clicking on your ad
  • Any interaction with your ad that can be measured, like watching a video for a certain length of time
  • An action defined as valuable to your business that someone takes after clicking on your ad

 

When reviewing the Search terms report for one of your client’s campaigns, you notice several terms that aren’t relevant to what they’re advertising. How can you use this information when refining the campaign’s keywords?

  • Add the terms as keywords
  • Add the terms as negative keywords
  • Add the terms as exact match keywords
  • Add the terms as phrase match keywords

 

Your client noticed that his ad was disapproved for editorial reasons. Why is it important for him to understand and abide by Google’s advertising policies?

  • Google Ads policies can help web users distinguish between ads and search results
  • Google Ads policies can keep disapproved ads and websites out of organic search results
  • Google Ads policies can help keep ad costs low and affordable for advertisers
  •  Google Ads policies can help ensure ads are useful, varied, relevant, and safe for web users

 

How can you see if people are searching for your client’s services during the early morning and evening hours?

  • Segment performance statistics by time
  • Monitor reach and frequency data
  • Run a Search terms report
  • Run a keyword diagnosis

 

Tony travels frequently. He needs to be able to make changes to his Google Ads account while he’s offline, so he downloads AdWords Editor. Using AdWords Editor, Tony can do all of the following except:

  • Manage, edit, and view multiple accounts at the same time
  • Refresh data to reflect the latest statistics on his cost–per–click (CPC) campaign
  • Copy or move items between ad groups and campaigns
  • Undo and redo multiple changes while editing his campaigns

 

An advertiser wants to achieve the top position in paid search results. Which recommendations would improve the likelihood of the advertiser’s ad showing in the top position?

  • Improve Quality Score and increase cost-per-click (CPC) bid
  • Improve Quality Score and decrease cost-per-click (CPC) bid
  • Decrease cost-per-click (CPC) bid and decrease dailybudget
  • Decrease cost-per-click (CPC) bid and increase daily budget

 

Belinda’s boutique just started carrying 3 new designer labels. She wants to show an image ad announcing the new collections to people who are browsing websites about designer clothing. Which campaign type is a good fit?

  • “Search Network”
  • “Search Network with Display opt-in”
  • “Display Network”
  • ”Shopping”

 

Which is a benefit of advertising online?

  • Reach people who are likely interested in what you’re advertising
  • Make money by showing ads on your website
  • Increase your position in organic search results
  • Automatically collect information about potential customers

 

When choosing a maximum cost–per–click (max. CPC) bid, you should consider the amount that you make from a purchase because you want to set a bid amount that’s:

  • based on how much your product is worth
  • the same amount as the revenue generated by your product
  • the same amount as the profit generated by your product
  • 50% of how much your product is worth

 

Mary’s campaign consistently meets its average daily budget. What should she do to maximize her budget throughout the entire day?

  • Increase her daily budget
  • Change the ad delivery method from “Standard” to “Accelerated”
  • Change the ad delivery method from “Accelerated” to “Standard”
  • Segment her campaign performance by time of day

 

Which is a benefit of advertising online with Google Ads?

  • Advertisers can choose how much they spend and only pay when someone clicks their ad
  • Advertisers can have ads automatically translated into different languages
  • Advertisers can pay to always show their ad above the organic search results
  • Advertisers pay the same amount every time someone clicks their ad

 

Caleb owns a music store and is creating an ad group for musical instrument rentals. What would be the most appropriate landing page for his ad?

  • A page with information on music lessons and a contact form
  • His homepage, with links to instrument sales, rentals, and music lessons
  • A page with information on instrument rentals and a contact form
  • A page with a wide selection of instruments for sale

 

What bidding strategy should Tracy, a pizzeria owner, use to get more people to call her business?

  • Cost-per-click (CPC)
  • Cost-per-view (CPV)
  • Cost-per-thousand viewable impressions (vCPM)
  • Cost-per-acquisition (CPA)

 

What does a high Quality Score indicate?

  • You have been a Google Ads user for a long time.
  • Your ad relevance and landing page are below average.
  • Your bid is high enough to have your ad displayed.
  • Your ad and landing page are relevant and useful to a viewer.

 

Each campaign in your Google Ads account should have a single:

  • ad group
  • business goal
  • maximum cost–per–click (max. CPC) bid
  • landing page

 

What happens when a campaign consistently meets its average daily budget?

  • Your budget is automatically adjusted
  • Ads in that campaign will show less often than they could
  • Ads in that campaign will stop showing for the rest of the billing cycle
  • Average cost–per–click (CPC) bids will be lowered

 

Susan’s Sporting Goods sells a variety of sports equipment and clothing. How should Susan set up her Google Ads account?

  • Create one account for Susan’s sporting goods. Create one campaign for both equipment and clothing. Create one ad group that includes basketballs, tennis rackets, jerseys, and baseball hats.
  • Create two accounts: one for equipment and one for clothing. Within the equipment account, create a campaign for basketballs and tennis rackets. Within the clothing account, create a campaign for jerseys and baseball hats.
  • Create an account for each product Susan’s Sporting Goods sells. In each account, create a single ad group for all equipment and clothing products.
  • Create one account for Susan’s Sporting Goods. Create two campaigns: one for equipment and one for clothing. Within the equipment campaign, create ad groups for basketballs and tennis rackets. Within the clothing campaign, create ad groups for jerseys and baseball hats.

 

How should an advertiser with stores in both India and Germany set up an Google Ads account to target users in these different locations?

  • Create two separate ad groups, each targeting one of these locations.
  • Create two separate accounts, one for each of these locations.
  • None of the above. Google Ads can’t target users in specific locations.
  • Create two separate campaigns, each targeting one of these locations.

 

How much are you charged for a click on your Google Ads ad?

  • You’re charged $0.01 for every click
  • You’re charged 10 cents more than the next highest bid.
  • You’re charged the full amount you bid.
  • You’re charged only the minimum amount needed to maintain your ad’s position.

 

Tom wants to promote his windshield repair company’s emergency service by reaching people when they’re searching for help. Which campaign type is a good fit?

  • «Search Network with Display Opt-in”
  • “Shopping”
  • “Search Network”
  • “Display Network”

 

What value is used to determine whether your ad will show on a page and, if so, the ad’s position?

  • Ad Rank
  • Ad Score
  • Quality Score
  • Quality Factor

 

Clyde wants to raise the profile of his dance school. A “Display Network” campaign can help him:

  • pick the most popular keywords for his campaign
  • show ads on dance websites and YouTube videos
  • show ads when someone searches for dance classes
  • match his ad text to what people are searching

 

Laura runs an online store with a large inventory of children’s toys and games. Which ad format would you use for Laura’s campaign to reach people interested in purchasing children’s games?

  • Image ads
  • App promotion ads
  • Shopping ads
  • Sitelink extensions

 

An advertiser wants to display a text ad that includes extra details like the business’s location and phone number. Which ad format should the advertiser use?

  • Ads with extensions
  • Image ads
  • Shopping ads
  • Video ads

 

What’s a benefit of having multiple ads in an ad group?

  • Google Ads will automatically match each ad to the keywords it’s most relevant to
  • Ads are only eligible to show at the top of the page if there’s more than one ad in that ad group
  • When using optimize for clicks, Google Ads will automatically rotate your ads and give the best performing ones a better chance of showing more often
  • Ads are only eligible to show ad extensions if there’s more than one ad in that ad group

 

You would choose to advertise on the Search Network if you wanted to:

  • choose the types of websites where you want your ads to show
  • reach customers browsing websites related to your business
  • choose from a range of ad formats, like video and image ads
  • reach customers while they’re searching for your products or services

 

An advertiser should group their campaigns by:

  • maximum cost–per–click (CPC) bids
  • number of ad groups per campaign
  • number of keywords
  • type of product or service

 

Which client would you advise to use radius targeting?

  • Christopher, who wants to promote his new product in select cities
  • Denise, whose service can reach customers within 30 miles
  • Luis, whose e–commerce business delivers nationwide
  • Mabel, who wants to exclude her ads from certain cities

 

Why might you use the “Search Network campaigns with Display opt-in” campaign type?

  • Your video ads can run on the Search Network
  • Your ads only show on the first page of search results
  • You can pick the exact websites where you want your ad to show
  • You can use one budget to advertise on the Search Network and Display Network

 

Your client wants to show ads to people who’ve visited her website before. Which Google Ads feature would you recommend she use?

  • Ecommerce tracking
  • Remarketing
  • Dynamic Search Ads
  • Conversion tracking

 

Data shows that the audience for a client’s running shoe store is women ages 35 to 50. How can you optimize this client’s Display Network campaign based on your research?

  • Set up a remarketing list to show ads to women who have previously visited your client’s website
  • Increase cost–per–click (CPC) bids and experiment with variations of ad text that includes running tips
  • Use frequency capping to limit the number of times men ages 40 to 65 see your client’s ads
  • Add demographic and age targeting to show ads to people in this audience

 

Your travel agency client is running a very targeted campaign to reach people who are visiting Paris on vacation and don’t live in France. What would be an effective way to target this client’s customers?

  • Create a campaign with ads and keywords written in French
  • Create a keyword list with the exact match keyword “Paris” and negative keyword “France”
  • Create a campaign targeting French and regions other than Paris
  • Create a campaign targeting Paris and languages other than French

 

What changes can you make to the Display Network campaign of a client who wants to drive awareness of her natural beauty brand?

  • Add affinity audiences targeting people interested in green living and beauty
  • Target large metropolitan areas where people are more likely to encounter her product
  • Increase the daily budget and add text ads with clear call-to-actions like “Buy now”
  • Use a balanced combination of broad-, exact-, and phrase-matched keywords

 

A standard Google Ads text ad is made up of:

  • headline text, an image, and description text
  • headline text and description text
  • a display URL and description text
  • headline text, a display URL, and description text

 

What is the recommended next step if you noticed from the Search terms report that certain search terms are leading to a high number of clicks on your ads?

  • Make sure relevant search terms are keywords and adjust your bid or ad text for these keywords
  • Add search terms that are not leading to many clicks as negative keywords
  • Add sitelinks to your ads to make them even more prominent
  • Make sure all of these search terms are included as keywords, regardless of relevance

 

Your client’s campaign is getting a lot of clicks, but the conversion rate is low. Which approach could help improve your client’s conversion rate?

  • Make sure the landing page is closely related to the ad
  • Increase the average daily budget for the campaign
  • Increase the cost–per–click (CPC) bid for low–performing keywords
  • Broaden the list of keywords to reach more potential customers

 

You can use Keyword Planner to identify:

  • webpages where your ad can appear based on your keywords
  • which text ads are performing best based on your keywords
  • the amount of traffic potential keywords might get
  • the number of negative keywords you should add

 

Your client noticed last month that his ad often showed up beside another advertiser’s ad for the same search terms. How can you help your client understand how he is performing compared to other advertisers?

  • Use the Auction insights report to show how often his ads rank higher in search results than those of other advertisers
  • Use the Search term report to show which search terms lead to the most clicks on his ads
  • Use the top movers report to show which campaigns have seen the biggest change in clicks since last month
  • Use the paid & organic report to show when his website appears in organic search, with no associated ads

 

An advertiser wants to know the minimum amount of money that she must spend on a Google Ads campaign. What should you tell her?

  • $100.00
  • $5
  • There is no minimum
  • $2

 

Advertising on TV, print, and radio typically requires a predetermined budget. What key difference with online advertising campaigns allow advertisers to invest with more flexibility?

  • Online campaigns are highly measurable and can often automate a positive ROI. It can be strategic to capture all traffic without a predetermined budget as long as ROI is positive.
  • Budgets for online campaigns can only be set once annually and require a fixed commitment.
  • Online campaigns generate clicks, whereas other channels generate exposure
  • Budgets cannot be applied to online campaigns due to constant changes in traffic.

 

Your client’s campaign is consistently meeting its average daily budget. What should you do to maximize your client’s budget throughout all hours of the day?

  • Increase the maximum cost–per–click (CPC) bid
  • Pause the campaign to stop showing ads and accruing costs
  • Lower the daily budget amount
  • Change the ad delivery method from “Accelerated” to “Standard”

 

Maria noticed last month that her ad often showed up beside a competitor’s ad for the same search terms. How can Maria understand how her performance compares to that of other advertisers?

  • Use the Search terms report to see the terms people were searching for when her ad was shown.
  • Use the Auction insights report to show how often her ads rank higher in search results than those of other advertisers.
  • Track the clicks and clickthrough rate (CTR) of her ad campaign.
  • Use the paid & organic report to see how often her website pages are showing in Google’s free organic search results.

 

Which targeting option should an advertiser use when trying to reach 25-30 year oldmales?

  • Demographic targeting
  • Interest category targeting
  • Contextual targeting
  • Keyword targeting

 

What report can help you identify opportunities to improve your keywords and ads?

  • Time segmentation report
  • Search terms report
  • Auction insights report
  • Paid & organic report

 

Which two metrics help show you how many people found your ad compelling enough to actually click on it and visit your website? (Choose 2)

  • Clicks
  • Clickthrough rate (CTR)
  • Impressions
  • Search terms

 

How are manual extensions different from automatic extensions?

  • Manual extensions require you to fill out additional information. Automatic extensions do not.
  • Manual extensions cost more than automatic extensions
  • There is only one type of manual extension but many types of automatic extensions
  • Automatic extensions require setup. Manual extensions do not.

 

You would choose to advertise on the Display Network if you wanted to:

  • show ads on Google Maps
  • show ads to people on non-Google search sites
  • show ads on websites related to your business
  • show ads on Google Shopping

 

One of your clients wants to know why a campaign went over the specified daily budget several days in a row. What would you explain to your client about how the Google Ads system works?

  • Due to changes in traffic, Google Ads allows up to 20% more impressions in a day than the budget specifies
  • To show an ad more often, Google Ads charges more than the average daily budget amount multiplied by 30.4
  • Google Ads automatically increases the maximum cost–per–click (CPC) bid to show an ad higher in Google search results
  • Due to changes in traffic, your total daily cost might be up to 2 times your average daily budget. However, with all Google Ads campaigns you won’t be charged more than your average daily budget multiplied by the average number of days in a month (30.4)

 

What bidding strategy should you use to maximize the number of visitors to your website?

  • Cost-per-view (CPV)
  • Cost-per-thousand viewable impressions (vCPM)
  • Cost-per-click (CPC)
  • Cost-per-acquisition (CPA)

 

Which delivery type shows your ads at an even pace throughout the day?

  • Delayed delivery
  • Optimized delivery
  • Standard delivery
  • Accelerated delivery

 

Your ad can show on the Search Network when someone searches for terms that are similar to your:

  • website
  • placements
  • keywords
  • ad text

 

Google Analytics can help you learn more about the behavior of your client’s customers because it shows you how:

  • they perceive her products
  • they interact with her website
  • likely they are to become a regular customer
  • likely they are to click her ads

 

Let’s say your cost-per-click is $0.05 on average and you want around 200 clicks per day. What should you set as your daily budget?

  • $10
  • $25
  • $5
  • $2.50

Which bid strategy should Sara use if her goal is to get more people to call her local catering business?

  • Cost-per-view (CPV)
  • Cost-per-thousand-impressions (CPM)
  • Cost-per-acquisition (CPA)
  • Cost-per-click (CPC)

 

An advertiser wants to create ads that target potential customers in California. Which targeting method should this advertiser use to target these customers?

  • Device targeting
  • Keyword targeting
  • Audience targeting
  • Location targeting

 

Using the paid & organic report for her travel website, Karen noticed a relatively high organic clicks/query rate for the search query “Hawaii vacations.” What does this mean?

  • Karen’s average organic position is higher than other advertisers’, but her average ad position is lower than other advertisers’
  • People who see Karen’s site in relevant organic search results often click through to her site
  • Karen’s ads often show below her organic results for the search query
  • Karen’s ads don’t often show for the search query

 

Why would an advertiser use sitelinks?

  • To give customers quick access to multiple pages of an advertiser’s website
  • To showcase customer reviews with high-quality survey data
  • To show a link that sends people to the app store or starts downloading an app
  • To let customers click a button to call the business

 

Which strategy should Giorgio use to increase the number of relevant clicks from his Search Network campaign?

  • Broaden his keyword list for ads with the lowest clickthrough rate (CTR)
  • Increase bids for ads with the lowest average position and clickthrough rate (CTR)
  • Add new relevant keywords and remove keywords with low clickthrough rate (CTR)
  • Increase bids on relevant keywords with low clicks and clickthrough rate (CTR)

 

You can use audience targeting to show your ads to:

  • specific groups of people, based on their location
  • specific websites, based on specific interests
  • groups of websites, based on specific interests
  • specific groups of people, based on their interests

 

Nadia manages a local gym and is running an ad to drive more free trial memberships. What could she include in her ad text?

  • A call-to-action like “Sign up for a free trial”
  • A prominent headline like “TRIAL MEMBERSHIPS AVAILABLE”
  • A call-to-action like “Visit our gym now”
  • A promotion like “20% off fitness classes”

 

What’s one of the main benefits of using ad extensions?

  • Extensions are automated so you don’t have to create your ads
  • Extensions increase your reach by showing your ad on more advertising networks
  • Extensions ensure a higher clickthrough rate (CTR) because they make your ad more prominent
  • Extensions provide additional information to make your ads more relevant to customers

 

Adam, a flower shop owner, wants to drive phone calls to his store. Which Google Ads tool should he use to track how many calls result from ad clicks on a mobile phone?

  • Conversion tracking
  • Search terms report
  • Impressions
  • Reach and frequency

 

When someone clicks your ad, the actual amount you’re charged will be:

  • The minimum needed to hold your ad position, under the maximum cost–per–click (max. CPC) limit
  • The minimum needed to hold your ad position, but never less than 50% of your maximum cost–per–click (max. CPC) bid
  • The minimum needed to hold your ad position, but never more than 120% of your maximum cost–per–click (max. CPC) bid
  • The minimum needed to hold your ad position or 50% of your maximum cost–per–click (max. CPC) bid, whichever is greater

 

When creating text ads to advertise a client’s small chain of Italian restaurants, what should you include in the ad text to make it compelling to potential customers?

  • Information about Italian food in the description
  • Include call–to–actions, such as “Find the nearest location”
  • An exclamation point in the display URL
  • Use the same headline and description as other advertisers

 

Your client wants to increase the number of people visiting his website. When analyzing the data for his Search campaign, which metric do you most want to improve?

  • Clickthrough rate (CTR)
  • Conversion rate
  • Impressions
  • Clicks

 

You would advise a client that’s launching a new product line to advertise on the Display Network because she can:

  • reach people who are interested in similar products
  • reach people who are searching for her products
  • use text ads that encourage people to call her business
  • use text ads that encourage people to visit her website

 

Data for your client shows that more estimated total conversions are coming from mobile devices versus computers and tablets. How can you use this data to optimize your client’s bidding strategy?

  • Use target search page location to help get your client’s ads to the top of mobile search page results
  • Set a mobile bid adjustment to decrease bids for searches on computers and tablets
  • Set a mobile bid adjustment to increase bids for searches on mobile devices
  • Use enhanced cost–per–click (ECPC) to increase bids that are likely to result in conversions from mobile devices

 

Your ad can show to a potential customers when your targeted language matches:

  • the customer’s Google interface language setting
  • the customer’s operating system language
  • the language of websites a user visits most often
  • the customer’s browser setting

 

Every time your ad is eligible to show, Google Ads calculates its Ad Rank using your bid amount, components of Quality Score, and:

  • the expected impact of extensions and other ad formats
  • your historical conversion rate
  • the search ranking of your website
  • the daily budget you’ve set

 

Target cost-per-acquisition (CPA) bidding can help drive conversions by using your conversion history and:

  • cost-per-click (CPC) goals to raise your bid when a conversion is more likely
  • cost-per-acquisition (CPA) goals to show the optimal ad when a conversion is more likely
  • cost-per-click (CPC) goals to show the optimal ad when a conversion is more likely
  • cost-per-acquisition (CPA) goals to raise your bid when a conversion is more likely

 

When reviewing your client’s Search Network campaign, you notice that an ad in one of the ad groups has a lower average position. Which automated bid strategy should you use to help improve the position of these ads?

  • Target return on ad spend (ROAS)
  • Maximize clicks
  • Target search page location
  • Enhanced cost-per-click (CPC)

 

On the Display Network, your ad is eligible to show on a webpage if your:

  • landing page matches that webpage’s content
  • keywords match that webpage’s content
  • ad text matches that webpage’s content
  • website matches that webpage’s content

 

Cliff just started working with a client who has a very disorganized Google Ads account. What’s an effective way for him to begin restructuring his client’s account?

  • Create one campaign for all the products his client offers
  • Create one campaign with a broad selection of keywords
  • Create campaigns based on the structure of his client’s website
  • Create multiple campaigns, each with a set of related keywords

 

What happens as a result of a search campaign consistently meeting its daily budget?

  • Fewer sites targeted at once
  • Higher average cost–per–clicks (CPCs)
  • Missed potential ad impressions
  • Accelerated ad delivery

 

Sally’s Spice Store sells a variety of spices and healthy cooking ingredients. Which targeting method should Sally choose if she wants her ads to show on websites that focus on health, wellness, and home-cooking?

  • Location targeting
  • Intuitive targeting
  • Topic targeting
  • Placement targeting

 

Which campaign type would an advertiser use to target users searching on Google.com?

  • “Search Network with Display opt-in”
  • “Search Network”
  • “Display Network”
  • ”Video campaign”

 

If you’d like your ads to show on certain sites across the Internet, you can add these websites as:

  • Audiences
  • Topics
  • Placements
  • Keywords

 

Which client would you advise to advertise on the Search Network?

  • Suzy, who wants to reach people browsing travel websites about China
  • Jim, who wants to reach people on social networks interested in poetry
  • Carol, who wants to reach people watching YouTube videos
  • Bill, who wants to reach people looking for plumbing services

 

An advertiser wants to increase the Quality Score of a low–performing keyword. Which approach would you recommend?

  • Set an ad group bid adjustment of +20% for that keyword
  • Modify the ad associated with that keyword to direct to a highly-relevant landing page
  • Delete the keyword and use Keyword Planner to find more relevant keywords
  • Delete the keyword and add a synonym of the keyword to the campaign

 

How do cost-per-click (CPC) ads compete with cost-per-thousand impressions (CPM) ads on the Display Network?

  • Ads using CPC bids are not allowed to compete on the Display Network
  • CPM bids are effectively converted to CPC bids
  • CPC bids are effectively converted to CPM bids
  • CPC and CPM bids only compete against bids of the same type

 

 

Which of the following items is not a component of Quality Score?

  • Ad relevance
  • Expected clickthrough rate (CTR)
  • Maximum cost–per–click (max. CPC) bid
  • Landing page experience

 

Your client gets more conversions from ads that appear to people in Tokyo. What actions should you take to try and increase the number of conversions for this client?

  • Create a separate ad group to target ads and bids for Tokyo
  • Refine where your ads show by adding the keyword “Tokyo”
  • Use the user location report to understand if people who click your ads are located in Tokyo
  • Use a location bid adjustment to increase bids for customers in Tokyo

 

Which two bidding strategies can boost brand awareness and recognition? (Choose 2)

  • Cost-per-view (CPV)
  • Cost-per-thousand viewable impressions (vCPM)
  • Cost-per-acquisition (CPA)
  • Cost-per-click (CPC)

 

Your client wants to improve her ad position. What would you recommend?

  • Improve the ad quality and increase bid amount
  • Improve Quality Score and decrease bid amount
  • Make the ad headline longer and more descriptive
  • Add more keywords and increase daily budget

 

What’s one benefit of creating multiple ad groups?

  • You can pause specific keywords if they’re not performing well
  • You can break up keywords and ads into related themes
  • You can set different budgets for each ad group
  • You can target specific ad groups into various Google networks

 

 

Paige’s Pet Store is deciding on keywords for a new Google Ads campaign. How should Paige set up her Google Ads keywords?

  • Use the Keyword Planner to come up with keyword ideas for Display Network campaigns.
  • Use negative keywords for terms that are related to pets and animals.
  • Bundle similar keywords together in one ad group based on common themes.
  • Use general keywords to reach a specific audience.

 

You signed 3 new clients, each with an existing Google Ads account. What’s the best way to manage these accounts?

  • Pause your clients’ campaigns and recreate them in your Google Ads manager account
  • Link the client accounts to your Google Ads manager account
  • Use your clients’ sign–in information to access and manage the accounts
  • Consolidate the 3 accounts into a new Google Ads account you create

 

How are negative keywords different from other keywords?

  • They can increase your costs.
  • They can only be used for ads on the Display Network.
  • They prevent your ad from showing for search terms that you don’t want.
  • They make your ad appear for search terms that you don’t want.

 

How are rich media ads different from other ad formats?

  • They are a type of text ad
  • They are static image ads
  • They are ads with animation or other types of motion
  • They are displayed on the Search Network

 

A client wants to promote her new mobile app by showing her ads in other mobile apps. How can Google Ads help accomplish her goal?

  • Google’s Display Network includes many mobile apps where she could show her ad
  • She can use keywords like “mobile app” to target people who are more likely to download her app
  • She can use mobile app extensions to reach users in apps
  • Google’s Search Network will help her target people who are more likely to download her app

 

An advertiser wants to know if Shopping ads will appear on YouTube. What should you tell her?

  • Shopping Ads can only appear on Google.com
  • Shopping ads can only show on pre-roll video ads on YouTube
  • Shopping Ads can only appear on retail websites.
  • Shopping ads can appear on Google Search partner websites like YouTube

 

Why should you link your client’s Google Ads account to Search Console?

  • See which campaigns have the biggest changes in clicks, costs, and conversions
  • See how often your ads rank higher in search results than those of other advertisers participating in the same auction
  • See how your ads performed when triggered by actual searches
  • See if people reach your client’s website via ads or organic search results

 

Which targeting option can help you reach people who’ve previously visited your website?

  • Remarketing
  • Interest category targeting
  • Demographic targeting
  • Device targeting

 

An advertiser wants to target people on the Search Network who have previously visited their website. What should they do?

  • They should use device targeting
  • They should use placement targeting
  • They should create remarketing lists for search ads
  • They should use location targeting

 

Research for a client who owns used car dealerships shows that people who visit his website also visit certain popular car blogs. Which targeting method would you use to reach these people?

  • Placements
  • Keywords
  • Remarketing
  • Topics

 

By monitoring ad campaign performance, an advertiser may obtain the information needed to:

  • compare campaign performance to that of other advertisers
  • create separate Google Ads accounts for low-performing keywords
  • determine if campaigns are meeting overall marketing and conversion goals
  • create duplicate ad groups with identical keywords and different ad variations

 

Conversion tracking helps you improve the return on investment (ROI) from your online advertising because it:

  • focuses on getting customers to complete an online purchase
  • automatically gives you personal details about the people who convert
  • shows you which ads lead to customer actions that have value for your business
  • measures trends relating to the search terms people have used before seeing your ad

 

Your client is interested in switching from TV, print, and radio advertising. What are the return on investment (ROI) benefits of online advertising campaigns over traditional media advertising?

  • Traditional media typically requires a predetermined quarterly budget, but online advertising usually lets you set your budget once a month at a fixed amount
  • Online advertising is always less expensive than traditional media
  • Traditional media generates exposure, but online advertising campaigns can guarantee sales
  • Traditional media is not always measurable, but online campaigns are highly measurable and you can analyze your click data

 

In addition to how much the advertiser will pay, which two factors are decided by the Google Ads auction? (Choose 2).

  • How quickly your landing page will load once a user clicks on the ad
  • The ad’s position on the page
  • The design of the ad, including font and color
  • Whether or not the ad actually shows

 

Negative keywords can help advertisers better target their ads by:

  • reducing their campaign’s daily budget recommendations
  • raising the average position of their ads
  • reducing the number of irrelevant clicks
  • increasing the number of relevant Display Network placements

 

All other things being equal, if you’ve set a maximum cost–per–click (max. CPC) bid of USD $1 for your ads, and if the next most competitive bid is USD $0.50 for the same ad position, what is the actual amount you’d pay for that click?

  • $0.51
  • $1
  • $0.50
  • $1.01

 

Your new client’s Google Ads account has one campaign with one ad group that contains a list of hundreds of keywords. Which best practice should you follow when re–organizing this client’s keywords?

  • Create new ad groups with related keywords grouped together
  • Create new ad groups with several keyword match types
  • Remove half of the keywords from the ad group
  • Create one ad group for every five keywords

 

Anne–Marie’s business goal is to generate online sales of her handmade purses. Her Google Ads costs are $100 per week and she wants to know if her advertising investment is paying off. What additional information do you need in order to calculate her return on investment (ROI)?

  • How many times her ads have been viewed and clicked on
  • Number of clicks on her ads and costs to produce her purses
  • Number of clicks on her ads and revenue they generated
  • Costs to produce her purses and revenue generated from her ads

 

While teaching a new account manager how to build a Search campaign, you tell her that she should group similar keywords together in an ad group because it will allow her to:

  • create a different ad for each keyword
  • only create one ad that’s relevant to all keywords
  • create multiple ads for each keyword
  • create ads that are relevant to all keywords

 

You can win a higher ad position in the auction with a lower cost–per–click (CPC) bid by:

  • creating ads that include terms or phrases people are searching for
  • creating ads that link to a generic landing page
  • All of the listed answers
  • creating high–quality ads and landing pages

 

If you bid $2 for a click and the next highest bid is $1.25, how much will you pay?

  • $2
  • $1.24
  • $1
  • $1.26

 

Which of these metrics is especially important to clients who are running a branding campaign?

  • Phone call conversions
  • Average cost–per–click (avg. CPC)
  • Clickthrough rate (CTR)
  • Impressions

 

When building a keyword list for a Display Network campaign, you should do which of the following:

  • use agressive targeting to identify new keywords
  • include keywords that are related to the websites your customers visit
  • only use Keyword Planner to identify new keywords
  • only include exact match keywords

 

In order to appeal to customers on mobile devices, it’s important to:

  • Send users to a mobile–friendly landing page
  • Send users to a video–based landing page
  • Avoid using ad extensions
  • Include your phone number as your display URL

 

If you want to direct people to specific pages on your website from your ad, you can create an ad that uses:

  • location extensions
  • promotion extensions
  • callout extensions
  • sitelink extensions

 

When setting up a Search Network campaign for a client, you want her ad to get as many clicks as possible within her budget. Which bid strategy should you use to achieve this goal?

  • Maximize Clicks
  • Cost-per-thousand impressions (CPM)
  • Cost-per-acquisition (CPA)
  • Manual cost-per-click (CPC)

 

Which ad extension would you use for an advertiser who has a chain of local restaurants?

  • Sitelink extensions
  • Promotion extensions
  • Seller ratings
  • Location extensions

 

You want to generate leads with your Google Ads campaign by encouraging people to fill out an interest form on your website. What do you need to know to measure return on investment (ROI) for this campaign?

  • The number of clicks your ad received divided by the number of times it showed
  • How much you’ve spent on the campaign compared to the value of leads generated
  • You can’t calculate return on investment for campaigns that are focused on online leads
  • The percentage of budget spent compared to how many forms were completed

 

Higher Quality Scores typically result in:

  • lower costs only
  • better ad positions only
  • higher costs and better ad positions
  • lower costs and better ad positions

 

Donna sells t–shirts featuring vintage album covers. She wants people searching for unusual t–shirts to find her website, but she also thinks people interested in music might make a purchase. What campaign type would you recommend?

  • “Display Network”
  • “Search Network”
  • “Search Network with Display Opt-in”
  • “Video”

 

A client who owns an online running shoe store wants to drive sales of a particular model of women’s running shoes. What keywords should you include in this client’s keyword list to help achieve their goal?

  • Generic terms about running and running shoes
  • Specific terms about the shoe brand and model your client is selling
  • Specific terms about the benefits of running
  • Generic terms about different types of women’s shoes

 

You sell autographed sports memorabilia and want to reach people interested in sports. What’s one benefit of promoting your products with an Ads in Mobile Apps campaign on the Display Network?

  • It lets people who see your ad get directions to your store on Google Maps
  • It encourages people using mobile devices to install your app
  • It allows you to show your ad on app categories that you choose
  • It directs people to your online store to purchase your products

 

 

 

Get Certified in Google Ads Fundamentals NOW!!!